Pioneer Elite PureVision PRO 1110HD Operating Instructions
PLASMA DISPLA Y SYSTEM PRO-1 1 10HD PRO-910HD Operating Instructions Register Y our Product on www .pioneerelectronics.com PDP-ELITE-Eng (Cover) 9/9/03, 11:42 1
Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water . Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturerâ s instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other . A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer . Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer , or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over . Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way , such as power -supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally , or has been dropped. 11) 12) 13) 14) Note to CA TV system installer . This reminder is pr ovided to call the CA TV system installerâ s attention to Ar ticle 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper gr ounding and, in particular , specifies that the cable groundâÂÂshall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. A VERTISSEMENT : CET APP AREIL NâÂÂEST P AS ÃÂT ANCHE. POUR ÃÂVITER TOUT RISQUE DâÂÂINCENDIE OU TOUTE SECOUSSE ÃÂLECTRIQUE, NE L âÂÂEXPOSEZ P AS àL A PL UIE NI àL âÂÂHUMIDITÃÂ, NE LE PLACEZ P AS àPROXIMITàDâÂÂUN POINT DâÂÂEA U NI DâÂÂUN V ASE, DâÂÂUN FLACON DE COSMÃÂTIQUE OU DE MÃÂDICAMENT , ETC. W ARNING: THE APP ARA TUS IS NOT W A TER- PROOFS, TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOIS- TURE AND DO NOT PUT ANY W A TER SOURCE NEAR THIS APP ARA TUS, SUCH AS VASE, FL OWER POT , COSMETICS CONT AINER AND MEDICINE BOT TLE ETC. PDP-ELITE-Eng (02-03) 9/9/03, 16:32 2
CAUTION: This product satisfies FCC regulations when shielded cables and connectors are used to connect the unit to other equipment. T o prevent electromagnetic inter fer- ence with electric appliances such as radios and televi- sions, use shielded cables and connectors for connec- tions. FEDERAL COMMUNICA TIONS COMMISSION DECLARA TION OF CONFORMITY This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Op- eration is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including inter ference that may cause undesired op- eration. Pr oduct Name: Plasma Display System (Plasma Display) (Media Receiver) Model Number: PRO -1110HD PRO-910HD (PRO-504PU) (PRO-434PU) (PRO-R04U) (PRO-R04U) Pr oduct Categor y: Class B P ersonal Computers & Pe- ripherals Re sponsible P arty Name: PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA), INC., Customer Support Div . Address: P .O. BO X 1760, L ONG BEACH , CA., 90801-1760 U.S.A. Phone: (800) 421-1625 Fo r Business Customer URL http://www .PioneerUSA.com IMPORT ANT NOTICE: The serial number for this equipment is located on the rear panel. Please write this serial number on your enclosed warranty card and keep it in a secure area. This is for your security . WARNING: Handling the cord on this product or cords associated with accessories sold with the prod- uct will expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of California and other governmental entities to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. W ash hands after handling . NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pur - suant to P art 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio fre- quency energy and, if not installed and used in accor - dance with the instructions, may cause harmful inter - ference to radio communications. However , there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a par- ticular installation. If this equipment does cause harm- ful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the inter- ference by one or more of the following measures: â Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. â Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver . â Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. â Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV tech- nician for help. Information to User Alteration or modifications carried out without appro- priate authorization may invalidate the user âÂÂs right to operate the equipment. [For Canadian model] This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. [P our le modèle destiné au Canada] Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme àla norme canadienne ICES-003. DO NOT PLACE THIS PRODUCT ON AN UNST ABLE CART , ST AND, TRIPOD, BRACKET , OR T ABLE. THE PRODUCT MAY F ALL, CAUSING SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND SERIOUS DAMAGE TO THE PRODUCT . USE ONL Y WITH A CART , STAND, TRIPOD, BRACKET , OR T ABLE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER , OR SOLD WITH THE PRODUCT . FOLLOW THE MANUF ACTUREâÂÂS INSTRUCTIONS WHEN INST ALLING THE PRODUCT AND USE MOUNTING ACCESSORIES RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUF ACTURER. A PRODUCT AND CART COMBINA TION SHOULD BE MOVED WITH THE CARE. QUICK STOPS, EXCESSIVE FORCE, AND UNEVEN SURF ACES MA Y CAUSE THE PRODUCT AND CART COMBINA TION TO OVERTURN. NE DÃÂPOSEZ P AS L âÂÂAPP AREIL SUR UNE T ABLE, UN CHARIOT , UN SUPPORT , UN TRÃÂPIED, UNE CONSOLE INST ABLES. CET APP AREIL POURRAIT TOMBER, PROVOQUANT DES BLESSURES GRA VES OU DES DOMMAGES PHYSIQUES IMPORT ANTS. UTILISEZ UNIQUEMENT UN CHARIOT , UN SUPPORT , UN TRÃÂPIED, UNE CONSOLE OU UNE T ABLE CONSEILLÃÂS P AR LE FABRICANT OU VENDUS A VEC L âÂÂAPP AREIL. RESPECTEZ LES INSTRUCTIONS DU F ABRICANT POUR TOUT CE QUI CONCERNE L âÂÂINST ALLA TION DE Lâ APP AREIL ET L âÂÂEMPL OI DES ACCESSOIRES DE MONT AGE QUâÂÂIL CONSEILLE. Lâ ENSEMBLE QUE FORME UN APP AREIL ET LE CHARIOT àL âÂÂAIDE DUQUEL ON LE DÃÂPLACE, DOIT ÃÂTRE MANà ÂUVRàAVEC PRÃÂCA UTION. LES ARRÃÂTS BRUSQUES, LES POUSSÃÂES EXCESSIVES ET LES IRRÃÂGULARITÃÂS DU PL ANCHER , PEUVENT PROVOQUER LE BASCULEMENT DU CHARIOT ET LA CHUTE DE L âÂÂAPP AREIL. PDP-ELITE-Eng (02-03) 9/9/03, 16:32 3
Contents 4 En 01 Important User Guidance Information 02 Safety Precautions 03 Operational Precautions 04 Features 05 Supplied Accessories Plasma Display ................................................................... 12 Media Receiver .................................................................... 12 06 Part Names Plasma Display ................................................................... 13 Media Receiver .................................................................... 14 Remote control unit ............................................................ 16 07 Preparation Allowed operation range of the remote control unit ....... 17 Installing the Plasma Display ............................................ 17 Installing the Media receiver ............................................. 18 Installing the Media R eceiver vertically ...................... 19 Setting the system .............................................................. 20 R outing cables .................................................................... 21 Using the remote control unit ........................................... 22 Cautions regarding the remote control unit .............. 22 Inserting batteries ......................................................... 22 Cautions regarding batteries ....................................... 23 Cable connections for watching conventional TV channels .............................................................................. 24 Connecting a VHF/UHF antenna ................................. 24 Connecting a Cable Converter .................................... 24 Connecting a VHF/UHF antenna and Cable Converter ....................................................................... 25 Switching between tuner A and B .............................. 25 Cable connections for watching digital TV channels ...... 26 Connecting a VHF/UHF antenna ................................. 26 Connecting for cable TV ............................................... 26 Connecting the power cord ............................................... 27 08 Basic Operations T urning on the power .......................................................... 28 T urning off the power .......................................................... 29 Wa tching conventional TV channels ................................. 30 Selecting the antenna .................................................. 30 Changing channels ...................................................... 30 Changing the volume and sound ................................ 31 Setting MTS/SAP mode ............................................... 32 Wa tching digital TV channels ............................................ 34 Selecting the digital TV input ....................................... 34 Changing channels ...................................................... 34 Changing the volume and sound ................................ 35 Changing the language ................................................ 35 Vi ewing DTV banners ................................................... 36 Using the multiscreen functions ....................................... 36 Splitting the screen ...................................................... 36 F reezing images ............................................................ 37 09 Basic Adjustment Settings Using the menu .................................................................. 38 AV mode menus ............................................................ 38 PC mode menus ........................................................... 39 Menu operation keys .................................................... 40 Setting up conventional TV channels ............................... 41 Using Auto Channel P reset ......................................... 41 Setting for skipping unwanted channels .................... 42 Setting your favorite channels ..................................... 43 Setting up digital TV channels ........................................... 44 Using Auto Channel P reset ......................................... 44 Setting for skipping unwanted channels .................... 45 Checking signal strength ............................................. 45 Language setting ................................................................ 46 Clock setting ........................................................................ 46 AV Selection ........................................................................ 47 Pi cture adjustments ........................................................... 48 PureCinema .................................................................. 49 Color temperature ........................................................ 50 MPEG NR ....................................................................... 51 DNR ............................................................................... 51 CTI .................................................................................. 52 DRE ................................................................................ 52 Color Management ....................................................... 53 Sound adjustments ............................................................ 53 FOCUS ........................................................................... 54 F ront Surround .............................................................. 54 P ower Control ...................................................................... 55 P ower Control for AV source ........................................ 55 P ower Control for PC source ....................................... 56 10 Electr onic Program Guide (EPG) (for DTV Only) EPG display format ............................................................. 57 Using the EPG ..................................................................... 58 P resetting TV programs using the EPG ............................ 59 Using auto channel select ........................................... 59 Recording TV programs using a D- VHS recorder ...... 60 Recording TV programs via a VCR controller ............. 61 Setting the timer manually ................................................ 62 Pr iority rules for overlapped presettings ........................... 63 Changing/ canceling TV program presettings ................. 64 Using the EPG ............................................................... 64 Using the menu ............................................................ 64 Thank you for buying this P ioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly . After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference. In some countries or regions, the shape of the power plug and power outlet may sometimes differ from that shown in the explanatory drawings. However the method of connecting and operating the unit is the same. PDP-ELITE-Eng (04-05) 9/9/03, 11:43 4
Contents 5 En 11 Enjoying through External Equipment W atching a DVD image ...................................................... 65 Connecting a DVD player ............................................. 65 Displaying a DVD image .............................................. 65 W atching a VCR image ...................................................... 66 Connecting a VCR ........................................................ 66 Displaying a VCR image ............................................... 66 Enjoying a game console or watching camcorder images .............................................................. 67 Connecting a game console or camcorder ................ 67 Displaying an image of the game console or camcorder ..................................................................... 67 Recording digital TV programs using a VCR or DVD recorder ............................................................................... 68 Connecting a recorder ................................................. 68 Connecting other audio equipment .................................. 69 Connecting an AV receiver .......................................... 69 Switching the optical audio signal type ...................... 69 W atching a D-VHS image ................................................... 70 What is i.LINK? .............................................................. 70 Which i.LINK devices are connectable? ..................... 70 What can be recorded through i.LINK? ...................... 70 Connecting D-VHS recorders ...................................... 70 Displaying a D - VHS image ........................................... 72 Useful and important notification ............................... 72 Setting up for controlling a D - VHS recorder .............. 73 Operating the control panel screen ............................ 74 Editing the i.LINK list .................................................... 74 Setting up for i.LINK standby ....................................... 76 W atching an image from a personal computer ............... 77 Connecting a personal computer ............................... 77 Displaying an image from a personal computer ....... 77 Connecting a VCR controller ............................................. 78 The lists of controllable recording equipment manufactures ............................................ 79 Connecting control cords .................................................. 80 About SR .................................................................... 80 12 Useful Adjustment Settings Adjusting image positions (AV mode only) ...................... 81 Adjusting image positions and clock automatically (PC mode only) .................................................................... 81 Adjusting image positions and clock manually (PC mode only) .................................................................... 82 Selecting a screen size ....................................................... 83 Changing the brightness at both sides of the screen (Side Mask) .......................................................................... 84 Sleep Timer .......................................................................... 85 Closed caption for conventional TV channels .................. 86 Activating the closed caption ...................................... 86 Selecting the type of closed captions ......................... 86 Closed caption for digital TV channels ............................. 87 Activating the closed caption ...................................... 87 Selecting the type of conventional closed captions (for digital TV channels) ............................................... 87 Selecting digital closed captions ................................ 88 Selecting digital closed caption parameters ............. 88 P arental Control (setting the V - CHIP level) ....................... 90 Activating the P arental Control ................................... 90 Setting the voluntary moving rating system (MP AA) ............................................................. 91 Blocking Not Rated (NR) TV programs ....................... 91 Setting the TV P arental Guidelines (TV Guidelines) ... 92 Canadian rating systems ............................................. 92 Setting Canadian English ratings ............................... 93 Setting Canadian F rench ratings ................................ 93 T emporarily deactivating the V -CHIP Block ................ 94 R eactivating the V - CHIP Block .................................... 94 P rogramming a password (A V mode only) ....................... 95 Setting and changing the password ........................... 95 Resetting the password ............................................... 96 13 Useful Features Learning function of the remote control unit ................... 97 Using the learning function ......................................... 97 P resetting manufacture codes .................................... 98 Manufacture codes ...................................................... 99 Using the remote control unit to control other devices ..................................................................... 100 R eceiver control buttons ............................................ 100 Cable control buttons ................................................. 101 SA T control buttons .................................................... 102 VCR control buttons ................................................... 103 DVD/DVR control buttons .......................................... 104 14 Appendix Tr oubleshooting ................................................................ 106 Computer compatibility chart .......................................... 107 Specifications .................................................................... 108 PDP-ELITE-Eng (04-05) 9/9/03, 11:43 5
01 Important User Guidance Information 6 En In order to obtain maximum enjoyment from this Pi oneer PureVision PRO-1110HD/PRO-910HD Plasma Display System, please first read this information carefully . W ith the P ioneer PureV ision PRO-1110HD/PRO-910HD, you can be assured of a high quality Plasma Display System with long-life and high reliability . T o achieve images of exceptional quality , this Pioneer Plasma Display System incorporates state-of-the-art design and construction, as well as very precise and highly advanced technology . Over the course of its lifetime, the luminosity of the Pi oneer PRO -1110HD/PRO-910HD Plasma Display System will diminish ver y slowly , such as with all phosphor-based screens (for example, a traditional tube-type television). T o enjoy beautiful and bright images on your P ioneer Plasma Display System for many years to come, please carefully read and follow the usage guidelines below . Usage guidelines All phosphor-based screens (including conventional tube-type televisions) can be affected by displaying static images for a prolonged period. Plasma Display Systems are no exception to this rule. After-image and permanent effects on the screen can be avoided by taking some basic precautions. By following the recom- mendations listed below , you can ensure longer and satisfactor y results from your plasma: ⢠Whenever possible, avoid frequently displaying the same image or virtually still moving pictures (e.g. closed-captioned images or video game images which have static portions). ⢠Avoid viewing the On Screen Display for extended periods, from a DVD player , VCR, and all other components. ⢠Do not leave the same picture freeze-framed or paused continuously over a long period of time, when using the still picture mode from a TV , VCR , DVD player or any other component. â¢I mages which have both ver y bright areas and ver y dark areas side by side should not be displayed for a prolonged period of time. ⢠When playing a game, the âÂÂGAMEâ mode setting within â AV Selection â is strongly recommended. However , please limit its use to less than 2 hours at a time. â¢A ft er playing a game, or displaying a PC image or any still image, it is best to view a normal moving picture in the âÂÂWIDEâ or âÂÂFULL â screen setting for over 3 times longer than the previous still/moving image. â¢A ft er using the Plasma Display System, always switch the display to âÂÂST ANDBYâ mode. Installation guidelines The P ioneer P ureV ision PRO-1110HD/PRO -910HD Plasma Display System incorporates a very thin design. To ensure safety , please take the proper measures to mount or install the Plasma Display , in order to prevent the unit from tipping over in the event of vibration or accidental movement. This product should be installed by using only parts and accessories designed by PIONEER . Use of accessories other than the PIONEER stand or installation bracket may result in instability , and could cause injury. F or custom installation, please consult the dealer where the unit was purchased. T o ensure correct installation, experienced and qualified experts must install the unit. PIONEER will not be held responsible for accident or damage caused by the use of parts and accessories manufactured by other companies. To avoid malfunction and overheating when installing, make sure that the vents on the main unit are not blocked. T o ensure proper heat emission: â¢D istance the unit slightly from other equipment, walls, etc. F or the minimum space required around the unit, see pages 17 and 18. ⢠Do not fit the unit inside narrow spaces where ventilation is poor . ⢠Do not cover with a cloth, etc. â¢C lean the vents on the sides and rear of the unit to remove dust build-up by using a vacuum cleaner set to its lowest suction setting. ⢠Do not place the product on a carpet or blanket. ⢠Do not leave the product tilted over except the case of vertical installation of the Media Receiver . ⢠Do not reverse the product. Using the unit without proper ventilation may cause the internal temperature to rise, and could result in possible malfunction . When the surrounding or internal temperature exceeds a certain degree, the display will automatically power off in order to cool the internal electronics and prevent a hazardous occurrence. Malfunction can be caused by many factors: inappropriate installation site, improper assembly/ installation/mounting, improper operation of or modifications made to this product. However , PIONEER cannot be held responsible for accidents or malfunction caused by the above. Ty pical effects and characteristics of a phosphor-based matrix display such as permanent residual images upon the phosphors of the panel and the existence of a minute number of inactive light cells in the screen are not covered by local warranties. PDP-ELITE-Eng (06-12) 9/9/03, 11:43 6
01 Important User Guidance Information 7 En P anel sticking and after-image lag â¢D isplaying the same images such as still images for a long time may cause after-image lagging. This may occur in the following two cases. 1. After-image lagging due to r emaining electric load When image patterns with ver y high peak luminance are displayed more than 1 minute, after-image lagging may occur due to the remaining electric load. The after- images remaining on the screen will disappear when moving images are displayed. The time for the after- images to disappear depends on the luminance of the still images and the time they had been displayed. 2. After-image (lag image) due to bur ning Avoid displaying the same image on the Plasma Display continuously over a long period of time. If the same image is displayed continuously for several hours, or for shorter periods of time over several days, a permanent after-image may remain on the screen due to burning of the fluorescent materials. Such images may become less noticeable if moving images are later displayed, but they will not disappear completely . ⢠The Energy save function can be set to help prevent damage from screen burning (see page 55). About operations through i.LINK PIONEER shall not always assure normal video/audio recording or playback when a D-VHS is operated through i.LINK. PDP-ELITE-Eng (06-12) 9/9/03, 16:33 7
02 Safety Precautions 8 En Electricity is used to perform many useful functions, but it can also cause personal injuries and property damage if improperly handled. This product has been engineered and manufactured with the highest priority on safety . However , improper use can result in electric shock and/or fire. In order to prevent potential danger , please obser ve the following instructions when installing, operating and cleaning the product. T o ensure your safety and prolong the ser vice life of your product, please read the following precautions carefully before using the product. 1. Read instructionsâÂÂAll operating instructions must be read and understood before the product is operated. 2. Keep this manual in a safe placeâÂÂThese safety and operating instructions must be kept in a safe place for future reference. 3. Observe warningsâÂÂAll warnings on the product and in the instructions must be observed closely . 4. F ollow instructionsâÂÂAll operating instructions must be followed. 5. CleaningâÂÂUnplug the power cord from the AC outlet before cleaning the product. Use a damp cloth to clean the product. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol clean- ers. 6. AttachmentsâÂÂDo not use attachments not recom- mended by the manufacturer . Use of inadequate attach- ments can result in accidents. 7. W ater and moistureâÂÂDo not use the product near water , such as bathtub, washbasin, kitchen sink and laundry tub, swimming pool and in a wet basement. 8. StandâÂÂDo not place the product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod or table. Placing the product on an unstable base can cause the product to fall, resulting in serious personal injuries as well as damage to the product. Use only a cart, stand, tripod, bracket or table recommended by the manufacturer or sold with the product. When mounting the product on a wall, be sure to follow the manufacturer âÂÂs instructions. Use only the mounting hardware recommended by the manufacturer . 9. When relocating the product placed on a cart, it must be moved with utmost care. Sudden stops, excessive force and nueven floor surface can cause the product to fall from the cart. 10. V entilationâÂÂThe vents and other openings in the cabinet are designed for ventilation. Do not cover or block these vents and openings since insufficient ventilation can cause overheating and/or shorten the life of the product. Do not place the product on a bed, sofa, rug or other similar surface, since they can block ventilation openings. This product is not designed for built-in installation; do not place the product in an enclosed place such as a bookcase or rack, unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer âÂÂs instructions are followed. 11. P ower sourceâÂÂThis product must operate on a power source specified on the specification label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply used in your home, consult your dealer or local power company . 12. P ower cord protectionâÂÂThe power cords must be routed properly to prevent people from stepping on them or objects from resting on them. Check the cords at the plugs and product. 13. The plasma Display used in this product is made of glass. Therefore, it can break when the product is dropped or applied with impact. Be careful not to be injured by broken glass pieces in case the plasma Display breaks. 14. OverloadingâÂÂDo not overload AC outlets or extension cords. Overloading can cause fire or electric shock. 15. Entering of objects and liquidsâÂÂNever insert an object into the product through vents or openings. High voltage flows in the product, and inserting an object can cause electric shock and/or short internal parts. F or the same reason, do not spill water or liquid on the product. 16. Ser vicingâÂÂDo not attempt to ser vice the product yourself . R emoving covers can expose you to high voltage and other dangerous conditions. R equest a qualified ser vice person to perform ser vicing. 17. RepairâÂÂIf any of the following conditions occurs, unplug the power cord from the AC outlet, and request a qualified service person to per form repairs. a. When the power cord or plug is damaged. b. When a liquid was spilled on the product or when objects have fallen into the product. c. When the product has been exposed to rain or water . d. When the product does not operate properly as described in the operating instructions. Do not touch the controls other than those described in the operating instructions. Improper adjustment of controls not described in the instructions can cause damage, which often requires extensive adjustment work by a qualified technician . e. When the product has been dropped or damaged. f. When the product displays an abnormal condition. Any noticeable abnormality in the product indicates that the product needs servicing. 18. Replacement partsâÂÂIn case the product needs replace- ment parts, make sure that the service person uses replacement parts specified by the manufacturer , or those with the same characteristics and performance as the original parts. Use of unauthorized parts can result in fire, electric shock and/or other danger . 19. Safety checksâÂÂUpon completion of ser vice or repair work, request the service technician to per form safety checks to ensure that the product is in proper operating condition . 20. Wall or ceiling mountingâÂÂWhen mounting the product on a wall or ceiling, be sure to install the product according to the method recommended by the manufac- turer . 21. Heat sourcesâÂÂKeep the product away from heat sources such as radiators, heaters, stoves and other heat- generat- ing products (including amplifiers). 22. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet before install- ing the speakers. 23. Never expose the screen of the Plasma Display to a strong impact, for example, by hitting it. The screen may be broken, resulting in fire or personal injury . 24. Do not expose the Plasma Display to direct sunlight for a long period of time. The optical characteristics of the front protection panel changes, resulting in discoloration or warp. 25. The Plasma Display weighs about 38 kg (83.8 lbs.) for the PRO-504PU and about 30.5 kg (67.3 lbs.) for the PRO- 434PU. Because it has small depth and is unstable, unpack, carry, and install the product with one more person at least and use the handles. PDP-ELITE-Eng (06-12) 9/9/03, 11:43 8
02 Safety Precautions 9 En ⢠Be sure to use four or more mounting holes symmetrical to the vertical and horizontal median lines. ⢠Use M8 screws, which go 12 to 18 mm (0.5 to 0.7 inches) in depth from the mounting surface of the Plasma Display . See the side view above. ⢠Be careful not to block the ventilation opening at the rear of the Plasma Display . ⢠Be sure to install the Plasma Displayed on a flat sur face because it contains glass. ⢠The screw holes other than the above are to be used only for the specified products. Never use them for mounting non-specified products. ⢠Do not mount or remove the Plasma Display to or from the stand, with speakers attached. ⢠It is strongly recommended to use the optional PIONEER mounting products. â¢P IONEER shall not be liable for any personal injury or product damage that results from the use of mounting items other than the optional PIONEER products. Installation Precautions Obser ve the following precautions when installing with any items such as the optional stand. When using the optional stand, brackets, or equivalent items ⢠Ask your dealer to per form the installation. ⢠Be sure to use the supplied bolts. â¢F or details, see the instruction manual that comes with the optional stand (or equivalent items). When using other items ⢠Consult your dealer . ⢠The following six mounting holes can be used for the installation: Median line Mounting hole Mounting hole R ear view Median line Side view Plasma Display Mounting surface 12 to 18 mm (0.5 to 0.7 inches) M8 screw Mounting bracket (or equivalent item) PDP-ELITE-Eng (06-12) 9/9/03, 11:43 9
03 Operational Pr ecautions 10 En PIONEER bears no responsibility for any damages arising from incorrect use of the product by you or other people, malfunctions when in use, other product related problems, and use of the product except in cases where the company must be liable. Plasma Display pr otection function When still images (such as photos and computer images) stay on the screen for an extended period of time, the screen will be slightly dimmed. This is be- cause the protection function of the Plasma Display automatically adjusts the brightness to protect the screen when detecting still images; so this does not designate malfunction. The screen is dimmed when a still image is detected for about three minutes. Infrared rays The Plasma Display releases infrared rays because of its characteristics. Depending on how the Plasma Display is in use, the remote controls of nearby equip- ment may be adversely affected or wireless headphones using infrared rays are interfered by noise. If this is the case, place that equipment at a location where its remote control sensor is not affected. R adio interfer ence While this product meets the required specifications, it emits a small amount of noise. If you place such equipment as an AM radio, personal computer , and VCR close to this product, that equipment may be interfered. If this happens, place that equipment far enough from this product. F an motor noise When ambient temperature of the Media R eceiver becomes high, the rotation speed of the cooling fan motor increases. This may make you feel that the fan motor is noisy at such an occasion . Do not attach such items as labels and tape to the pr oduct. ⢠This may result in the discoloration or scratch of the cabinet. When not using the product for a long period of time ⢠If you do not use the product for a long period of time, the functions of the product may be adversely af- fected. Switch on and run the product occasionally . Condensation ⢠Condensation may take place on the surface or inside of the product when the product is rapidly moved from a cold place to a warm place or just after a heater is switched on in winter morning, for example. When condensation takes place, do not switch on the product and wait until condensation disappears. Using the product with condensation may result in malfunction. Cleaning the screen ⢠When cleaning the screen of this product, gently wipe it with a dry sof t cloth; the supplied cleaning cloth or other similar cloths (e.g., cotton and flannel). If you use a hard cloth or rub the screen hard, the sur face of the screen will be scratched. ⢠If you clean the surface of the screen with a wet cloth, water droplets on the sur face may enter into the product, resulting in malfunction. Cleaning the cabinet ⢠The cabinet of this product is mostly composed of plastic. Do not use chemicals such as benzine or thinner to clean the cabinet. Using these chemicals may result in quality deterioration or coating removal. ⢠Do not expose the product to volatile gas or fluid such as pesticide. Do not make the product contact with rubber or vinyl products for a long period of time. The effect of plasticizer in the plastic may result in quality deterioration or coating removal. ⢠If you clean the surface of the cabinet with a wet cloth, water droplets on the sur face may enter into the product, resulting in malfunction. Handles at the r ear of the Plasma Display ⢠Do not remove the handles from the rear of the Plasma Display . ⢠When moving the Plasma Display , ask another person for help and use the handles attached to the rear of the Plasma Display . Do not move the Plasma Display by holding only a single handle. Use the handles as shown. ⢠Do not use the handles to hang the product when installing or carr ying the product, for example. Do not use the handles for the purpose of preventing the product from tilting over . PDP-ELITE-Eng (06-12) 9/9/03, 11:43 10
04 Featur es 11 En ⢠Built-in Digital T elevision (DTV) T uner ⢠EPG for DTV programs ⢠New WIDE XGA Plasma Panel PRO-1110HD: 1280 x 768 (H x V) pixels PRO-910HD: 1024 x 768 (H x V) pixels ⢠PureCinema â¢T r uBass, FOCUS, and SRS sound systems ⢠Dual TV T uner ⢠Multi-scr een display (2-screen/pictur e-in-picture) ⢠Still image function ⢠4-Language On Screen Display â¢4 -V ideo Input and PC (XGA) Input â¢3 - Component Video Input ⢠2-i.LINK interface â¢P arental Contr ol System (V - CHIP) â¢P ower-Saving Design PDP-ELITE-Eng (06-12) 9/9/03, 11:43 11
05 Supplied Accessories 12 En Plasma Display Media Receiver Operating instruction â¢A lways use the power cord supplied with the Plasma Display and the one supplied with the Media Receiver for each respective unit. P ower cord (2 m/6.6 feet) Cleaning cloth Speed clamp x 3 Bead band x 3 W arranty card Speaker cushion x 3 (Use when installing the optional speakers at the bottom of the Plasma Display .) P ower cord (2 m/6.6 feet) R emote control unit System cable (3 m/9.8 feet) AA size batter y x 2 (Alkaline batter y) Stand Screw x 4 (for stand) Screw hole cap x 4 VCR controller x 1 (1.8 m/5.9 feet) Coaxial cable (0.15 m/0.49 feet) x 1 (Already set at the rear of the Media R eceiver) PDP-ELITE-Eng (06-12) 9/9/03, 11:43 12
06 Part Names 13 En Plasma Display 1 POWER button 2 ST ANDBY indicator 3 POWER ON indicator 4 Re mote control sensor 1 2 4 3 5 6 7 8 (right view) 5 ST ANDBY/ON button 6 INP UT button 7 VOLUME /â buttons 8 CHANNEL / â buttons 0 9 - = Re ar view Fr ont view 9 SYSTEM CABLE terminal (BLACK) 0 SYSTEM CABLE terminal (WHITE) - SPEAKER (right/left) terminals = AC INLET terminal The terminals have faced downward. PDP-ELITE-Eng (13-16) 9/9/03, 11:43 13
06 Part Names 14 En Media Receiver Fr ont view 1 POWER button 2 POWER ON indicator 3 ST ANDBY indicator 4 REC TIMER indicator 5 INPUT 4 COMPONENT VIDEO terminals (Y , C B/ P B, C R/ P R) 6 INPUT 4 terminal (S- VIDEO) 7 INPUT 4 terminal (VIDEO) 8 INPUT 4 terminals (AUDIO) 9 PC INPUT terminal (A UDIO) 0 PC INPUT terminal (ANAL OG RGB) 1 2 3 4 6 78 9 0 5 Pu ll this section to open the door . PDP-ELITE-Eng (13-16) 9/9/03, 11:43 14
06 Part Names 15 En Re ar view 1 Antenna A input terminal 2 RS-232C terminal (used in the factory setup) 3 Antenna B input terminal 4 Control input terminal 5 Control output terminal 6 VCR control terminal 7 INPUT 2 terminal (VIDEO) 8 INPUT 2 terminals (AUDIO) 9 DIGIT AL AUDIO output terminal (OPTICAL) 0 INPUT 1 terminal (VIDEO) - INPUT 1 terminals (AUDIO) = i.LINK terminals ~ DTV Antenna input terminal ! INPUT 1 COMPONENT VIDEO terminals (Y , C B/ P B, C R/ P R) @ AC INLET terminal # Antenna A output terminal $ Antenna B output terminal % INPUT 2 terminal (S- VIDEO) ^ MONITOR OUT terminal (S- VIDEO) & MONITOR OUT terminal (VIDEO) * MONITOR OUT terminals (AUDIO) ( INPUT 1 terminal (S- VIDEO) ) INPUT 3 terminals (AUDIO) _ INPUT 3 COMPONENT VIDEO terminals (Y , C B/ P B, C R/ P R) SYSTEM CABLE terminal (WHITE) á SYSTEM CABLE terminal (BLACK) IN SERVICE ONL Y MONITOR OUT DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL INPUT 1 COMPONENT VIDEO S400 DTV-ANTENNA IN INPUT 3 VCR CONTROL A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN IN OUT CONTROL OUT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y AC INLET BLACK WHITE SYSTEM CABLE R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R VIDEO VIDEO INPUT 2 (TS) VIDEO @ 0 8- 9=~ ! 7 á #$ % ^ & * ( ) _ 23 1 456 PDP-ELITE-Eng (13-16) 9/9/03, 11:43 15
06 Part Names 16 En Remote control unit With the mode switch set to TV 1 TV a : T urns on the power to the Plasma Display or places it into standby mode. 2 T ransmission confirmation LED 3 INPUT : Selects an input source of the Plasma Display . (DTV , i.LINK, INPUT 1, IN- PUT 2, INPUT 3, INPUT 4, PC) 4 â¢(dot) : Enters a dot. 5 CH RETURN : R eturns to the previous chan- nel. Mode switch (with âÂÂTVâ selected) 6 CH /â : Selects the channel. 7 RETURN : Returns to the previous menu screen. 8 / / / : Selects a desired item on the menu screen. 9 DTV INFO : Shows more information on DTV programs. 0 SPLIT : Switches the screen mode among 2- screen, picture-in-picture, and single-screen . - FREEZE : F reezes a frame from a moving image. Press again to cancel the function . = SLEEP : Sets the sleep timer . ~ : When pressed, all buttons on the remote control unit will light. The lighting will turn off if no operations are performed within about 5 seconds. This button is used for performing operations in dark places. ! ANT : Selects the antenna (A, B). See pages 24 to 26 for details. @ 0 â 9 : Sets the channel. # CH ENTER : Executes a channel number . $ VOL /â : Sets the volume. % e MUTING : Mutes the sound. ^ HOME MENU : Displays the menu screen. & ENTER : Executes a command. * DTV GUIDE : Displays the DTV Electronic Pr ogram Guide (EPG). ( FA VORITE CH (A, B, C, D ): Selects any of the four preset channels. See page 43 for details to set the F AVORITE CH . While watching, you can toggle the set chan- nels by pressing A , B , C and D . ) S CREEN SIZE : Selects the screen size. _ DISPL A Y : Displays the channel information . MTS : Selects the MTS/SAP . á AV SELECTION : Selects audio and video settings. (AV mode: ST ANDARD, DYNAMIC, MOVIE, GAME, USER . PC mode: ST ANDARD, USER.) ⢠When using the remote control unit, point it at the Plasma Display . ⢠See pages 97 to 105 for operating buttons not listed on this page. @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ á ! ~ 12 3 5 6 7 4 8 9 0 - = PDP-ELITE-Eng (13-16) 9/9/03, 11:43 16
07 Pr eparation 17 En Installing the Plasma Display L ocating ⢠Avoid direct sunlight. Maintain adequate ventilation. ⢠The length of the system cable used to connect the Plasma Display and the Media R eceiver is about 3 m (118 inches). ⢠Because the Plasma Display is heavy , be sure to have someone help you when moving it. ⢠If you place anything on the top of the Media Receiver it will not receive enough ventilation and will not operate properly . â¢A llow enough space around the upper and back parts when installing to ensure ventilation around the backside. Using the optional PIONEER stand â¢F o r details on installation, refer to the instruction manual provided with the stand. ⢠This product may be used only with model PDK- TS04 stand, use with other stands may result in instability causing possible injury. Using the optional PIONEER speakers â¢F o r details on installation, refer to the instruction manual provided with the speaker . Operating Environment Operating environment temperature and humidity: 0ðC to 40ðC ( 32ðF to 104ðF); less than 85% RH (cooling vents not blocked) Avoid installing at the following locations: ⢠Under direct exposure to sunlight ⢠Under strong artificial light â¢I n high humidity â¢P oorly ventilated Over 50 cm (19 11 / 16 inches) Over 10 cm (3 15 / 16 inches ) Allowed operation range of the remote control unit Operate the remote control unit while pointing it toward the remote control sensor ( t ) located at the bottom right of the front panel of the Plasma Display . The distance from the remote control sensor must be within 7 m (276 inches) and the angle relative to the sensor must be within 30 degrees in the right, left, upward, or downward direction. When the remote contr ol unit does not func- tion properly ⢠When any obstacle exists between the remote control unit and the remote control sensor , the remote control unit may not function . ⢠As the batteries become empty, the remote control unit can function within a shorter distance from the remote control sensor . Replace the batteries with new ones early enough. ⢠The Plasma Display emits ver y weak infrared rays from its screen. If you place such equipment oper - ated through infrared remote control as a VCR nearby , that equipment may not receive commands from its remote control unit properly or entirely . If this is the case, place that equipment at a location far enough from the Plasma Display . ⢠Depending on the installation environment, infrared rays from the Plasma Display may not allow this system to properly receive commands from the remote control unit or may shorten allowable dis- tances between the remote control unit and the remote control sensor . The strength of infrared rays emitted from the screen differs, depending on images displayed on the screen. 30ú 30ú Remote control sensor 7 m (276 inches) PDP-ELITE-Eng (17-27) 9/9/03, 11:44 17
07 Preparation 18 En Installing the Media receiver Plasma Display Media Receiver (vertical installation) (horizontal installation) System cable (approx. 3 meters/9.8 feet) ⢠Do not place a VCR or any other device on top of the Media Receiver . ⢠When installing, allow enough space on the sides and above the Media Receiver . ⢠Do not block the side cooling vents or the r ear ventilation fan opening of the Media Receiver . Over 10 cm (3 15 /16 inches) Over 5 cm (2 inches) Over 5 cm (2 inches) Over 5 cm (2 inches) Over 5 cm (2 inches) Over 5 cm (2 inches) Over 10 cm (3 15 /16 inches) PDP-ELITE-Eng (17-27) 9/9/03, 11:44 18
07 Pr eparation 19 En Right side Installing the Media Receiver vertically Y ou can use the accompanying stand to install the Media Receiver vertically . Installing the Media Receiver vertically Insert the vertical installation stand into the side of the Media Receiver . Secure the vertical installation stand with screws. V ertical installation stand screws Shock absorbing pad Y ou can remove the shock absorbing pads. Keep the shock absorbing pads and screws. They are required when you place the Media Receiver in the horizontal position. Plug the screw holes using the caps pr ovided. ⢠When you have installed the Media Receiver vertically , always use the accompanying stand. If you place the unit dir ectly on the floor the cooling vents will be block ed which will result in mechanical failure. R emove the separation sheet. Screw hole cap Align with the hole and attach. PDP-ELITE-Eng (17-27) 9/9/03, 11:44 19
07 Preparation 20 En IN SERVICE ONL Y MONITOR OUT DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL INPUT 1 COMPONENT VIDEO S400 DTV-ANTENNA IN INPUT 3 VCR CONTROL A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN IN OUT CONTROL OUT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y AC INLET BLACK WHITE SYSTEM CABLE R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO INPUT 2 (TS) Setting the system Connecting the system cable to the Plasma Display ⢠THESE SPEAKER TERMINALS CAN BE UNDER HAZARDOUS VOL T AGE WHEN YOU CONNECT OR DISCONNECT THE SPEAKER CABLES. TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT TOUCH UNINSULA TED P ARTS BEFORE DIS CONNECTING THE POWER CORD. Connecting the system cable to the Media R eceiver F or details on optional PIONEER speaker installation , refer to the speaker instruction manual provided. Plasma Display (rear view) (WHITE) (BLACK) System cable Media Receiver (r ear view) (WHITE) (BL ACK) PDP-ELITE-Eng (17-27) 9/9/03, 11:44 20
07 Pr eparation 21 En Routing cables Speed clamps and bead bands are included with this system for bunching cables. Once properly bunched, follow the steps below to route the cables. When the speakers ar e installed on the sides When the speakers ar e installed at the bottom (rear view) Speaker cable Attaching speed clamps to the main unit Attach the speed clamps using the 4 holes marked with below , depending on your routing system. A ttaching and removing speed clamps Insert 1 into an appropriate hole on the rear of the Plasma Display and snap 2 into the back of 1 to lock the clamp. Speed clamps are designed to be difficult to undo once in place. Please attach them carefully . Use pliers to twist the clamp 90ð, pulling outward. The clamp may deteriorate over time and become damaged if removed. 1 2 Speaker cable Speed clamps Speaker cable Speaker cable Cable binders (supplied with the stand)* Cable binders (supplied with the stand)* * Cable binder Using the cable binders supplied with the stand, put the speaker and system cables together so that the cables are invisible from the front. At that time be careful not to apply any force to the connection sections of the cables. PDP-ELITE-Eng (17-27) 9/9/03, 11:44 21
07 Preparation 22 En Using the r emote control unit Use the remote control unit by pointing it towards the remote sensor window . Objects between the remote control unit and sensor window may prevent proper operation . Cautions regar ding the r emote control unit ⢠Do not expose the remote control unit to shock. In addition, do not expose the remote control unit to liquids, and do not place in an area with high humid- ity . ⢠Do not install or place the remote control unit under direct sunlight. The heat may cause deformation of the unit. ⢠The remote control unit may not work properly if the remote sensor window of the Plasma Display is under direct sunlight or strong lighting. In such case, change the angle of the lighting or Plasma Display set, or operate the remote control unit closer to the remote sensor window . Inserting batteries If the remote control unit fails to operate Plasma Display System functions, replace the batteries in the remote control unit. 1 Open the batter y cover . 2 Insert the two AA size batteries supplied with the product. â¢P lace batteries with their terminals corresponding to the ( ) and (âÂÂ) indicators in the batter y compart- ment. 3 Close the batter y cover . PDP-ELITE-Eng (17-27) 9/9/03, 11:44 22
07 Pr eparation 23 En Cautions regarding batteries Improper use of batteries can result in chemical leakage or explosion. Be sure to follow the instructions below . ⢠Do not use manganese batteries. When you replace the batteries, use alkaline ones. â¢P lace the batteries with their terminals correspond- ing to the ( ) and (âÂÂ) indicators. ⢠Do not mix batteries of different types. Different types of batteries have different characteristics. ⢠Do not mix old and new batteries. Mixing old and new batteries can shorten the life of new batteries or cause chemical leakage in old batteries. ⢠Remove batteries as soon as they have worn out. Chemicals that leak from batteries can cause a rash. If you find any chemical leakage, wipe thoroughly with a cloth. ⢠The batteries supplied with this product may have a shorter life expectancy due to storage conditions. ⢠If you will not use the remote control unit for an extended period of time, remove the batteries from it. ⢠WHEN DISPOSING OF USED BA TTERIES, BE SURE TO COMPL Y WITH GOVERNMENT REGULA TIONS AND ENVIRONMENT AL PRO- TECTION GUIDELINES THA T APPL Y IN YOUR COUNTRY OR AREA. PDP-ELITE-Eng (17-27) 9/9/03, 11:44 23
07 Preparation 24 En IN A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN OUT Cable connections for watching conventional TV channels In order to watch conventional TV channels, connect coaxial cables as shown below . T o enjoy a clearer picture, use an outdoor antenna. If your outdoor antenna uses a 75-ohm coaxial cable with an F-type connector , plug it into the antenna terminal at the rear of the Media Receiver . Connecting a VHF/UHF antenna IN A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN OUT Cable TV VHF antenna Cable Converter UHF antenna U/V mix er The coaxial cable is already connected at the time of purchase. Media Receiver (r ear) Media Receiver (r ear) Connecting a Cable Converter When making the above connections, first remove the coaxial cable attached before shipment. PDP-ELITE-Eng (17-27) 9/9/03, 11:44 24
07 Pr eparation 25 En U/V mixer ⢠Be sure to connect the antenna or the Cable Converter as shown above. Signal r eception may fail if not properly connected. ⢠Be sure that the Cable Converter output signal is assigned to the ANTENNA/CABLE B input on the Media Receiver . ⢠How to change channels when the Cable Converter output signal is connected to the ANTENNA/CABLE B input on the Media Receiver . ⢠P ress ANT on the remote control unit to switch to ANTENNA/CABLE B. ⢠Y ou can view an image right after selecting the output channel on the Cable Converter . Switching between antenna A and B To watch broadcasts via the two antennas, you can select it by pressing ANT on the remote control unit. ⢠While watching a broadcast, press ANT to view the image received from the other antenna. â¢P ressing ANT while viewing in Dual Screen mode (TV image and video image) with TV selected will display the TV image of the other antenna. â¢P ressing ANT while viewing Dual Screen with two TV images displayed will not have any effect. â¢P ressing ANT while viewing Dual Screen with two video images displayed will switch the selected screen to a TV image. Media Receiver (r ear) VHF antenna UHF antenna Cable TV IN A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN OUT Cable Converter When making the above connections, first remove the coaxial cable attached before shipment. Connecting a VHF/UHF antenna and Cable Converter PDP-ELITE-Eng (17-27) 9/9/03, 11:44 25
07 Preparation 26 En Cable connections for watching digital TV channels In order to watch digital TV channels, connect coaxial cables as shown below . T o enjoy a clearer picture, use an outdoor antenna. If your outdoor uses a 75-ohm coaxial cable with an F-type connector , plug it into the antenna terminal at the rear of the Media Receiver . Connecting a VHF/UHF antenna Connecting for cable TV ⢠Be sure to connect coaxial cables as shown above. Signal reception may fail if not properly connected. IN A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN OUT DTV-ANTENNA IN IN A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN OUT DTV-ANTENNA IN U/V mixer VHF antenna UHF antenna Splitter Digital tuner Analog tuner Media Receiver (r ear) Media Receiver (r ear) Splitter Cable TV Digital tuner Analog tuner The coaxial cable is already connected at the time of purchase. When making the above connections, first remove the coaxial cable attached before shipment. Cable Converter PDP-ELITE-Eng (17-27) 9/9/03, 11:44 26
07 Pr eparation 27 En P ower cord P ower cord ⢠Use only the power cord pr ovided. ⢠Do not use a power supply voltage other than that indicated as this may cause fire or electric shock. â¢F or the Plasma Display System, a three-core power cord with a gr ound terminal is used for efficiency protection. Always connect the power cor d to a three-pr onged outlet and make sur e that the cord is pr operly grounded. If you use a power source converter plug, use an outlet with a ground ter minal and scr ew down the ground line. â¢A lways turn off the power of the Plasma Display and Media Receiver when connecting the power cords. ⢠Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet when the Plasma Display System is not going to be used for a long period of time. IN SERVICE ONLY MONITOR OUT DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL INPUT 1 COMPONENT VIDEO S400 DTV-ANTENNA IN INPUT 3 VCR CONTROL A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN IN OUT CONTROL OUT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y AC IN LET BLACK WHITE SYSTEM CABLE R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO INPUT 2 (TS) AC INLET Connecting the power cord Connect the power cord after all component connections have been completed. Plasma Display (rear view) Media R eceiver (rear view) Noise filter P artially eliminates noise caused by the power source. Noise filter P artially eliminates noise caused by the power source. PDP-ELITE-Eng (17-27) 9/9/03, 11:44 27
08 Basic Operations 28 En Plasma Display Tu r ning on the power 1 Pr ess POWER on the Plasma Display . ⢠The ST ANDBY indicator on the Plasma Display flashes red. 2 Pr ess POWER on the Media Receiver . ⢠The system is turned on or placed into the standby mode. 3 Confirm that the ST ANDBY indicators light up red, and then press TV a on the remote control unit or ST ANDBY/ON on the Plasma Display to turn the system on. ⢠The POWER ON indicators on the Plasma Display and Media R eceiver light up green. â¢I n this manual, âÂÂsystemâ means the Plasma Display P anel and Media Receiver . â¢Y ou can also reverse steps 1 and 2. POWER ON indicator POWER button ST ANDBY indicator Media R eceiver POWER ON indicator POWER button ST ANDBY/ON button ST ANDBY indicator (right view) PDP-ELITE-Eng (28-37) 9/9/03, 11:44 28
08 Basic Operations 29 En 2 Pr ess POWER on the Media Receiver . ⢠The ST ANDBY indicator on the Media R eceiver turns off and the one on the Plasma Display flashes red. 3 Pr ess POWER on the Plasma Display . ⢠The ST ANDBY indicator on the Plasma Display turns off . â¢Y ou can also reverse steps 2 and 3. ⢠If you are not going to use this system for a long period of time, be sure to remove the power cord from the power outlet. Tu r ning off the power 1 Pr ess TV a on the remote control unit or ST ANDBY/ON on the Plasma Display . ⢠The system enters the standby mode and the image on the screen disappears. ⢠Both ST ANDBY indicators light up red. ⢠It is recommended to place the system into the standby mode by pressing TV a on the remote control unit. This allows the system to automatically receive Electronic P rogram Guide information signals in the standby mode. Plasma Display/Media Receiver status indicators Indicat or Status S yst em Status Plasma Displa y Media Receiv er POWER ON ST ANDB Y POWER ON ST ANDBY Po w er to the Plasma Displa y and Media Receiver is off . Or the power cords ha ve been disconnected. Po w er to the s y stem is on. The s yst em is in the standby mode. Po w er to the Media R eceiver is off. Or the pow er cor d has been discon- nected fr om the Media Receiver . Po w er to the Plasma Displa y is off. Or the pow er cor d has been discon- nected fr om the Plasma Displa y . Fo r other than the above, see â T roubleshootingâ on page 106. Flashing Flashing PDP-ELITE-Eng (28-37) 9/9/03, 11:44 29
08 Basic Operations 30 En Plasma Display (right view) Channel display 8 AAA STEREO STANDARD FULL W atching conventional TV channels Unless you set up conventional TV channels that you can watch under the current conditions, you cannot tune in those channels. F or the procedure, see âÂÂSetting up conventional TV channelsâ on page 41. ⢠Conventional TV channels in this manual designate TV channels that are received through the conven- tional VHF/UHF frequencies or conventional cable TV channels. Selecting the antenna After confirming that the Mode switch on the remote control unit has been set to âÂÂTVâÂÂ, press ANT on the remote control unit to select antenna A or B. ⢠Make this selection depending on the connections to the antenna input terminals on the Media Receiver (pages 24 to 26). Changing channels Using CH /â on the r emote control unit â¢P ress CH to increase the channel number . â¢P ress CH â to decrease the channel number . ⢠CHANNEL /â on the Plasma Display operates the same as CH /â . Using CH RETURN on the r emote control unit Pr ess CH RETURN to switch the currently tuned channel to the previously tuned channel. Pr ess CH RETURN again to switch back to the currently tuned channel. Using 0 â 9 on the r emote contr ol unit Select channels directly by pressing buttons 0 to 9 . EXAMPLE â¢T o select channel 5 (1-digit channel), press 5 . â¢T o select channel 25 (2-digit channel), press 2 , followed by 5 . â¢T o select channel 125 (3-digit channel), press 1 , then 2 , followed by 5 . â¢A ft er entering a channel number , you may press CH ENTER to tune in the channel more quickly . CHANNEL /â PDP-ELITE-Eng (28-37) 9/9/03, 11:44 30
08 Basic Operations 31 En Plasma Display (right view) Vo lume adjustment Mute VOLUME /â Changing the volume and sound Using VOL /â on the remote contr ol unit â¢T o increase the volume, press VOL . â¢T o decrease the volume, press VOL âÂÂ. ⢠VOLUME /â on the Plasma Display operates the same as VOL /âÂÂ. Using e MUTING on the remote contr ol unit e mutes the current sound output. 1 Pr ess e MUTING . â¢â M â appears on the screen. 2 Pr ess e MUTING again to cancel the mute mode. â¢P ressing VOL can also cancel the mute mode. PDP-ELITE-Eng (28-37) 9/9/03, 11:44 31
08 Basic Operations 32 En Setting MTS/SAP mode The Plasma Display System has a feature that allows reception of sound other than the main audio for the program. This feature is called Multi-channel T elevision Sound (MTS). The Plasma Display System with MTS can receive mono sound, stereo sound and Secondary Audio P rograms (SAP). The SAP feature allows a TV station to broadcast other information, which could be audio in another language or something completely different like weather information. Y ou can enjoy Hi-Fi ster eo sound or SAP broadcasts wher e available. â¢S tereo broadcasts Vi ew programs like live sporting events, shows and concerts in dynamic stereo sound. ⢠SAP broadcasts R eceive TV broadcasts in either MAIN or SAP sound. MAIN sound: The normal program soundtrack (either in mono or stereo). SAP sound: Listen to second language, supplemen- tar y commentar y and other information. (SAP is mono sound.) If stereo sound is difficult to hear : ⢠Obtain a clearer sound by manually switching to the MONO mode. ⢠Once the MONO mode is selected, the Plasma Display System sound remains mono even if the system receives a stereo broadcast. Y ou must reselect the STEREO mode if you want to hear stereo sound again. ⢠Selecting MTS while the input source is INPUT 1 to 4 or PC does not change the type of sound. In this case, sound is determined by the video source. Each time you press MTS, MTS toggles as shown below . STEREO STEREO mode SAP SAP mode MONO MONO mode â¢I n each of the MTS/SAP modes selected using the MTS button, the display changes depending on broadcasting signals being received. See page 33. PDP-ELITE-Eng (28-37) 9/9/03, 11:44 32
08 Basic Operations 33 En When receiving STEREO sound signals A 125 STEREO In STEREO mode In SAP mode In MONO mode A 125 STEREO A 125 MONO When receiving MAIN SAP sound signals In STEREO mode In SAP mode In MONO mode A 125 MAIN (SAP) A 125 SAP (MAIN) A 125 MONO (SAP) When receiving STEREO SAP sound signals In STEREO mode In SAP mode In MONO mode A 125 STEREO (SAP) A 125 SAP (STEREO) A 125 MONO (SAP) When receiving MONO sound signals In STEREO mode In SAP mode In MONO mode A 125 MONO A 125 MONO A 125 MONO PDP-ELITE-Eng (28-37) 9/9/03, 11:44 33
08 Basic Operations 34 En Plasma Display (right view) Channel display 8 AAA STEREO STANDARD FULL W atching digital TV channels Unless you set up digital TV channels that you can watch under the current conditions, you cannot tune in those channels. F or the procedure, see âÂÂSetting up digital TV channelsâ on page 44. Selecting the digital TV input After confirming that the Mode switch on the remote control unit has been set to âÂÂTVâÂÂ, press DTV on the remote control unit to select the input source for digital TV channels. Changing channels Using CH /â on the r emote control unit â¢P ress CH to increase the channel number . â¢P ress CH â to decrease the channel number . ⢠CHANNEL /â on the Plasma Display operates the same as CH /â . Using CH RETURN on the r emote control unit Pr ess CH RETURN to switch the currently tuned channel to the previously tuned channel. Pr ess CH RETURN again to switch back to the currently tuned channel. Using 0 â 9 and ⢠(dot) on the r emote control unit Select channels directly by pressing buttons 0 to 9 . T o select subchannels, also use the ⢠(dot) button . EXAMPLE â¢T o select channel 5 (1-digit channel), press 5 . â¢T o select channel 25 (2-digit channel), press 2 , followed by 5 . â¢T o select channel 125 (3-digit channel), press 1 , then 2 , followed by 5 . â¢T o select subchannel 2.1, press 2 , ⢠(dot), then 1 . â¢T o select subchannel 10.1, press 1 , 0 , ⢠(dot), then 1. â¢A ft er entering a channel or subchannel number , you may press CH ENTER to tune in the channel more quickly . CHANNEL /â PDP-ELITE-Eng (28-37) 9/9/03, 11:44 34
08 Basic Operations 35 En Plasma Display (right view) Vo lume adjustment Mute VOLUME /â Changing the volume and sound Using VOL /â on the remote contr ol unit â¢T o increase the volume, press VOL . â¢T o decrease the volume, press VOL âÂÂ. ⢠VOLUME /â on the Plasma Display operates the same as VOL /âÂÂ. Using e MUTING on the remote contr ol unit e mutes the current sound output. 1 Pr ess e MUTING . â¢â M â appears on the screen. 2 Pr ess e MUTING again to cancel the mute mode. â¢P ressing VOL can also cancel the mute mode. Changing the language If you have selected a digital TV program that provides multi-language ser vices, you can switch among the languages by pressing MTS on the remote control unit. Each time you press MTS, the language switches. ⢠Switchable languages differ depending on the current broadcast. ⢠If the language selected through language setting is available when the channel or program is changed, you will hear that language. PDP-ELITE-Eng (28-37) 9/9/03, 11:44 35
08 Basic Operations 36 En Using the multiscr een functions Splitting the scr een Use the following procedure to select the 2-screen or picture-in-picture mode. 2-screen P icture-in-picture V iewing DTV banners While watching a digital TV program, pressing DTV INFO causes the following banner to appear . WHD-TV STEREO CC TV -PG *************************************************************** *************************************************************** *************************************************************** ************* 35 â 01 6:00 â 6:45 PM J AN. 1.Sat 5:10 AM 1 2 3 5 6 4 7 8 0 9 1 Station name 2 Channel number 3 Pr ogram time schedule 4 Pr ogram title 5 Date 6 Ti me 7 Appears if closed captions (CC) are available. 8 Shows the parental control ratings. 9 Shows available audio ser vices. 0 Information about the program ⢠The above information is not displayed if not included in broadcast signals. PDP-ELITE-Eng (28-37) 9/9/03, 11:44 36
08 Basic Operations 37 En 1 Pr ess SPLIT to select the display mode. ⢠Each time you press SPLIT, the display mode is switched among 2-screen , picture-in-picture, and single-screen. 2 When in the 2-screen or picture-in-picture mode, press / to select a screen to be active. â¢â z z z z z â appears on the active screen, which outputs sound. 3 To select the desired input source, press the appropriate input source button. ⢠If watching TV programs, press CH /â to change the channel. ⢠The multiscreen function cannot display images from the same input source at the same time. If you make such an attempt, a warning message appears. ⢠When you press HOME MENU, DTV GUIDE , or DTV INFO , the single-screen mode is restored and the corresponding menu is displayed. Freezing images Use the following procedure to capture and freeze one frame from a moving image that you are watching. 1 Pr ess FREEZE . â¢A still image appears on the right screen while a moving image is shown on the left screen. 2 Pr ess FREEZE again to cancel the function. â¢W ith the screen split, any image cannot be frozen . ⢠When this function is not available, a warning mes- sage appears. PDP-ELITE-Eng (28-37) 9/9/03, 11:44 37
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 38 En Using the menu AV mode menus Home Menu It em Descrip tion Page Picture AV Selection Select from the fiv e displa y mode options; S T ANDARD, D YNAMIC, MOVIE, G AME and USER. 4 7 Contr ast Adjusts the pictur e bet ween light and shade. 4 9 Brightness Adjusts pictur e brightness. 4 9 Color Adjusts color int ensit y . 4 9 T int Adjust s skin color to a mor e natur al tone. 4 9 Sharpness Adjusts pictur e sharpness. 4 9 Pr o Adju st Adjust s the lev els of PureCinema, Color T emp, MPEG NR, DNR, CTI, DRE, and Color Management. 49âÂÂ5 3 Re set All image adjustment set tings re turn to the fact ory defaults. 4 9 Sound Tr eble Adjusts the tr eble weak er or stronger . 5 3 Bass Adjusts the bass weak er or stronger . 5 3 Balance Adjusts audio output bet ween left and right speak ers. 5 3 Re set All audio adjustment set tings return to the fact ory defaults. 5 3 F OCUS Shift the sound coming direction (sound images) up ward and pr oduce s clear sound cont ours. 5 4 Fr ont Surround Pr ovide s three-dimensional sound effects and/or deep, rich ba ss. 5 4 Po w er Control Ener gy Save Sa ves pow er by decr easing picture brightne ss. 5 5 No Signal off Places the sy stem int o the standby mode when no signal is r eceived for 15 m i n u tes . 5 5 No Oper ation off Places the sy stem int o the standby mode when no oper ation is performed for three hour s. 5 6 Sleep Timer Aut omatically places the s yst em into the st andby mode when the select ed time elapses. 8 5 Option P osition Adjusts the vertical and horizont al positions of displa yed image s. 8 1 Side Mask With the 4:3 scr een size select ed, sets the brightne ss of the gr a y side ma sks that appear at both side s of the scr een. 8 4 Setup Channel Setup Sets up for con ventional TV channels. 4 1, 4 2 Fav orite Channel Sets y our fa vorit e TV channels to the four color but tons on the r emot e control unit. 4 3 Pa r ental Control Pre vents y our children from w atching specified t ypes of TV progr ams. 90âÂÂ9 4 Pa sswor d Pre vents other persons fr om changing especially P arent al Control set tings. 9 5, 96 Closed Caption Sets up for closed captions for conv entional TV channels. F or DTV channels, use âÂÂD TV Closed Captionâ under âÂÂD TV Setupâ . 8 6 Clock Corrects the da t e and time. 4 6, 4 7 Language Select the language to be used for on-scr een display such a s menus and instructions. 4 6 D TV Se tup D TV Channel Se tup Sets up for r eceiving D TV channels. 44âÂÂ4 5 D TV Closed Cap tion Set s up for closed captions for D TV channels. 8 7âÂÂ8 9 Digital Audio Out Sets up for optical digit al audio output. 6 9 i.LINK Setup Sets up for the i.LINK int er face. 7 3âÂÂ7 6 VCR Control Sets up for the manufactur e and model of recor ding equipment to be connect ed. 7 8, 7 9 R ec/V ie w Timer Allow s you t o make DTV pr ogram pr eset tings by manually specifying da te and time. 6 2âÂÂ6 4 PDP-ELITE-Eng (38-39) 9/9/03, 11:44 38
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 39 En PC mode menus Home Menu It em Descrip tion P age Picture AV Selection Select from the t wo displa y mode options; ST ANDARD and USER. 4 7 Contr ast Adjusts the pictur e betw een light and shade. 4 9 Brightness Adjusts pictur e brightness. 4 9 Re dA djusts red color int ensit y . 4 9 Gr een Adjusts gr een color intensit y. 4 9 Blue Adjusts blue color int ensity . 4 9 Re set All image adjustment set tings return t o the factory default s. 4 9 Sound Tr eble Adjusts the tr eble weaker or str onger . 5 3 Bass Adjusts the bass w eak er or stronger . 5 3 Balance Adjusts audio output bet ween left and right speak ers. 5 3 Re set All audio adjustment set tings return t o the fact ory defaults. 5 3 F OCUS Shifts the sound coming dir ection (sound images) upward and pr oduces clear sound cont ours. 5 4 Fr ont Surr ound Provide s three-dimensional sound effect s and/or deep, rich bass. 5 4 Pow er Control Ener gy Sav e Sav es po wer b y decreasing pictur e brightness. 5 5 Po w er Management Automatically place s the syst em into the st andby mode when no signal is r eceived fr om the personal comput er . 5 6 Sleep T imer Aut omatically place s the sy st em into the st andby mode when the selected time elapses. 8 5 Option Auto Setup Aut omatically op timizes image positions and clock. 8 1 Manual Setup Allow s you t o manually adjust image positions and clock. 8 2 PDP-ELITE-Eng (38-39) 9/9/03, 11:44 39
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 40 En Menu operation keys Use the following keys on the remote control to operate the menu. F or detailed menu operations, see appropri- ate pages that describe individual functions. HOME MENU :P ress to open or close the Home menu. / :P ress to select a menu item. F or some menu items, you can select parameters using these keys. / :P ress to select a parameter or adjustment level for menu items. ENTER :P ress to proceed to lower menu levels. F or some menu items, you need to press this key to complete selections. RETURN :P ress to return to upper menu levels. PDP-ELITE-Eng (40-56) 9/9/03, 11:45 40
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 41 En Setting up conventional TV channels This section describes how to search and set up conventional TV channels that you can watch under the current conditions. Unless you set up conventional TV channels using Auto channel Preset, you may not be able to tune in those channels. ⢠Conventional TV channels in this manual designate TV channels that are received through the conven- tional VHF/ UHF frequencies or conventional cable TV channels. Using Auto Channel Preset Auto Channel Preset automatically searches and sets up conventional TV channels. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂChannel SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select â Auto Channel P resetâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select â AntennaâÂÂ, and then press / to select â A â or âÂÂBâÂÂ. Auto Channel Preset Air/Cable Preset Antenna Start Air A 6 Pr ess / to select â Air/CableâÂÂ, and then press / to select â Air â or âÂÂCableâÂÂ. Auto Channel Preset Air/Cable Preset Antenna Start A Air 7 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP reset:StartâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . Auto Channel Preset Air/Cable Preset Antenna Start Air A ⢠Channel search automatically starts. Please wait. Auto channel preset searching. To cancel auto channel preset, press [RETURN]. PLASMA DISPLA Y â¢T o quit Auto Channel P reset halfway , press RETURN . 8 After Auto Channel Preset has been finished, press HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠When using the Cable Converter , you may need to manually add Cable Converter output channels. PDP-ELITE-Eng (40-56) 9/9/03, 11:45 41
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 42 En Setting for skipping unwanted channels Fr om among conventional TV channels searched and set up using Auto Channel P reset, you can select channels to be skipped when CH /â are operated. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂChannel SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂChannel ADD/DEL âÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select â AntennaâÂÂ, and then press / to select â A â or âÂÂBâÂÂ. Channel ADD/DEL Channel Add/Delete Antenna 2 Add A 6 Pr ess / to select âÂÂChannelâÂÂ, and then press / to select a channel to be skipped. Channel ADD/DEL Channel Add/Delete Antenna Add A 2 7 Pr ess / to select â Add/DeleteâÂÂ, and then press / to select âÂÂDeleteâÂÂ. Channel ADD/DEL Channel Add/Delete Antenna A 2 Delete 8 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢T o restore skipped channels, use the above procedure except that you select â Addâ in step 7. ⢠When using the Cable Converter , you may need to manually add Cable Converter output channels. PDP-ELITE-Eng (40-56) 9/9/03, 11:45 42
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 43 En Setting your favorite channels Set up to four TV channels to each of the four color buttons on the remote control unit (16 channels in total). Y ou can then quickly select from only your favorite channels. Y ou can program these buttons with conventional channels. 1 Select and tune to a TV channel to be registered. 2 Pr ess HOME MENU . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂF avorite ChannelâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . Favorite Channel Current Channel A 69 A 1 69 B 28 6 B 3 125 A 46 9 â âÂÂâÂÂâ â âÂÂâÂÂâ â âÂÂâÂÂâ A0 â âÂÂâÂÂâ â âÂÂâÂÂâ â âÂÂâÂÂâ A0 B8 6 A6 9 â âÂÂâÂÂâ B 125 5 Pr ess / and / to select a location where the TV channel is to be registered, and then press ENTER . Favorite Channel Current Channel B 86 A 1 69 B 2 86 B 3 125 A 4 69 â âÂÂâÂÂâ B8 6 â âÂÂâÂÂâ A0 â âÂÂâÂÂâ â âÂÂâÂÂâ â âÂÂâÂÂâ A0 B8 6 A 69 â âÂÂâÂÂâ B 125 6 Pr ess ENTER to execute the registration . ⢠Before pressing ENTER , you can also change a TV channel to be registered. P ress / to select ANT A or ANT B, and then press / to select a TV channel. T o clear the channel registered at the current location , select âÂÂâÂÂâ by pressing / and then press ENTER . â¢T o register another TV channel at a different location, select a TV channel, and then repeat steps 5 and 6. 7 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢Y ou cannot program the four color buttons with digital TV channels. PDP-ELITE-Eng (40-56) 9/9/03, 11:45 43
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 44 En Setting up digital TV channels This section describes how to search and set up digital TV channels that you can watch under the current conditions. Unless you set up digital TV channels using Auto Channel P reset, you cannot tune in those channels. Using Auto Channel Preset Auto Channel P reset automatically searches and sets up digital TV channels. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV Channel SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select â Auto Channel PresetâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select â Air â or âÂÂCableâÂÂ. Auto Channel Preset Air/Cable Air Start 6 Pr ess / to select âÂÂStartâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . Auto channel preset sear ching. Please wait. To cancel auto channel preset, press [RETURN]. PLASMA DISPLA Y ⢠Channel search automatically starts. 7 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢W ith âÂÂCableâ selected, this system can receive only digital TV signals (Standard Channel Plan) with the 8VSB modulation. This system does not support the QAM modulation. PDP-ELITE-Eng (40-56) 9/9/03, 11:45 44
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 45 En Setting for skipping unwanted channels Fr om among digital TV channels searched and set up using Auto Channel Preset, you can select channels to be skipped when CH /â are operated. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV Channel SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂChannel Add/DelâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select âÂÂChannelâÂÂ. 6 Pr ess / to select a channel to be skipped. Channel Add/Del Add/Delete Channel 120.001 Add 7 Pr ess / to select â Add/DeleteâÂÂ. 8 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDeleteâÂÂ. Channel Add/Del Add/Delete Channel 120.001 Delete 9 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢T o restore skipped channels, use the above procedure except that you select â Addâ in step 8. Checking signal strength When watching a digital TV program, you can check its current signal strength. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV Channel SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSignal StrengthâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . Signal Strength Maximum : 49 Weak Strong Current : 49 ⢠Adjust the direction of the antenna so that the current signal strength reaches as close to the maximum signal strength as possible. 5 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. PDP-ELITE-Eng (40-56) 9/9/03, 11:45 45
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 46 En Language setting Y ou can select a language to be used for on-screen display such as menus from among three languages; English, F rench, and Spanish. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂLanguageâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select a language. Language Menu English 5 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. Clock setting Use the following procedure to set the time correctly . If you disconnect the power cord from the power outlet or power black out occurs after setting the time, the set time is cleared. With â Autoâ selected for Clock Setting, time information is then acquired and set automatically . With âÂÂManualâ selected, you then need to manually set the correct time again . 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂClockâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂClock SettingâÂÂ, and then press / to select â Autoâ or âÂÂManualâÂÂ. Clock Clock Setting Clock Set Channel Time Zone D.S.T . Time & Date 0 at ANT -B A TLANTIC Adjust Off Auto 01/01/2003 SA T 12:30AM ⢠If you select â AutoâÂÂ, the date and time will be automatically corrected. 5 Pr ess / to select âÂÂClock Set ChannelâÂÂ, and then press / to select a TV channel to be used for auto clock setting. 6 Pr ess / to select âÂÂTime ZoneâÂÂ, and then press / to select a time zone for your area. 7 Pr ess / to select âÂÂD.S.T .âÂÂ, and then press / to select âÂÂOnâ or âÂÂOff â depending on whether summer time is employed in your area. ⢠When selecting â Autoâ for âÂÂClock SettingâÂÂ, be sure to connect the Antenna B input terminal to the output of the VHF/UHF antenna or Cable Converter . See page 26. PDP-ELITE-Eng (40-56) 9/9/03, 11:45 46
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 47 En 8 Pr ess / to select âÂÂTime & DateâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . ⢠The date & time entr y screen appears. Enter the current date and time using / and / , and then press ENTER . Time & Date Date Time 01 / 01 / 2003 SA T 12 : 32 AM 9 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠When the time has not yet been set, the REC TIMER indicator on the front of the Media Receiver blinks. ⢠When the time has not yet been set, you cannot view EPG information , use auto channel select, and preset TV programs for recording. AV Selection AV Selection gives you five viewing options to choose from to best match the Plasma Display System environ- ment, which can var y due to factors like room bright- ness, type of program watched or the type of image input from external equipment. 1 Pr ess AV SELECTION . â¢P resent AV Selection mode appears. 2 Pr ess AV SELECTION again before the mode displayed on the screen disappears. â¢F or AV source, the mode is switched in the order ; ST ANDARD, DYNAMIC, MOVIE, GAME, then USER . â¢F or PC source, the mode is switched between ST ANDARD and USER . PDP-ELITE-Eng (40-56) 9/9/03, 11:45 47
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 48 En Y ou can also use the menu to change the options. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂPictureâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select â AV SelectionâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select the desired option, and then press ENTER . AV Selection ST ANDARD DYNAMIC MOVIE GAME USER Fo r AV source It em Descrip tion ST AND ARD F or a highly defined image in a normally bright room D YNAMIC F or a very sharp image with the maximum contr ast This mode does not allo w manual image qualit y adjustment. MO VIE F or a movie G AME Lower s image brightness for ea sier viewing. USER Allo ws the user to cust omize set tings as desired. Y ou can set the mode for each input source. Fo r PC source It em Descrip tion ST AND ARD F or a highly defined image in a normally bright room USER Allo ws the user to cust omize set tings as desired. Y ou can set the mode for each input source. 5 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. Pictur e adjustments Adjust the picture to your preference for the chosen A V Selection option (except D YNAMIC). 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP ictureâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select an item to be adjusted, and then press ENTER . Picture AV Selection Contrast Brightness Color Tint Sharpness Pro Adjust Reset ST ANDARD 40 0 0 0 0 4 Pr ess / to select the desired level, and then press ENTER . Contrast 40 ⢠When an adjustment screen is in display , you can also change an item to be adjusted, by pressing / . 5 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. PDP-ELITE-Eng (40-56) 9/9/03, 11:45 48
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 49 En For AV source Item but t on but t on Contr ast F or less contr ast F or more contr ast Brightness F or less brightness F or more brightness Color F or less color int ensity F or mor e color intensit y Tin t Skin t ones become Skin t ones become purplish greenish Sharpness F or less sharpness F or more sharpness For PC source Item but t on but t on Contr ast F or less contr ast F or more contr ast Brightness F or less brightness F or more brightness Red F or weaker r ed F or stronger r ed Green F or weaker green F or stronger green Blue F or weaker blue F or stronger blue Fo r PC source, the following screen appears: Picture AV Selection Contrast Brightness Red Green Blue Reset ST ANDARD 40 0 0 0 0 â¢T o make settings for âÂÂPureCinemaâÂÂ, âÂÂColor T empâÂÂ, âÂÂMPEG NRâÂÂ, âÂÂDNRâÂÂ, âÂÂCTIâÂÂ, âÂÂDREâÂÂ, and âÂÂColor ManagementâÂÂ, select âÂÂP ro Adjustâ in step 3, and then press ENTER . F or the subsequent procedures, see pages 49 to 52. â¢T o restore the factor y defaults for all the items, press / to select âÂÂResetâ in step 3, and then press ENTER . A confirmation screen appears. P ress / to select âÂÂY esâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . PureCinema Automatically detects a film-based source (originally encoded at 24 frames/second), analyzes it, then recre- ates each still film frame for high-definition picture quality . 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP ictureâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP ro AdjustâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP ureCinemaâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select the desired parameter , and then press ENTER . PureCinema Off ADV Standard Item De scription Off Deactiv at es the PureCinema. Standard Pr oduces smooth and vivid moving image s (film specific) b y automatically de tecting r ecorded image informa tion when displaying D VD or 1 0 80i HD TV images (e.g., movies) ha ving 2 4 frame s per second. AD V Pr oduces smooth and qualit y moving images (as shown on thea ter scr eens) by converting t o 7 2 Hz when displaying D VD images (e.g., movies) ha ving 2 4 frames per second. 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢Y ou cannot select âÂÂStandardâ when 480p or 720p signals are being input. PDP-ELITE-Eng (40-56) 9/9/03, 11:45 49
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 50 En Color temperatur e Adjust the color temperature to give a better white balance. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂPictureâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂPro AdjustâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂColor T empâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select the desired level, and then press ENTER . Color T emp High Mid-High Mid-Low Low Manual Mid It em Descrip tion High White with bluish t one Mid-High Intermediat e tone bet ween High and Mid Mid Natur al tone Mid-Lo w Intermedia t e tone be t ween Mid and Lo w Lo w White with r eddish tone Manual Colour temper ature adjust ed to your pr eference 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. Y ou can manually adjust the color temperature, using the following procedure: 1 Select âÂÂManualâ in step 5 above, and then press and hold ENTER for more than three seconds to display the manual adjustment screen. 2 Pr ess / to select an item to be adjusted, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select the desired level, and then press ENTER . Item but t on but t on R High F or weaker red F or stronger r ed G High F or weaker green F or stronger green B High F or weaker blue F or stronger blue R Low F or weaker r ed F or stronger red G Low F or weaker gr een F or stronger gr een B Low F or weaker blue F or stronger blue â¢T o perform adjustment for another item, press RETURN , and then repeat steps 2 and 3 . â¢Y ou may press / to immediately change an item to be adjusted. 4 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. F ine adjustment for bright portions F ine adjustment for dark portions PDP-ELITE-Eng (40-56) 9/9/03, 11:45 50
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 51 En DNR Select the DNR (Digital Noise Reduction) level to eliminate video noise for a clean crisp image. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP ictureâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP ro AdjustâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDNRâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select the desired level, and then press ENTER . DNR Off High Mid Low Item De scription Off Deactiv at es the DNR. High Enhanced DNR Mid St andar d DNR Low Moder at e DNR 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. MPEG NR This eliminates mosquito noise from video images when a DTV channel is watched or a DVD is played, resulting in noise-free images. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP ictureâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP ro AdjustâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂMPEG NRâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select the desired parameter , and then press ENTER . MPEG NR Off High Low Mid Item Description Off Deactiv at es the MPEG NR. High Enhanced MPEG NR Mid St andard MPEG NR Low Moder ate MPEG NR 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. PDP-ELITE-Eng (40-56) 9/9/03, 11:45 51
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 52 En CTI Use the CTI (Color T ransient Improvement) to make images have clearer color contours. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂPictureâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂPro AdjustâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂCTIâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select the desired parameter , and then press ENTER . CTI Off On It em Descrip tion Off Deactivat es the CTI. On A ctiv at es the CTI. 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. DRE Use the DRE (Dynamic Range Expander) to adjust dark and bright portions on images so that the contrast between brightness and darkness becomes clearer . 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP ictureâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP ro AdjustâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDREâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select the desired parameter , and then press ENTER . DRE Off High Mid Low Item Description Off Deactivat e s the DRE. High Enhanced DRE Mid St andard DRE Low Moder ate DRE 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. PDP-ELITE-Eng (40-56) 9/9/03, 11:45 52
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 53 En Color Management Pe rf orm fine hue adjustment for each basic color . 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP ictureâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP ro AdjustâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂColor ManagementâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select an item to be adjusted, and then press ENTER . Color Management 0 0 0 0 0 0 Y R G C B M 6 Pr ess / to select the desired level. Item but t on but ton Red Closer to magent a Closer to y ellow Y ellow Closer t o red Closer t o gr een Green Closer t o yellow Closer t o cyan Cy an Closer t o green Closer t o blue Blue Closer to cy an Closer to magent a Magenta Closer t o blue Closer to r ed â¢T o per form adjustment for another item, press RETURN , and then repeat steps 5 and 6. â¢Y ou may press / to immediately change an item to be adjusted. 7 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. Sound adjustments Adjust the sound to your preference for the chosen A V Selection option. See page 47. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSoundâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select an item to be adjusted, and then press / to select the desired level. Bass Balance T reble Reset FOCUS Front Surround 0 0 Off Off 2 Sound ST ANDARD Item but t on but t on Tr eble F or weak er tr eble F or stronger treble Bass F or weak er bass F or stronger bass Balance Decr eases audio fr om Decrease s audio from the right speak er the left speaker 4 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢T o restore the factor y defaults for all the items, press / to select âÂÂResetâ in step 3, and then press ENTER . A confirmation screen appears. P ress / to select âÂÂY esâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . PDP-ELITE-Eng (40-56) 9/9/03, 11:45 53
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 54 En FOCUS This shifts the sound coming direction (sound images) upward and produces clear sound contours. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSoundâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂFOCUSâÂÂ, and then press / to select the desired parameter . Bass Balance T reble Reset FOCUS Front Surround 0 0 Off 2 Sound ST ANDARD On It em Description Off Deactivat es the F OCUS. (factory default) On A ctivat es the FOCUS. 4 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. Front Sur round This provides three-dimensional sound effects and/or deep, rich bass. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSoundâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂF ront SurroundâÂÂ, and then press / to select the desired parameter . Bass Balance T reble Reset FOCUS Front Surround 0 0 On 2 Sound ST ANDARD T ruBass SRS Item Description Off Deactivat es both the SR S and T ruBass. SRS R eproduce s highly effective thr ee- dimensional sound. Tr uBa ss Pr ovides deep, rich bass using a new (fac t ory default) technology . T ruBass SRS Provides bo th T ruBass and SR S effect s. 4 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠(WOW) designates a status where the FOCUS is on and T ruBass SRS has been selected for Front Surround. ⢠is a trademark of SRS Labs, Inc. ⢠WOW technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. PDP-ELITE-Eng (40-56) 9/9/03, 11:45 54
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 55 En Power Control P ower Control provides convenient functions for power saving. Power Control for A V source Energy Save P ower consumption is saved by decreasing picture brightness. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP ower ControlâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂEnergy SaveâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSaveâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . Energy Save Standard Save Item Description Standard Does not decr ease picture brightness. (fac t ory default) Sav e Decr eases pictur e brightness t o sa ve pow er . 5 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢Y ou can also select this function using the Home menu when the input source is a PC. No Signal off The system will be automatically placed into the standby mode if no signal is received for 15 minutes. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP ower ControlâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂNo Signal off âÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂEnableâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . No Signal off Disable Enable Item Description Disable Does not place the sy st em int o the (fac t ory default) standb y mode. Enable Places the s y stem int o the standb y mode if no signal is receiv ed for 1 5 minutes. 5 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢F ive minutes before the system is placed into the standby mode, a message appears every minute. ⢠The system may not be placed into the standby mode when noise signals are present at the Media Receiver after a TV program finishes. PDP-ELITE-Eng (40-56) 9/9/03, 11:45 55
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 56 En No Operation off The system will be automatically placed into the standby mode when no operation is performed for three hours. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂPower ControlâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂNo Operation off âÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂEnableâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . No Operation off Disable Enable It em Descrip tion Disable Does not place the s yst em into the (factory default) standb y mode. Enable Places the syst em into the st andby mode if no oper ation is performed for three hour s. 5 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢F ive minutes before the system is placed into the standby mode, a message appears every minute. Power Contr ol for PC source P ower Management The system will be automatically placed into the standby mode when no signal is received from the personal computer . 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP ower ControlâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP ower ManagementâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂMode1âÂÂor âÂÂMode2âÂÂ, and then press ENTER . Power Management Off Mode1 Mode2 Item Description Off No power management (fac t ory default) Mode1 ⢠Places the s yst em into the st andb y mode when no signal is received fr om the personal comput er for eight minut es. ⢠Ev en when you start using the comput er and a signal is receiv ed again, the sy stem sta ys off. ⢠The s yst em is switched on again by pressing ST ANDB Y/ON on the Plasma Displa y or TV a on the remot e control unit. Mode2 ⢠Places the s yst em into the st andb y mode when no signal is received for eight seconds. ⢠When y ou start using the comput er and a signal is receiv ed again, the s yst em is switched on. ⢠The s yst em is switched on again by pressing ST ANDB Y/ON on the Plasma Displa y or TV a on the remot e control unit. 5 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. PDP-ELITE-Eng (40-56) 9/9/03, 11:45 56
10 Electr onic Program Guide (EPG) (for DTV Only) 57 En EPG display format The Electronic P rogram Guide (EPG) shows the table of scheduled digital TV programs and detailed information about individual programs. It also allows you to easily select and tune to a desired program. The EPG Screen consists of the schedule window , information window , and picture window . This section describes information to be displayed on the schedule and information windows. The picture window shows moving images of a TV program watched when DTV GUIDE is pressed. â¢F or digital TV programs that do not provide EPG information, you cannot watch the corresponding EPG information . ⢠If the current time has not been correctly set, there may be TV programs whose EPG information is not displayed. ******* 7:00 PM â 8:30 PM ******* ******* 1.01 1.02 3.01 4.01 4.02 ABC ABC CBS NBC NBC Program A Program F Program K 11:30pm 11:00pm 10:30pm 10:00pm 9:30pm Program N Program G Program H Program I Program J Program O Program P Program L Program M Schedule window Pi cture window Information window Schedule window OCT . 25. MON 7:15pm A ABC CBS NBS NNNNNNN 1.01 1.12 3.01 14.11 15.11 Program A Program B Program C Program D Program E Program I Program J Program G Program H Program F 9:30pm 9:00pm 8:30pm 8:00pm 12 3 2 45 6 8 7 1 C urrent date and time 2 Appears when the schedule table can be scrolled forward or backward. 3 Ti me schedule 4 Station name 5 Channel number 6 P rogram title 7 Highlights the currently selected channel. 8 Appears when other programs (often short ones) have been scheduled for the period. PDP-ELITE-Eng (57-64) 9/9/03, 11:45 57
10 Electronic Program Guide (EPG) (for DTV Only) 58 En Infor mation window ... More Information DTV INFO 8:00pmâÂÂ9:00pm WWWWWWW 31 1.1 11 STEREO CC FV TV -PG NC-17 1 6 5 7 8 2 6 3 4 1 S tation name 2 Channel number 3 P rogram time schedule 4 P rogram title 5 A blue icon appears when the program has been preset for auto channel select; and a red icon appears when it has been preset for recording. 6 Appears when other programs have been scheduled for the period. Y ou will find this arrow only for programs with ( 8 ) shown on the schedule window . 7 Shows services available for the program and ratings for parent control. 8 Information about the program ⢠The schedule window may show sections whose bottom right corners have been folded. This indicates that other programs (often short ones) have been scheduled for that period. T o view the title of such a program and related information, highlight a folded section, and then press / . â¢F or programs whose title and/or time information have not been acquired, âÂÂNo Titleâ appears. Using the EPG Use the following procedure to check the schedule of digital TV programs, view information about desired programs, and/or select programs to watch. 1 Pr ess DTV GUIDE . ⢠The EPG screen appears. ⢠âÂÂDownloading EPG data now â appears on the picture window . ⢠When EPG data acquisition is finished, the picture window shows moving images of a TV program watched when DTV GUIDE is pressed. 2 Pr ess / and / to select a desired TV program. EPG ******* 7:00 PM â 8:30 PM ******* ******* APR.11.Fri 7:00PM 7:30PM 8:00PM 8:30PM 7:34PM ******* 12.08 12.05 ******* ******* 12.06 ******* 12.07 ******* ******* ******* ******* ******* â¢I nformation about the selected program appears in the information window . â¢T o watch a program currently on air , select the program, and then press ENTER . â¢Y ou can check information about programs scheduled for up to 12 coming hours. ⢠Depending on conditions, it may take some time to acquire EPG data. PDP-ELITE-Eng (57-64) 9/9/03, 11:46 58
10 Electr onic Program Guide (EPG) (for DTV Only) 59 En 3 To view more information (not current displayed) about the selected program, press DTV INFO . ⢠Detailed information appears on the schedule window . EPG ***** *** MONO 4:00 PM â 7:00 PM **************************************************************************************** **************************************************************************************** **************************************************************************************** **************************************************************************************** **************************************************************************************** **************************************************************************************** **************************************************************************************** **************************************************************************************** **************************************************************************************** ****************************************************** ****************************************************** ******** ******** ***** *** â¢W ith / shown in the schedule window , you can scroll the window by pressing / . â¢T o quit display of detailed information, press DTV INFO again (or RETURN ). 4 To quit the Program Guide, press DTV GUIDE again. ⢠The schedule window does not show finished programs. ⢠When the power to the system is switched off , all acquired EPG data is cleared. Presetting TV pr ograms using the EPG Using the EPG, you can easily preset digital TV pro- grams for watching later (auto channel select), record- ing with a D-VHS recorder , or recording via a VCR controller . Using auto channel select W ith the power to the system left on, this function automatically selects the preset TV program when its on-air time comes. Then you will not miss watching an important TV program when you are enjoying another TV program. 1 Pr ess DTV GUIDE . ⢠The EPG screen appears. 2 Pr ess / and / to select a program to be preset, and then press ENTER . ⢠Select a program not yet started. â¢A setup menu appears. EPG ******* 8:30 PM â 10:00 PM ******* ******* Reservation Setting Program View Program Rec ****** 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP rogram ViewâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . â¢A dialog box for confirmation appears. EPG ******* 8:30 PM â 10:00 PM ******* ******* Reservation Setting Program View Pr ogram Rec ****** OK Cancel PDP-ELITE-Eng (57-64) 9/9/03, 11:46 59
10 Electronic Program Guide (EPG) (for DTV Only) 60 En 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂOKâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . ⢠The program is preset and the schedule table is restored. â¢A blue square icon appears for the preset program. â¢A black icon appears for overlapped presetttings. 5 Pr ess DTV GUIDE to exit the P rogram Guide. W ith the system switched on , a channel switch alarm message approximately 30 seconds before execution and the channel is switched a short time before the start of the program. ⢠Auto channel select is not executed when the system is in the standby mode. â¢F inish presetting operations one minute before the start of the program; otherwise presettings may fail. â¢F or priorities about overlapped presettings, see âÂÂP riority rules for overlapped presettingsâ on page 63. Recording TV pr ograms using a D-VHS r ecor der Use the following procedure to preset TV programs for recording with a connected D- VHS recorder . 1 Pr ess DTV GUIDE . ⢠The EPG screen appears. 2 Pr ess / and / to select a program to be preset, and then press ENTER . ⢠Select a program not yet started. â¢A setup menu appears. EPG ******* 8:30 PM â 10:00 PM ******* ******* Reservation Setting Program View Program Rec ****** 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP rogram RecâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . EPG ******* 8:30 PM â 10:00 PM ******* ******* Reservation Setting Program View Program Rec ****** â¢A dialog box for mode selection appears. 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂi.LINKâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . EPG ******* 10:00 PM â 11:30 PM ******* ******* Reservation Setting Program View Program Rec ****** Recording T ype ANALOG i.LINK â¢A dialog box for model selection appears. PDP-ELITE-Eng (57-64) 9/9/03, 11:46 60
10 Electr onic Program Guide (EPG) (for DTV Only) 61 En 5 Pr ess / to select the D- VHS recorder model, and then press ENTER . EPG ******* 10:00 PM â 11:30 PM ******* ******* Reservation Setting Program View Pr ogram Rec ****** Recording T ype ANALOG Device i.LINK DâÂÂVHS1 â¢A dialog box for confirmation appears. 6 Pr ess / to select âÂÂOKâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . ⢠The program is preset and the schedule table is restored. â¢A red square icon appears for the preset program. â¢A black icon appears for overlapped presetttings. 7 Pr ess DTV GUIDE to exit the Program Guide. ⢠Switch on the recording equipment at least 30 seconds before the start of the preset program; otherwise recording will not be executed. â¢R ecording is not executed if recordable D- VHS tape is not present in the D- VHS recorder when the preset program starts. This is also true when a D-VHS recorder specified for recording with a timer is not in connection. â¢F inish presetting operations two minutes before the start of the program; otherwise presettings may fail. â¢F or priorities about overlapped presettings, see âÂÂP riority rules for overlapped presettingsâ on page 63. ⢠If you switch off the system using the POWER button, the program presetting will become ineffective. Be careful not to switch off the power . Recording TV pr ograms via a VCR controller If you connect an appropriate VCR controller to the Media Receiver , you can preset digital TV programs for recording with a connected VCR. See page 78. 1 Pr ess DTV GUIDE . ⢠The EPG screen appears. 2 Pr ess / and / to select a program to be preset, and then press ENTER . â¢A setup menu appears. EPG ******* 8:30 PM â 10:00 PM ******* ******* Reservation Setting Program View Program Rec ****** 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP rogram RecâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . EPG ******* 8:30 PM â 10:00 PM ******* ******* Reservation Setting Program View Program Rec ****** â¢A dialog box for mode selection appears. PDP-ELITE-Eng (57-64) 9/9/03, 11:46 61
10 Electronic Program Guide (EPG) (for DTV Only) 62 En Setting the timer manually Using the menu, you can also preset digital TV pro- grams by specifying their scheduled date and time. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂR ec/View T imer âÂÂ, and then press ENTER . ⢠The schedule table appears. Rec/View Timer Timer Date Start Stop Channel Ta r g e t Information T otal:0 Overlap 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 --/-- --/-- --/-- --/-- --/-- --/-- --/-- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- ---.--- ---.--- ---.--- ---.--- ---.--- ---.--- ---.--- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- 1/4 3 Pr ess / to select a list number , then press . â¢Y ou can select any desired list number . 4 Pr ess / to specify a date, and then press . 5 Pr ess / to specify the start hour , and then press . 6 Pr ess / to specify the start minute, and then press . 7 Pr ess / to specify the end hour , and then press . 8 Pr ess / to specify the end minute, and then press . 9 Pr ess / to specify a channel number , and then press . 4 Pr ess / to select â ANALOGâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . EPG ******* 10:00 PM â 11:30 PM ******* ******* Reservation Setting Program View Pr ogram Rec ****** Recording T ype ANALOG i.LINK â¢A dialog box for confirmation appears. 5 Pr ess / to select âÂÂOKâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . ⢠The program is preset and the schedule table is restored. â¢A red square icon appears for the preset program. â¢A black icon appears for overlapped presetttings. 6 Pr ess DTV GUIDE to exit the P rogram Guide. ⢠Switch on the recording equipment at least 30 seconds before the start of the preset program; otherwise recording will not be executed. â¢F inish presetting operations two minutes before the start of the program; otherwise presettings may fail. â¢F or priorities about overlapped presettings, see âÂÂP riority rules for overlapped presettingsâ on page 63. ⢠Confirm that the video output terminals on the Media R eceiver have been connected to the signal input terminals on the VCR to be used for recording. ⢠If you switch off the system using the POWER button, the program presetting will become ineffective. Be careful not to switch off the power . PDP-ELITE-Eng (57-64) 9/9/03, 11:46 62
10 Electr onic Program Guide (EPG) (for DTV Only) 63 En 10 Pr ess / to select âÂÂVIEWâÂÂ, â ANALOGâ or a D- VHS recorder , and then press ENTER . ⢠Select â VIEWâ when presetting the program for auto channel select. Select â ANALOG â when presetting it for recording via a VCR controller . Select a D- VHS recorder when presetting it for recording with a D- VHS recorder . â¢I n the Info field, âÂÂView OKâ appears when presetting for auto channel select is accepted, and âÂÂRec OKâ appears when presetting for recording is accepted. Rec/View Timer Timer Date Start Stop Channel Ta r g e t Information To t a l:1 1/4 Overlap 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 APR 11FRI --/-- --/-- --/-- --/-- --/-- --/-- 9:30 PM -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- 11:00 PM -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- E 12.05 ---.--- ---.--- ---.--- ---.--- ---.--- ---.--- VIEW View OK -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- 11 If presetting another program, press / to select another list number , and then repeat steps 4 to 6. â¢Y ou can preset up to 28 programs. 12 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠If the schedule of the selected program is overlapped with another presetting, âÂÂOverlapâ appears in the Info field. P resettigs with âÂÂOverlapâ may not be partially or entirely executed. ⢠When entering into the schedule table, pressing ENTER causes the cursor to jump to an empty field. â¢P resetting becomes ineffective if the start time and the end time are identical or if presetting operations are per formed within two minutes before the start of the program. â¢P resettings made using the EPG are automatically shown in the schedule table. â¢F or presetting made using the EPG, âÂÂEâ appears beside the channel number in the schedule table. If you alter the presetting content, âÂÂEâ disappears. â¢F or priorities about overlapped presettings, see âÂÂP riority rules for overlapped presettingsâ on page 63. ⢠If you switch off the system using the POWER button, the program presetting will become ineffective. Be careful not to switch off the power . Priority rules for overlapped presettings When preset TV programs are overlapped, the following three rules are used to determine a higher priority . If more than one of the three rules are met, the rules are applied in the order; 1, 2, then 3. Rul e 1 : Pr esetting for recording is given a higher priority over presetting for auto channel select. Rul e 2 : If two presettings are overlapped, presetting with earlier start time is given a higher priority . If two presettings are sequential, the last portion of the first program is not re- corded for 15 seconds because recording of the second program is started at the exact start time. Rul e 3 : If presettings at the same start time are overlapped, presetting with a smaller list number is given a higher priority . P resetting for recording P resetting for auto channel select The shaded area is not executed. P rogram A P rogram B The shaded area is not executed. PDP-ELITE-Eng (57-64) 9/9/03, 11:46 63
10 Electronic Program Guide (EPG) (for DTV Only) 64 En Changing/ canceling TV pr ogram presettings Using the EPG Use the following procedure to change or cancel program presettings using the EPG. 1 Pr ess DTV GUIDE . ⢠The EPG screen appears. 2 Pr ess / and / to select the desired preset program, and then press ENTER . â¢A dialog box appears. 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂEditâ or âÂÂDeleteâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . Edit Delete Select [Edit] or [Delete]. PLASMA DISPLA Y ⢠If you select âÂÂDeleteâÂÂ, the program presetting is canceled. ⢠If you select âÂÂEditâÂÂ, go to step 4. 4 Pr ess / and / to make new selections, and then press ENTER . â¢A dialog box for confirmation appears. 5 Pr ess / to select âÂÂOKâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . EPG ******* 8:00 PM â 9:30 PM ******* ******* Reservation Setting STEREO Program View Program Rec ****** Recording T ype ANALOG OK DâÂÂVHS1:************** Cancel Device i.LINK DâÂÂVHS1 ⢠The presetting is corrected and the schedule table is restored. ⢠When you want to quit recording (in progress) started by program presetting, for example, to change the channel, cancel the program presetting using the menu. In this case, you cannot cancel the program presetting using the EPG. Using the menu Use the following procedure to change or cancel program presetings using the menu. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂR ec/View T imer âÂÂ, and then press ENTER . ⢠The schedule table appears. Rec/View Timer Timer Date Start Stop Channel Ta r g e t Information T otal:0 Overlap 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 --/-- --/-- --/-- --/-- --/-- --/-- --/-- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- ---.--- ---.--- ---.--- ---.--- ---.--- ---.--- ---.--- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- 1/4 3 Pr ess / to select a list number to be changed. 4 Pr ess to change the presetting or press (or ENTER ) to cancel it. ⢠If you press (or ENTER), the cursor moves to the Info field where âÂÂDeleteâ appears. P ress ENTER to execute cancel. ⢠If you press , go to step 5. P ressing with the cursor positioned at the Info field also allows you to go to step 5. 5 Pr ess / to select a field to be corrected and press / to make a new entry . 6 R epeat step 4 to enter for all fields to be corrected. 7 Pr ess ENTER . â¢â Vi ew OKâ or âÂÂRec OKâ appears in the Info field. 8 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. PDP-ELITE-Eng (57-64) 9/9/03, 11:46 64
11 Enjoying through External Equipment 65 En IN SERVICE ONL Y MONITOR OUT DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL INPUT 1 COMPONENT VIDEO S400 DTV-ANTENNA IN INPUT 3 VCR CONTROL A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN IN OUT CONTROL OUT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y AC INLET BLACK WHITE SYSTEM CABLE R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y C B /PB C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO INPUT 2 (TS) W atching a DVD image Connecting a DVD player Use the INPUT 1 terminals when connecting a DVD player and other audiovisual equipment. Displaying a DVD image To watch a DVD image, press INP UT 1 on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select INPUT1. DVD player Y ou can connect many types of external equipment to your Plasma Display System, like a DVD player , VCR, personal computer , game console, and camcorder . To view images coming from external equipment, select the input source using the INPUT buttons on the remote control (page 16) or the INPUT button on the Plasma Display . Media Receiver (r ear view) AV cable (commercially available) Component Video cable (commercially available) S- Video cable (commercially available) â¢T o protect all equipment, always turn off the system before connecting to a DVD player , VCR, personal computer , game console, camcorder , or other exter- nal equipment. â¢R efer to the relevant operation manual (DVD player , personal computer , etc.) carefully before making connections. â¢R efer to your DVD player operation manual for the signal type. ⢠The INPUT 1 terminals are checked for cable connec- tions in the order where; 1) Component V ideo, 2) S- V ideo, 3) V ideo. ⢠Connect external equipment to only terminals that are to be actually used. â¢Y ou can also use the INPUT 3 terminals when con- necting only with the Component V ideo output terminals on a DVD player . PDP-ELITE-Eng (65-80) 9/9/03, 11:46 65
11 Enjoying through External Equipment 66 En W atching a VCR image Connecting a VCR Use the INPUT 2 terminals when connecting a VCR and other audiovisual equipment. Displaying a VCR image To watch a VCR image, press INPUT 2 on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select INPUT2. ⢠The INPUT 2 terminals are checked for cable connec- tions in the order where; 1) S- Video , 2) V ideo. ⢠Connect external equipment to only terminals that are to be actually used. VCR IN SERVICE ONL Y MONITOR OUT DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL INPUT 1 COMPONENT VIDEO S400 DTV-ANTENNA IN INPUT 3 VCR CONTROL A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN IN OUT CONTROL OUT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y AC INLET BLACK WHITE SYSTEM CABLE R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO INPUT 2 (TS) Media Receiver (r ear view) AV cable (commercially available) S- Video cable (commercially available) VCR PDP-ELITE-Eng (65-80) 9/9/03, 11:46 66
11 Enjoying through External Equipment 67 En Game console/Camcorder Media Receiver (fr ont view) AV cable (commercially available) S- Video cable (commercially available) ⢠The INPUT 4 terminals are checked for cable connec- tions in the order where; 1) Component V ideo, 2) S- Video , 3) V ideo. ⢠Connect external equipment to only terminals that are to be actually used. Component Video cable (commercially available) Displaying an image of the game console or camcorder To watch an image coming from the game console or camcorder , press INP UT 4 on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select INPUT4. Enjoying a game console or watching camcorder images Connecting a game console or camcorder Use the INPUT 4 terminals to connect a game console, camcorder and other audiovisual equipment. PDP-ELITE-Eng (65-80) 9/9/03, 11:46 67
11 Enjoying through External Equipment 68 En IN SERVICE ONL Y MONITOR OUT DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL INPUT 1 COMPONENT VIDEO S400 DTV-ANTENNA IN INPUT 3 VCR CONTROL A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN IN OUT CONTROL OUT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y AC IN LET BLACK WHITE SYSTEM CABLE R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO INPUT 2 (TS) Media Receiver (r ear view) VCR controller (for presetting digital TV programs for recording) S- Video cable (commercially available) AV cable (commercially available) VCR or DVD recor der Recording digital TV pr ograms using a VCR or DVD recor der If you connect recording equipment such as a VCR or DVD recorder to the MONITOR OUT terminals on the rear of the Media Receiver , you can record, for example, digital TV programs using the recording equipment. Y ou can also record digital TV programs more easily by using the supplied VCR controller . Connect the VCR controller to the VCR control terminal on the rear of the Media Receiver and then position the controller so that its light emitting section faces the remote control sensor on the recording equipment. F or more informa- tion, see page 78. Connecting a recor der ⢠About the MONITOR OUT terminals The MONITOR OUT terminals cannot output the following signals: 1 Vi deo signals input from the COMPONENT VIDEO terminal 2 Vi deo signals from a personal computer 3 S-V ideo signals when a conventional TV channel is being received 4 S-V ideo signals when Video signals (INPUT 1, 2, and 4) are being input ⢠When watching images played back on a VCR or DVD recorder connected to the MONITOR OUT terminals, select an input source (e.g., TV channel reception) on the recording equipment other than external input sources. Selecting an external input source may result in distorted images or noise. PDP-ELITE-Eng (65-80) 9/9/03, 11:46 68
11 Enjoying through External Equipment 69 En Connecting other audio equipment The digital audio output terminal (optical) on this system can output Dolby Digital signals. Using an optical digital cable, connect an AV receiver to the digital audio output terminal (optical) on the rear of the Media Receiver . This allows audio such as digital TV broadcasting to be played in high quality . Media Receiver (r ear view) IN SERVICE ONL Y MONITOR OUT DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL INPUT 1 COMPONENT VIDEO S400 DTV-ANTENNA IN INPUT 3 VCR CONTROL A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN IN OUT CONTROL OUT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y AC INLET BLACK WHITE SYSTEM CABLE R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO INPUT 2 (TS) AV receiver Audio cable (commercially available) Optical digital cable (commercially available) Switching the optical audio signal type Set up for the DIGIT AL AUDIO output terminal (OPTI- CAL), depending on your A V receiver . 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDigital Audio OutâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . If your AV receiver does not have a digital audio input terminal (optical), connect the MONITOR OUT termi- nals (AUDIO) on the rear of the Media Receiver to the audio input terminals on the AV receiver . ⢠When using the digital audio output terminal (opti- cal), you need to make settings depending on your A V receiver . F or more information, see the user âÂÂs manual for the A V receiver . Connecting an A V receiver 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDolby Digitalâ or âÂÂPCMâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . Digital Audio Out Dolby Digital PCM Item Description PCM Alwa ys outputs in the PCM format (fac t or y default) r egardless of the t ypes of signals. Dolby Digit al F or Dolby Digit al encoded signals, outputs in the Dolb y Digital forma t. F or PCM encoded signals, outputs in the PCM format. 5 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. PDP-ELITE-Eng (65-80) 9/9/03, 11:46 69
11 Enjoying through External Equipment 70 En W atching a D-VHS image What is i.LINK? i.LINK is a digital serial interface for handling digital video, digital audio , and other data in two directions. i.LINK is SonyâÂÂs term for the IEEE 1394 data transport bus. Digital A V equipment compatible with i.LINK can be connected using a single i.LINK cable. The i.LINK interface allows this PDP system to control one of up to two i.LINK compatible devices (in connection) that can be identified. Which i.LINK devices ar e connectable? Fo r i.LINK devices, this system supports only D-VHS recorders. The i.LINK terminals on this system cannot be connected with other equipment such as DVD recorders, digital video cameras, personal computers, and PC peripheral devices because of differences in the specifications. Media Receiver (r ear view) i.LINK cable (commercially available) D- VHS recorder (The function and performance are the same for both terminals.) IN SERVICE ONL Y MONITOR OUT DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL INPUT 1 COMPONENT VIDEO S400 DTV-ANTENNA IN INPUT 3 VCR CONTROL A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN IN OUT CONTROL OUT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y AC INLET BLACK WHITE SYSTEM CABLE R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO INPUT 2 (TS) To use i.LINK, you need to connect only an i.LINK cable; you need not connect cables to the video and audio terminals. What can be r ecorded through i.LINK? W ith D - VHS recorders connected to this system through i.LINK, you can record only digital TV pro- grams. Y ou cannot record conventional TV channels nor contents coming from external input sources and personal computers. Connecting D-VHS recor ders Use the i.LINK terminals when connecting D- VHS recorders. When connecting a single D- VHS recorder PDP-ELITE-Eng (65-80) 9/9/03, 11:46 70
11 Enjoying through External Equipment 71 En When connecting two D-VHS r ecorders Y ou can connect two D - VHS recorders directly to the i.LINK terminals on the rear of the Media Receiver . Using i.LINK cables you can also connect up to two D- VHS recorders in a daisy chain. Precautions about i.LINK connections ⢠Use S400 i.LINK cables that have 4-pin plugs and are shorter than 3.5 m (11.48 feet). ⢠Some i.LINK devices cannot relay data when their power is off . ⢠Do not make the following loop connections: Media Receiver D- VHS recorder D- VHS recorder Media Receiver D- VHS recorder Media Receiver D- VHS recorder D-VHS r ecorder i.LINK cable Media Receiver D-VHS r ecorder i.LINK cables D- VHS r ecorder PDP-ELITE-Eng (65-80) 9/9/03, 11:46 71
11 Enjoying through External Equipment 72 En Displaying a D-VHS image To watch a D- VHS image, press i.LINK on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select i.LINK. Useful and important notification Useful information â¢D - VHS recorders connected through i.LINK can play back digital TV programs recorded using this system. â¢D - VHS recorders connected through i.LINK can record only digital TV programs. Using i.LINK, those recorders cannot record conventional TV channels nor contents coming from external input sources. ⢠This system can be simultaneously connected with up to two D- VHS recorders that support i.LINK. Y ou can control one of these D- VHS recorders (basic functions only). ⢠Some D- VHS recorders connected through i.LINK may not allow this system to control through the control panel screen or to display images and output sound. â¢T o record digital TV programs using connected D- VHS recorders, use D- VHS tape. Y ou cannot use VHS tape nor S- VHS tape. ⢠Some D- VHS recorders connected though i.LINK may not allow this system to play back images and sound recorded on VHS tape, S- VHS tape, or (if with analog signals) D-VHS tape. If this is the case, connect the analog output terminals on the D-VHS recorder to INPUT 1, 2, 3, or 4 terminals on this system. See pages 65 to 67. ⢠This system supports the Digital T ransmission Con- tent P rotection (DTCP) technology . The DTCP is a copy protection technology that presents data coding and device authentification. ⢠i.LINK may not allow copy-restricted video, audio , and other data to be copied from one i.LINK device to another . It also may not allow video, audio, and other data to be transferred with equipment that does not support the DTCP . Precautions ⢠While one D-VHS recorder connected through i.LINK is recording or playing back, do not switch on or off the other connected D-VHS recorder (not in use) or do not connect or disconnect the i.LINK cable from that D-VHS recorder . Doing so can result in image and sound interruption. ⢠Some D- VHS recorders that support i.LINK cannot relay data when their power is off . Check the user âÂÂs manual for your D- VHS recorder . This system allows you to change the setting for data relay in the standby mode. See âÂÂSetting up for i.LINK standbyâ on page 76. PDP-ELITE-Eng (65-80) 9/9/03, 11:46 72
11 Enjoying through External Equipment 73 En Setting up for controlling a D-VHS r ecorder Y ou can operate the connected D - VHS recorder from the Plasma Display that shows the control panel screen. After making the connections, use the menu to specif y the model of the D-VHS recorder to be operated. Y ou can operate only a single D-VHS recorder from the Plasma Display . 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂi.LINK SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂi.LINK ListâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . ⢠The list of the registered D-VHS recorders (i.LINK list) appears. i.LINK List Delete All Name Maker Number Status 1/1 DâÂÂVHS1 ****** ****** Connected 5 Pr ess / to select the D- VHS recorder model to be operated, and then press ENTER . i.LINK Setting Connect Rename Replace Delete DâÂÂVHS1 ****** ****** Connected 6 Pr ess / to select âÂÂConnectâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 7 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠The following information appears at the right end of the i.LINK list to indicate the connection status of the D- VHS recorders: Control: Data connection with the D-VHS recorder has been established and the recorder is ready for control. Connected: The D - VHS recorder has been physi- cally connected, and can be controlled if it is selected for control. Other: Equipment other than a D- VHS re- corder has been physically connected and thus cannot be controlled. âÂÂ: Currently not physically connected PDP-ELITE-Eng (65-80) 9/9/03, 11:46 73
11 Enjoying through External Equipment 74 En Operating the control panel scr een The control panel screen appears when you press i.LINK . It disappears when you press i.LINK again . T o select a button on the control panel screen , press / or / , and then press ENTER on the remote control. Name Status(Play) i.LINK/DTV D Device 00:00:00 1 2 3 @ # $ % 6 9- 5 780 = 4 ~ ! 1 Shows the model and manufacture name of the D- VHS recorder to be operated. 2 Shows counter time output by the D- VHS recorder . 3 Shows the current status of the D- VHS recorder . 4 Switches on and off the D- VHS recorder . 5 Starts recording. 6 R ewinds the tape. 7 R ewinds to the start of the current program. 8 P auses the tape. 9 Starts playing back. 0 Stops the current tape motion . - Fo r wards the tape. = Fo r wards to the start of the next program. ~ Switches the input source between i.LINK and DTV . ! Allows you to change the D- VHS recorder to be operated. After pressing this button, press / to select the desired model from the list, and then press ENTER . @ Shows the type of inserted video tape; D for D- VHS, S for S- VHS, and no display for VHS. # Appears when any tape has been inserted. $ Appears when the inserted tape has been write protected. The inserted tape cannot be used for recording when this indicator appears. % Appears when the D- VHS recorder has been preset for recording and is in the standby mode. ⢠If no i.LINK device has been connected, âÂÂNo i.LINK devices are connected.â appears. If this is the case, connect i.LINK devices. ⢠If none of the connected equipment has been sup- ported for control, you cannot execute control. Editing the i.LINK list The i.LINK list shows all devices connected through i.LINK interfaces. In this list, you can change the name or order of devices or delete device information . To change the name of a device: 1 Pr ess / to select the desired device from the list, and then press ENTER . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂR enameâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . i.LINK Setting Connect Rename Replace Delete DâÂÂVHS1 ****** ****** Connected 3 Pr ess / to change the character for the first digit. Rename OK Cancel Input the device name. DâÂÂVHS1 ****** ****** Connected D â¢Y ou can select A to Z, 0 to 9, special codes, and space in the order . 4 Pr ess / to move the cursor to the second digit. 5 Pr ess / to change the character for the second digit. 6 R epeat steps 3 and 4 to enter up to eight digits, and then press ENTER . 7 Pr ess / to select OK, and then press ENTER . PDP-ELITE-Eng (65-80) 9/9/03, 11:46 74
11 Enjoying through External Equipment 75 En To change the order of devices: 1 Pr ess / to select the desired device from the list, and then press ENTER . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂR eplaceâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . i.LINK Setting Connect Rename Replace Delete DâÂÂVHS1 ****** ****** Connected 3 Pr ess / to select the new desired position, and then press ENTER . Replace Cancel Name Maker Number Status 1/1 DâÂÂVHS1 ****** ****** Connected DâÂÂVHS2 ****** ****** Connected ⢠The selected device is moved to the selected position. To delete information about a single device: 1 Pr ess / to select the desired device from the list, and then press ENTER . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDeleteâ and then press ENTER . i.LINK Setting Connect Rename Replace Delete DâÂÂVHS1 ****** ****** Connected â¢A confirmation message appears. â¢A warning message appears if the selected device has been preset for recording with the timer or if its power is on . If this is the case, you cannot delete the device that you have selected. 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDeleteâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . Cancel Delete this device? PLASMA DISPLA Y Delete D-VHS â¢A confirmation message appears. 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDeleteâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . Cancel Are you sure y ou want to delete? PLASMA DISPLA Y Delete D-VHS PDP-ELITE-Eng (65-80) 9/9/03, 11:46 75
11 Enjoying through External Equipment 76 En To delete information about all devices: 1 Pr ess to select âÂÂDelete AllâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂY esâ and then press ENTER . No Are you sure y ou want to delete the infomation for all de vices? PLASMA DISPLA Y Ye s â¢A confirmation message appears. â¢A warning message appears if the selected device has been preset for recording with the timer or if its power is on . If you delete a device that has been preset for recording, its all presettings are deleted. 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂY esâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . No Are you sure you want to delete? PLASMA DISPLA Y Ye s â¢A confirmation message appears. 4 Pr ess ENTER to exit the menu. OK Deletion completed. PLASMA DISPLA Y Setting up for i.LINK standby Use the following procedure to enable data transfer between multiple i.LINK devices even when the system is in the standby mode. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂi.LINK SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂi.LINK StandbyâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select âÂÂEnableâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . i.LINK Standby Disable Enable 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢W ith âÂÂEnableâ selected, the system relays data between multiple i.LINK devices even when in the standby mode; the i.LINK circuits are energized in that mode. â¢W ith âÂÂDisableâ (factor y default) selected, less power is consumed when the system is in the standby mode; however the system does not relay data between multiple i.LINK devices. When i.LINK de- vices are not in connection , select âÂÂDisableâÂÂ, result- ing in less power consumption. In standby mode i.LINK device Media Receiver i.LINK device No data relay PDP-ELITE-Eng (65-80) 9/9/03, 11:46 76
11 Enjoying through External Equipment 77 En Signal names for 15-pin mini D-sub connecter 15 14 13 12 9 11 10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 (front view) Pin No. Signal name 1 R 2 G 3 B 4 No t connect ed 5 No t connect ed 6 GND (gr ound) 7 GND (gr ound) 8 GND (gr ound) 9 5V 0 GND (gr ound) - No t connect ed = SD A ~ HD ! VD @ SCL ⢠A Macintosh adaptor may be required for use with some Macintosh computers. W atching an image from a personal computer Connecting a personal computer Use the PC terminals to connect a personal computer . ⢠The PC input terminals are DDC1/2B -compatible. â¢R efer to page 107 for a list of personal computer signals compatible with the Plasma Display System. Media Receiver (fr ont view) ø 3.5 mm stereo mini-plug cable (commercially available) RGB cable (commercially available) Pe rsonal computer Displaying an image from a personal com- puter When connecting to a personal computer , the input signal type is automatically identified. If the personal computer image does not come in clearly , you may need to use Auto Setup in the menu. See page 81. To watch an image coming from the personal com- puter , press PC on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select âÂÂPCâÂÂ. ⢠The PC terminals cannot be used for audiovisual equipment. PDP-ELITE-Eng (65-80) 9/9/03, 11:46 77
11 Enjoying through External Equipment 78 En VCR CONTROL IN SERVICE ONLY MONITOR OUT DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL INPUT 1 COMPONENT VIDEO S400 DTV-ANTENNA IN INPUT 3 VCR CONTROL A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN IN OUT CONTROL OUT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y AC INLET BLACK WHITE SYSTEM CABLE R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO INPUT 2 (TS) P osition the light emitting section on the VCR controller cable so that it faces the VCR. Connecting a VCR controller Connect the supplied VCR controller to the Media R eceiver . This allows you to preset digital TV programs for recording, using the Electronic P rogram Guide. When the specified time comes, the system in the standby mode is automatically switched on and the specified TV program is recorded using the connected VCR or DVD recorder . ⢠Make sure to leave the VCR power on when preset- ting TV programs for recording with the VCR control- ler . ⢠Be sure to firmly connect the VCR controller to the VCR control terminal on the rear of the Media R eceiver . If you have mistakenly connected it to the CONTROL IN or CONTROL OUT terminal, remote control or other operations may be disabled. (Once you have positioned the VCR controller , secure with the tape provided.) R emote control sensor Media Receiver (r ear view) VCR or DVD recor der Use the following procedure to set the manufacture of the recording equipment: 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select â VCR ControlâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select the manufacture of the recording equipment, and then press ENTER . 1 / 5 VCR Control Pioneer ******** ******** ******** ******** ******** ******** ******** ⢠The screen for recording test appears. 5 Check that the power to the recording equipment is on, and insert tape into the slot. â¢I nsert tape you think it all right to erase its contents. The contents will be erased because R ec and Stop codes are output in the test. ⢠Check that the light emitting section on the VCR controller cable faces the recording equipment. 6 Pr ess ENTER to execute recording test. ⢠If the recording equipment fails to start and stop recording, check and change the specified recording equipment manufacture. 7 Pr ess / to select âÂÂYESâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 8 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠Even if you correctly specify the manufacture of the recording equipment, control of some models may be disabled. â¢P erform the recording test when the recording equipment is not in recording standby or is not recording. ⢠The recording test takes approximately 10 seconds. ⢠The PIONEER 1 (DVD recorder) has been set as the factor y default. PDP-ELITE-Eng (65-80) 9/9/03, 11:46 78
11 Enjoying through External Equipment 79 En The lists of controllable r ecording equipment manufactures Manufacture R emot e control type PIONEER 1âÂÂ5 P ANASONIC 1âÂÂ7 PHILIPS 1âÂÂ6 SHARP 1âÂÂ5 T OSHIBA 1âÂÂ4 S AMSUNG 1âÂÂ6 FISHER 1âÂÂ3 GOLDST AR 1 HIT ACHI 1, 2 MAGNA VO X 1 MITSUBISHI 1âÂÂ7 RC A 1âÂÂ6 S ANY O 1âÂÂ3 SONY 1âÂÂ3 JVC 1âÂÂ4 ZENITH 1 GRANDIENTE 1 AKAI 1 MA TSUI 1 AIW A 1 ALB A 1, 2 BUSH 1 THOMSON 1 BAI R D 1 TELEFUNKEN 1 Grunding 1âÂÂ3 MARANTZ 1âÂÂ2 GE 1âÂÂ3 Y AMAHA 1âÂÂ4 CUR TIS MA THIS 1âÂÂ3 FUNAI 1 ADMIRAL 1 KENW OOD 1âÂÂ3 NEC 1, 2 W ARDS 1âÂÂ4 MEMOREX 1 , 2 JC PENNY 1âÂÂ6 Some modes of the listed manufactures may not allow control through the VCR controller . PDP-ELITE-Eng (65-80) 9/9/03, 11:46 79
11 Enjoying through External Equipment 80 En Media Receiver (r ear view) IN CONTROL OUT CONTROL IN OUT CONTROL IN OUT CONTROL IN OUT IN SERVICE ONL Y MONITOR OUT DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL INPUT 1 COMPONENT VIDEO S400 DTV-ANTENNA IN INPUT 3 VCR CONTROL A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN IN OUT CONTROL OUT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y AC INLET BLACK WHITE SYSTEM CABLE R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO INPUT 2 (TS) Connecting control cor ds Connect control codes between the Media R eceiver and other PIONEER equipment having the t logo . Y ou can then operate the connected equipment by sending commands from its remote control unit to the remote control sensor on the Media Receiver . After the CONTROL IN terminals have been connected, the remote control sensors on the connected equip- ment do not accept commands from the remote control units. F ace the remote control units to the remote control sensor on the Plasma Display when operating the connected equipment. ⢠Make sure that the power is turned off when making connections. ⢠Complete all component connections before making control cord connections. About SR The CONTROL OUT terminal on the rear of the Media R eceiver supports SR that allows linked operations with a PIONEER A V receiver . SR presents functions such as the input switch linkage operation function and the DSP surround mode display function . For more information, see the user âÂÂs manual for the PIONEER A V receiver supporting SR . ⢠While in connection through SR , the volume on this system is temporarily minimized. The control cables (commercially available) are mono sound cables with mini plugs (no resistance). PDP-ELITE-Eng (65-80) 9/9/03, 11:46 80
12 Useful Adjustment Settings 81 En Adjusting image positions (A V mode only) Adjust the horizontal and vertical positions of images on the Plasma Display . 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂOptionâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP ositionâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂH/V P osition AdjustâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . Position H/V Position Adjust Reset 5 Pr ess / to adjust the vertical position or press / to adjust the horizontal position. H/V Position Adjust 0 0 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢T o restore the factor y defaults for all the items, press / to select âÂÂResetâ in step 4, and then press ENTER . A confirmation screen appears. P ress / to select âÂÂY esâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . ⢠Adjustments are stored separately according to input source. Adjusting image positions and clock automatically (PC mode only) Use Auto Setup to automatically adjust positions and clock of images coming from a personal computer . 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂOption âÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select â Auto SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . Option Auto Setup Manual Setup ⢠Auto Setup starts. 4 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠When Auto Setup is finished, â Auto Setup com- pleted.â appears. ⢠Even when â Auto Setup completed.â appears, Auto Setup may have failed, depending on conditions. ⢠Auto Setup may fail with a PC image composed of similar patterns or monochrome. If not successful, change the PC image and tr y again . ⢠Be sure to connect the computer to the Media R eceiver and switch it on before starting Auto Setup. PDP-ELITE-Eng (81-96) 9/9/03, 11:47 81
12 Useful Adjustment Settings 82 En Adjusting image positions and clock manually (PC mode only) Usually you can easily adjust the positions and clock of images using Auto Setup. Use Manual Setup to opti- mize the positions and clock of images when neces- sar y . 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂOptionâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂManual SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select the item to be adjusted, and then press ENTER . Manual Setup H/V Position Adjust Clock Phase Reset 0 0 5 Pr ess / (and / ) to per form adjustment. ⢠Use / only when you adjust the vertical position after selecting âÂÂH/V P osition AdjustâÂÂ. 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢T o restore the factory defaults for all the items, press / to select âÂÂResetâ in step 4, and then press ENTER . A confirmation screen appears. P ress / to select âÂÂY esâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . PDP-ELITE-Eng (81-96) 9/9/03, 11:47 82
12 Useful Adjustment Settings 83 En AV mode PC mode ex cept for XGA signals PC mode for XGA signals Selecting a screen size Pr ess S CREEN SIZE to switch among the screen size options selectable for the type of video signals currently received. ⢠Each time you press S CREEN SIZE , the selection is switched. ⢠The selectable screen sizes differ depending on the types of input signals. AV mode Item Description 4:3 F or 4:3 âÂÂst andardâ pictur es. A side bar appear s on each side. FULL F or 1 6:9 squeeze pictur es. ZOOM F or 1 6:9 let terbo x picture s. Bars ma y appear on the t op and bot t om with some progr ams. CINEMA F or 1 4:9 let terbox pictur es. Bar s ma y appear on the t op and bot t om on some progr ams. WIDE In this mode pictur es ar e progr essiv ely stre tched to wa rd each side of the screen. PC mode ex cept for XGA signals Item Description 4:3 F ills the screen without alt ering the input signal a spect r atio. FULL Fu ll 1 6:9 screen displa y Dot by Dot Matche s input signal with same number of scr een pixels. PC mode for XGA signals (Ex. 1024 à768 input at PRO-1110HD) Item Description 4:3 Matches input signal with the same number of scr een pixels. Optimized for 1 02 4 à7 68 displa y FULL1 Fu ll 1 6:9 screen displa y Optimized for 1 02 4 à7 68 displa y FULL2 F or wide signal display Use when displa ying 1 2 80 à7 6 8 signal resolution. ⢠The PC mode above is for the PRO-1110HD. For the PRO-910HD the number of panel pixels is different, so signal processing and actual viewing conditions will vary slightly. ZOOM 4:3 WIDE FULL CINEMA 4:3 Dot by Dot FULL 4:3 FULL2 FULL1 PDP-ELITE-Eng (81-96) 9/9/03, 11:47 83
12 Useful Adjustment Settings 84 En Changing the brightness at both sides of the scr een (Side Mask) W ith the 4:3 screen size selected for the A V mode, you can change the brightness of the gray side masks that appear at both sides of the screen. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂOptionâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSide MaskâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select the desired parameter , and then press ENTER . Side Mask Fixed Auto It em Descrip tion Fixe d Alway s se ts the same brightness for the (factory default) gr ay side ma sks. Aut o Ad justs the brightne ss of the gr a y side masks accor ding t o the brightness of images. 5 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. PDP-ELITE-Eng (81-96) 9/9/03, 11:47 84
12 Useful Adjustment Settings 85 En Sleep Timer When the selected time elapses, the Sleep Timer automatically places the system into the standby mode. Pr ess SLEEP to select the desired time. ⢠The timer starts counting. ⢠Each time you press SLEEP, the selection is switched as below : (cancel) 30 60 90 120 Off (minutes) ⢠The factor y default is âÂÂOff âÂÂ. â¢T o cancel the Sleep Timer , select âÂÂOff â by pressing SLEEP . â¢F ive minutes before the selected time elapses, the remaining time appears ever y minute. Y ou can also use the menu to set the Sleep Timer . 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSleep Timer âÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select the desired time, and then press ENTER . Sleep Timer Remain 90min Off 30min 60min 120min 90min 4 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. PDP-ELITE-Eng (81-96) 9/9/03, 11:47 85
12 Useful Adjustment Settings 86 En Closed caption for conventional TV channels Y our Plasma Display System is equipped with an internal closed caption decoder . Closed caption is a system which allows you to view conversations, narra- tion, and sound effects in TV programs and home videos as subtitles on your Plasma Display screen . ⢠Not all programs and videos offer closed caption. Please look for the â Nâ symbol to ensure that captions will be shown. Activating the closed caption 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂClosed CaptionâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSettingâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select âÂÂOnâ or âÂÂOn If MuteâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . Setting Off On If Mute On It em Descrip tion Off Does not sho w closed captions. (factory default) On Alway s sho ws closed cap tions. On If Mut e Show s closed captions only while sound is being mut ed. 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. Selecting the type of closed captions â¢â CC -1â or âÂÂCC -2â displays subtitles of TV dramas and news programs while allowing a full view of the picture. â¢â T1â or âÂÂT2â superimposes on the picture other information (e.g. TV guide, weather) that is indepen- dent of the TV in progress. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂClosed CaptionâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂChannelâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to change the selection, and then press ENTER . Channel CC-1 TEXT -2 TEXT -1 CC-2 ⢠The factor y default is âÂÂCC -1âÂÂ. 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. PDP-ELITE-Eng (81-96) 9/9/03, 11:47 86
12 Useful Adjustment Settings 87 En Closed caption for digital TV channels Y our Plasma Display System is equipped with an internal closed caption decoder also for digital TV channels. Y ou can enjoy digital closed captions whenever their ser vices are provided. Digital closed captions allow you to change parameters such as fonts and colors. How- ever , some digital TV programs may provide you with only conventional closed captions. If this is the case, conventional closed captions are displayed. Activating the closed caption Use the following procedure to activate the closed caption. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV Closed Caption âÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSettingâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select âÂÂOn â or âÂÂOn If MuteâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . Setting Off On If Mute On Item Description Off Does not show closed cap tions. (fac t ory default) On Alwa y s shows closed captions. On If Mute Sho ws closed cap tions only while sound is being mut ed. 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢F or MONITOR OUT , only conventional closed caption signals are output; digital closed caption signals are not output. Selecting the type of conventional closed captions (for digital TV channels) Use the following procedure to select the type of conventional closed captions. Y ou will watch the selected type of closed captions when the selected digital TV program provides only conventional closed captions. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV Closed Caption âÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select â Analog CaptionâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to change the selection , and then press ENTER . Analog Caption CC-1 TEXT 2 TEXT 1 CC-2 ⢠The factor y default is âÂÂCC -1âÂÂ. 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. PDP-ELITE-Eng (81-96) 9/9/03, 11:47 87
12 Useful Adjustment Settings 88 En Selecting digital closed captions Use the following procedure to select digital closed captions. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV Closed CaptionâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDigital CaptionâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to change the selection, and then press ENTER . Digital Caption Service 1 Service 4 Service 5 Service 6 Service 3 Service 2 ⢠The factor y default is âÂÂSer vice 1âÂÂ. 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠The P rimar y Caption Ser vice is usually offered for Ser vice 1, and the Secondar y Language Ser vice is usually offered for Ser vice 2 if these ser vices are available. Selecting digital closed caption param- eters Use the following procedure to change such param- eters of digital closed captions as font size, font type, foreground and background colors. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV Closed Caption âÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDigital Caption SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select the item, and then press / to change the parameter . Digital Caption Setup Font Size Font Style Foreground Color Foreground Opacity Background Color Background Opacity Auto Auto Auto Aut o Auto Small ABCdef123 ⢠The field at the bottom of the dialog box shows how closed captions will appear . 6 R epeat step 5 as necessary , and then press ENTER . 7 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. PDP-ELITE-Eng (81-96) 9/9/03, 11:47 88
12 Useful Adjustment Settings 89 En The following table shows the parameters selectable for each item. Item Selection F ont Size Aut o/ Small/ Standar d / Large F ont St yle 1 Aut o/ F ont 1 / F ont 2/ F ont 3/ F ont 4/ F ont 5/ F ont 6/ F ont 7/ F ont 8 Fo r eground Color Aut o/ Black/ White / Red/ Gr een/ Blue/ Ye llow/ Magent a/ Cyan Fo r eground Opacit y Aut o/ Opaque / T r anslucent/ T r anspar ent/ Flashing Background Color Aut o/ Black / White/ R ed/ Green/ Blue/ Ye llow/ Magent a/ Cyan Background Opacit y Aut o/ Opaque / T r anslucent/ T r anspar ent/ Flashing 1 F ont 1 (default font)/ F ont 2 (monospaced with serifs)/ Font 3 (proportionally spaced with serifs)/ Font 4 (monospaced without serifs)/ F ont 5 (proportionally spaced without serifs)/ F ont 6 (casual font)/ Font 7 (cursive font)/ F ont 8 (small capitals font) W ith â Autoâ selected, parameters specified by the provider are used; if not specified by the provider , the bolded default parameters are used. If you select parameters other than â AutoâÂÂ, the selected parameters are used regardless of provider âÂÂs specifications. PDP-ELITE-Eng (81-96) 9/9/03, 11:47 89
12 Useful Adjustment Settings 90 En ⢠The voluntary movie rating system only uses an age- based rating. TV P arental Guidelines C ont ent FV D L S V Ra ting (F antas y (Sexually (Adult (Sexual (Violence) violence) sug gestiv e language) situation) dialog) TV - Y (All childr en) TV - Y7 (Direct ed t o older children) X TV -G Age-Base (Gener al audience) TV -PG (P arent al guidance suggested) X XXX TV -1 4 (P arents str ongly cautioned) X XXX TV -MA (Ma ture audience only) XXX X: Content rating can be set. Activating the Par ental Control 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP arental ControlâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . ⢠If you have set a password (page 95), the password entry screen appears. Enter your 4- digit password using buttons 0 â 9 . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂStatusâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select âÂÂOn âÂÂ, and then press ENTER . Status Off On ⢠The factor y default is âÂÂOff âÂÂ. 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. Parental Contr ol (setting the V -CHIP level) The V - CHIP is an electronic filtering device built into your system. This tool gives parents a great degree of control over broadcasts accessed by their children . It allows parents to select programs judged suitable for child viewing while blocking ones judged not suitable. It does so automatically once you activate the V - CHIP feature in your Plasma Display . This tool functions for both conventional and digital TV channels. ⢠The U.S. has two rating systems for viewing content: TV P arental Guidelines and movie ratings. ⢠The TV P arental Guidelines work in conjunction with the V - CHIP to help parents screen out inappropriate television shows from their children. ⢠Movie ratings are used for original movies rated by the Motion Picture Association of America (MP AA) as watched on cable TV and not edited for television. The V- CHIP can also be set to block MP AA-rated movies. Vo luntar y movie rating system (MP AA) Ra ting Description G Gener al audiences. All ages admit ted. PG Pa r ent al guidance suggested. Some mat erial may not be suit able for childr en. PG-1 3 Pa r ents str ongly cautioned. Some mat erial ma y be inappropria t e for children under 13 . Age-Base R Re stricted. Under 1 7 requir es accompan y- ing par ent or adult guardian (age v aries in some jurisdictions). NC-1 7 No one 1 7 and under admit t ed. X A ra ting that has no w been superseded by NC-1 7 . NR Not r at ed. PDP-ELITE-Eng (81-96) 9/9/03, 11:47 90
12 Useful Adjustment Settings 91 En Setting the voluntary moving rating sys- tem (MP AA) 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP arental ControlâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . ⢠If you have set a password (page 95), the password entry screen appears. Enter your 4- digit password using buttons 0 â 9 . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂMP AA RatingsâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select the desired rating, and then press / to select âÂÂViewâ or âÂÂBlockâÂÂ. MP AA Ratings PG PG-13 G R NC-17 X View View View View View Block ⢠The factor y defaults for all the ratings are âÂÂV iewâÂÂ. 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. Example 1: Changing âÂÂRâ from âÂÂBlockâ to âÂÂViewâ causes â Viewâ to be automatically selected also for âÂÂGâÂÂ, âÂÂPGâÂÂ, and âÂÂPG- 13âÂÂ. Example 2: Changing âÂÂRâ from âÂÂViewâ to âÂÂBlockâ causes âÂÂBlockâ to be automatically selected also for âÂÂNC -17â and âÂÂXâÂÂ. Blocking Not Rated (NR) TV programs Use the following procedure to block movies not rated by the MP AA. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP arental ControlâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . ⢠If you have set a password (page 95), the password entry screen appears. Enter your 4- digit password using buttons 0 â 9 . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂMP AA NRâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select âÂÂViewâ or âÂÂBlockâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . MP AA NR View Block ⢠The factor y default is â V iewâÂÂ. 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. PDP-ELITE-Eng (81-96) 9/9/03, 11:47 91
12 Useful Adjustment Settings 92 En Setting the TV Par ental Guidelines (TV Guidelines) 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂParental ControlâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . ⢠If you have set a password (page 95), the password entry screen appears. Enter your 4- digit password using buttons 0 â 9 . 4 Pr ess / to select â TV P arental GuidelinesâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . TV Parental Guidelines TVâÂÂY TVâÂÂY7 TVâÂÂG TVâÂÂPG TVâÂÂY TVâÂÂMA FV D L S V V VV V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V 5 Pr ess / or / to select the desired cell (rating). 6 Pr ess ENTER to select âÂÂV â (View) or âÂÂBâ (Block). TV Parental Guidelines TVâÂÂY TVâÂÂY7 TVâÂÂG TVâÂÂPG TVâÂÂY TVâÂÂMA FV D L S V V B B V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V ⢠Each time you press ENTER, the selection is switched. ⢠The factory defaults for all the ratings are â Vâ (V iew). 7 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢B locking a low rated program will cause all higher rated programs to be blocked. Canadian rating systems ⢠The TV rating systems in Canada are based on the Canadian Radio- T elevision and T elecommunications Commission (CRTC) policy on violence in television programming. ⢠While violence is the most important content element to be rated, the structure developed takes into consid- eration other program content like language, nudity , sexuality and mature themes. ⢠When setting the V - CHIP on the Canadian system you can chose either the Canadian English ratings or the Canadian F rench ratings. Canadian English ratings Ra ting Description E Exemp t: Includes news, sports, documen- t arie s and other information pr ogramming; ta lk shows, music videos, and v ariet y pr ogramming. C Children: Int ended for y ounger children under the age of 8 y ears. P a y s careful at tention t o themes that could thr eaten their sense of securit y and well-being. C8 Childr en ov er 8 years old: Cont ains no portra yal of violence as the pr eferred, accept able, or only wa y to r esolv e conflict; nor encour age childr en to imit ate danger - ous acts which the y ma y see on the screen. G Gener al: Considered accep table for all age groups. Appr opriate vie wing for the entire family , contains very lit tle violence, ph ysical, v erbal or emotional. Age-Base PG Par ental Guidance: Int ended for a general audience, but ma y not be suit able for y ounger childr en (under the age of 8) because it could contain contr over sial themes or issues. 14 Ov er 1 4 Y ears: Could contain theme s where violence is one of the dominant elements of the st oryline, but it must be integr al t o the development of plo t or char act er . Language usage could be pr ofane and nudity pr esent within the cont ext of the theme. 18 A dults: Int ended for view ers 1 8 year s and older and might cont ain depictions of violence, which while r elat ed to the de velopment of plot, char acter or themes, ar e intended for adult vie wing. Could cont ain gr aphic language and portra yals of se x and nudit y . PDP-ELITE-Eng (81-96) 9/9/03, 11:47 92
12 Useful Adjustment Settings 93 En Canadian F r ench ratings Ra ting Description E Exemp t progr amming. G Gener al: All ages and childr en, contains minimal dir ect violence, but may be integr at ed int o the plot in a humorous or unrealistic manner . 8ans Gener al but inadvisable for young childr en: Ma y be view ed b y a wide public audience, but could cont ain scenes disturbing t o children under eight who canno t distin- guish bet ween imaginary and real situa- tions. Recommended for vie wing with par ent. 1 3ans Over 1 3 y ears: Could contain scene s of frequent violent scene s and therefor e r ecommended for viewing with par ent. 1 6ans Over 1 6 year s: Could contain frequent violent scenes and int ense violence. 1 8ans Over 1 8 year s: Only for adult vie wing. Could contain fr equent violent scenes and e xtr eme violence. Setting Canadian English ratings 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP arental ControlâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . ⢠If you have set a password (page 95), the password entry screen appears. Enter your 4- digit password using buttons 0 â 9 . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂCanadian English R atingsâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select the desired rating, and then press / to select âÂÂViewâ or âÂÂBlockâÂÂ. Canadian English Ratings C8 G C PG 14 18 View View View View View Block ⢠The factor y defaults for all the ratings are âÂÂV iewâÂÂ. 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. Setting Canadian French ratings 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP arental ControlâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . ⢠If you have set a password (page 95), the password entry screen appears. Enter your 4- digit password using buttons 0 â 9 . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂCanadian F rench RatingsâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select the desired rating, and then press / to select â Viewâ or âÂÂBlockâÂÂ. Canadian French Ratings G 8ans E 13ans 16ans 18ans View View View View Block View ⢠The factor y defaults for all the ratings are âÂÂV iewâÂÂ. 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. Age-Base PDP-ELITE-Eng (81-96) 9/9/03, 11:47 93
12 Useful Adjustment Settings 94 En T emporarily deactivating the V -CHIP Block Y ou can temporarily deactivate the V -CHIP Block. When the V - CHIP Block is working and censors TV programs or VCR or DVD contents to be blocked, a password entry screen appears. Please Input Y our Password. To temporarily deactivate the V - CHIP block, enter a 4- digit password that you have set using the Home menu. Image and sound muting is quitted. If you press ENTER instead of entering the password, the password entr y screen disappears. ⢠The password entry screen stays only for one minute. Pr essing ENTER causes the password entr y screen to appear again. Reactivating the V -CHIP Block Executing one of the following procedures reactivates the V -CHIP Block. Method 1: Make a selection (âÂÂOnâ or âÂÂOff âÂÂ) for âÂÂStatusâ under âÂÂP arental Controlâ in the menu. See page 90. Method 2: Make a selection for âÂÂMP AA RatingsâÂÂ, âÂÂMP AA NRâÂÂ, âÂÂTV Pa rental GuidelinesâÂÂ, âÂÂCanadian English Ratingsâ or âÂÂCanadian F rench Ratingsâ under âÂÂP arental Controlâ in the menu. See pages 91 to 93. Method 3: Switch off the power to the system. PDP-ELITE-Eng (81-96) 9/9/03, 11:47 94
12 Useful Adjustment Settings 95 En Programming a password (A V mode only) Y ou can program a password to prevent other persons from changing especially P arental Control settings. Setting and changing the password Use the following procedure to newly set or change the password: 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP asswordâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . ⢠If you have set a password, the password entr y screen appears. Enter your 4-digit password using buttons 0 â 9 . ⢠The factor y default is âÂÂ1234âÂÂ. 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂChange P asswordâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Enter a 4-digit password to be newly set, using buttons 0 â 9 . Change Password Please Input New Password. Reconfirm New Password. 6 Enter the same password that you have entered in step 4, using buttons 0 â 9 . Change Password Please Input New Password. Reconfirm New Password. **** 7 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢T ake a note of the newly set password and keep it handy . PDP-ELITE-Eng (81-96) 9/9/03, 11:47 95
12 Useful Adjustment Settings 96 En Cut along the dotted line and file after reading and filling out. We suggested you write down your password so you donâÂÂt forget it. PRO-1 1 10HD/PRO-910HD Y our passwor d No.: If you for get the password When the message âÂÂPlease Input Y our P asswordâ is displayed in step 3 above, press the ENTER button on the remote control unit and hold it down for 3 seconds or longer . The password reverts to âÂÂ1234âÂÂ. Resetting the password 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂPasswordâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . ⢠The password entr y screen appears. Enter your 4-digit password using buttons 0 â 9 . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂResetâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . No Resets passwor d. PLASMA DISPLA Y Ye s 5 Pr ess / to select âÂÂY esâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠The above procedure will reset the password to the factor y default (1234). PDP-ELITE-Eng (81-96) 9/9/03, 11:47 96
13 Useful Features 97 En Lear ning function of the remote control unit Y ou can operate the connected AV products (A V Re- ceiver , Cable Box, SAT tuner , VCR , DVD, DVD recorder , LD) using the learning function of your remote control unit. This remote control unit has a function that can memorize each remote control code. 2 to 5 cm (0.8 to 2.0 inches) Remote control Remote control of (Supplied accessory) A V product Using the learning function 1 Slide the Mode switch to match the device whose remote control signal you want to be learned. 2 Pr ess EDIT/LEARN and 2 at the same time. â¢The LED flashes. 3 Pr ess a button to be learned. ⢠The LED lights up. â¢F or the functions that can be learned, see pages 100 to 105. ⢠When learning is finished, the LED starts flashing again. 4 Pr ess EDIT/LEARN again to exit the Learn mode. â¢T o exit the Learn mode half way , press EDIT/LEARN again. ⢠If the Mode switch selection is changed when in the Learn mode, the Learn mode is cancelled. ⢠If no operation is per formed for more than one minute, the Learn mode is cancelled. ⢠It takes about 2 seconds to finish code transmission. Do not interrupt it halfway. W ait until the LED flashes again. â¢Y ou can reset all learned codes to the factor y de- faults. When not in the Learn mode, press and hold TV a , and then press D and k at the same time. PDP-ELITE-Eng (97-105) 9/9/03, 11:47 97
13 Useful Features 98 En Pr esetting manufacture codes 1 Slide the Mode switch to match the device to which you want to preset the remote control signal. 2 Pr ess EDIT/LEARN and 1 at the same time. ⢠The LED flashes. 3 Pr ess 0 â 9 to enter the manufacture code. See page 99. â¢P reset mode is finished once the LED no longer lights up. â¢T o exit the Edit mode halfway , press EDIT/LEARN again. ⢠If the Mode switch selection is changed when in the Edit mode, the Edit mode is cancelled. ⢠If no operation is performed for more than one minute, the Edit mode is cancelled. ⢠When you enter a code not listed, the LED flashes quickly . ⢠If the table on page 99 does not include your desired manufacturer or the remote control does not work, you can make the memory learn its signal by the Learn mode. ⢠The initial mode is âÂÂ000â (PIONEER). PDP-ELITE-Eng (97-105) 9/9/03, 11:47 98
13 Useful Features 99 En Manufacture codes CABLE/S A T VCR D VD/D VR 000 PIONEER1(CABLE) PIONEER PIONEER(DVD) 00 1 PIONEER2(CABLE) FISHER P ANASONIC(DVD) 00 2 JERR OLD1(CABLE) FISHER2 S AMSUNG(D VD) 00 3 JERR OLD2(CABLE) FISHER3 SONY(D VD) 004 JERROLD3(CABLE) GOLDST AR TOSHIB A(DVD) 00 5 JERR OLD4(CABLE) HIT ACHI JVC(D VD) 006 JERROLD5(CABLE) HIT ACHI2 PIONEER(D VD-RECORDER) 00 7 JERR OLD6(CABLE) HIT ACHI3 PIONEER2(DVD-RECORDER) 008 JERROLD7(CABLE) MAGNAV OX2 PIONEER3(DVD-RECORDER) 009 JERROLD8(CABLE) MITSUBISHI P ANASONIC(DVD-RECORDER) 010 JERR OLD9(CABLE) MITSUBISHI2 P ANASONIC2(DVD-RECORDER) 01 1 JERR OLD1 0(CABLE) MITSUBISHI3 P ANASONIC3(DVD-RECORDER) 012 S.A.1(CABLE) MITSUBISHI4 PHILIPS(DVD-RECORDER) 013 S.A.2(CABLE) MITSUBISHI5 SHARP(DVD-RECORDER) 014 S.A.3(CABLE) MITSUBISHI6 SHARP2(D VD-RECORDER) 015 S.A.4(CABLE) P ANASONIC TOSHIB A(D VD-RECORDER) 016 ZENITH1(CABLE) P ANASONIC2 T OSHIBA2(D VD-RECORDER) 017 ZENITH2(CABLE) P ANASONIC3 01 8 ZENITH3(CABLE) RCA 019 R CA2 020 PIONEER(S A T) RCA3 PIONEER(LD) 02 1R CA1(SA T) SANY O KENWOOD(LD) 02 2R CA2(SA T) SANY O2 P ANASONIC1(LD) 02 3S ONY(SA T) S ANY O3 P ANASONIC2(LD) 024 SHARP PHILIPS(LD) 025 SHARP2 RCA(LD) 026 SHARP3 SONY(MDP) 027 SONY(BET A) SONY(LD) 028 S ONY(VHS) 029 SONY(8mm) 03 0T OSHIBA 03 1 J V C 03 2 J VC2 03 3 J VC3 034 J VC4 035 J VC5 036 ZENITH 03 7M ITSUBISHI(J-3) 03 8S HARP(J-2) 03 9P ANASONIC(J-3) 04 0T OSHIBA(J-3) 04 1 G R ANDIENTE 04 2 AKAI 04 3P IONEER2 044 S ANY O4 04 5 MA TSUI 04 6 AIW A 04 7 ALBA8 1 04 8 B USH 04 9 THOMSON 05 0B AIRD 05 1 TELEFUNKEN 052 ALBA CABLE/S A T VCR D VD/DVR 05 3G rundig1 05 4G rundig2 05 5G rundig3 056 SONY2 057 SONY3 058 SONY4 059 R CA4 060 P H I LIPS 061 PHILIPS2 062 PHILIPS3 063 PHILIPS4 064 PHILIPS5 065 PHILIPS6 066 S AMSUNG 06 7S AMSUNG2 068 S AMSUNG3 069 S AMSUNG4 070 S AMSUNG5 071 S AMSUNG6 072 MAR ANTZ 073 MAR ANTZ2 074 G E 075 G E 2 076 G E 3 077 Y AMAHA 078 YA M A HA2 079 YA M AHA3 080 YAM A HA4 08 1 CUR TIS_MA THIS 082 CUR TIS_MA THIS2 083 CUR TIS_MA THIS3 084 F U N AI 085 A D M I R A L 086 K E NWOOD 087 KENWOOD2 088 KENWOOD3 089 N E C 090 N E C2 09 1 N E C 3 092 N E C4 093 W ARDS 094 W ARDS2 09 5W ARDS3 096 W ARDS4 097 M E MOREX 098 MEMOREX2 099 JC_PENNY 10 0 J C _PENNY2 101 J C _PENNY3 10 2 J C _PENNY4 10 3 J C _PENNY5 10 4 J C _PENNY6 PDP-ELITE-Eng (97-105) 9/9/03, 11:47 99
13 Useful Features 100 En Mode switch (with âÂÂTV â selected) Using the r emote control unit to control other devices 1 2 3 Receiver contr ol buttons When a P ioneer receiver is connected to the display , the receiver can be operated using buttons 1 to 3 . When a non-P ioneer receiver is connected to the display , the signals for 1 to 3 must first be learned before operating. See page 97. 1 RECEIVER a (ST ANDBY/ON) Tu rns the receiver power on and off . 2 RECEIVER INP UT Selects the input source connected to the receiver . 3 RECEIVER VOL /â Adjusts the receiver volume level. P ress VOL to increase the volume and VOL â to decrease it. ⢠(RECEIVER) e MUTING Allows the remote control unit to learn receiver âÂÂs mute signal. Use this button when the mode switch is set to a position other than TV . ⢠The color-highlighted buttons on the remote control can learn the control signal from another deviceâÂÂs remote control. PDP-ELITE-Eng (97-105) 9/9/03, 11:47 100
13 Useful Features 101 En 1 3 2 4 5 Cable control buttons When the Mode switch is set to CBL/SA T the cable converter connected to the display can be operated using 1 to 5 . Cable converters made by other manufacturers and not preset can also be operated using the remote control unit if 1 to 5 have learned the functions. See page 97. 1 0 â 9 Pr ess a button (or buttons) that corresponds to the channel that you want to watch. 2 CH / â Pr ess CH or CH â to tune in a higher or lower channel. 3 SOURCE a Tu rns the cable converter power on and off. 4 CH ENTER * Fi x the selected channel with the direct channel selection buttons. 5 CH RETURN * Pr ess to switch between the current channel and the channel you were watching immediately before. * Some manufacturers do not preset CH ENTER and CH RETURN . Use these buttons to learn if neces- sar y . ⢠CABLE and SA T cannot be selected at the same time. ⢠The color-highlighted buttons on the remote control can learn the control signal from another deviceâÂÂs remote control. Mode switch (with âÂÂCBL/SA Tâ selected) PDP-ELITE-Eng (97-105) 9/9/03, 11:47 101
13 Useful Features 102 En 1 6 8 7 3 4 5 2 SA T control buttons When the SA T is preset by the learning function of the remote control, the remote control unit buttons will function as shown below . ⢠When the Mode switch is set to CBL/SA T , satellite broadcast tuners made by other manufacturers and not preset can also be operated with the remote control unit if 1 to 8 have learned the functions. See page 97. 1 0 â 9 Pr ess a button (or buttons) that corresponds to the channel that you wish to watch. 2 CH /â Pr ess CH or CH â to tune in a higher or lower channel. 3 ENTER, / / / ENTER :P ress to activate the selected function. / / / :P ress the button to select items on the SA T GUIDE screen or SA T MENU screen. 4 SA T INFO When this button is pressed, information on satellite broadcasting will appear . ⢠Use this button to learn if necessar y . 5 SOURCE a Tu rns the Satellite broadcast tuner power on and off . 6 CH ENTER Fi x the selected channel with the direct channel selection buttons. ⢠Use this button to learn if necessar y . 7 SA T MENU When this button is pressed, the satellite broadcasting menu screen will appear . 8 SA T GUIDE When this button is pressed, the satellite broadcasting guide screen will appear . ⢠CABLE and SA T cannot be selected at the same time. ⢠The color-highlighted buttons shown in the figure at left can learn the control signal from another deviceâÂÂs remote control. Mode switch (with âÂÂCBL/SA Tâ selected) PDP-ELITE-Eng (97-105) 9/9/03, 11:47 102
13 Useful Features 103 En 8 7 1 4 3 2 6 5 VCR control buttons When the VCR is preset by the learning function of the remote control, the remote control unit buttons will function as follows when the Mode switch of the remote control unit is set to VCR . ⢠When the input selector button having the same number as the input terminal connecting the VCR is pressed, the VCR can be operated using 1 to 8 . ⢠VCR made by other manufacturers and not preset can also be operated using the remote control unit if 1 to 8 have learned the functions. See page 97. 1 CH / â Pr ess to select the channel of the TV tuner on the VCR. 2 I (PLAY) Selects playback. 3 S (REW) R ewinds the tape and allows picture search. 4 SOURCE a Tu rns the power of the VCR on and off . 5 F (PA USE/STILL) Sets pauses and still pictures. 6 V (FF) R apidly advances the tape and allows picture search. 7 E (REC) Starts recording. 8 H (STOP) Stop tape transport. ⢠The color-highlighted buttons on the remote control can learn the control signal from another deviceâÂÂs remote control. Mode switch (with âÂÂVCRâ selected) PDP-ELITE-Eng (97-105) 9/9/03, 11:47 103
13 Useful Features 104 En ! ~ 6 5 2 = - 0 8 9 7 3 4 1 DVD/DVR contr ol buttons When the DVD/DVR is preset by the learning function of the remote control, the remote control unit buttons will function as follows when the Mode switch of the remote control unit is set to DVD/DVR . ⢠When the input selector button having the same number as the input terminal connecting a DVD player or DVD recorder is pressed, these players can be operated using 1 to ! . ⢠DVD players or DVD recorders made by other manu- facturers and not preset can also be operated using the remote control unit if 1 to ! have learned the functions. See page 97. 1 CH / â (DVD recorder only) Pr ess to change the channel of the tuner built in the DVD recorder . 2 RETURN When the DVD menu is in display , press to restore the immediately previous screen. 3 I (PLAY) Selects playback. 4 T (CHAPTER SEARCH) Pr essing quickly once takes you to the start of the chapter currently playing. Each time you press it, you move back to the start of the previous chapter . 5 S (SCAN) Continue pressing to go backward. 6 SOURCE a Tu rns the power of the DVD player or DVD recorder on and off . 7 F (P AUSE/STILL) Sets pauses and still pictures. 8 SA T/DVD MENU (DVD, DVD recor der) When this button is pressed, the DVD menu will appear . 9 ENTER, / / / (DVD, DVD recor der) ENTER :P ress to activate the selected function. / / / :P ress the button to select items on the DVD MENU screen . 0 DVD TOP MENU (DVD, DVD recorder) When this button is pressed, the DVD top menu will appear . Mode switch (with âÂÂDVD/DVRâ selected) PDP-ELITE-Eng (97-105) 9/9/03, 11:47 104
13 Useful Features 105 En - U (CHAPTER SEARCH) Pr essing quickly once takes you to the start of the next chapter . Each time you press it, you move ahead to the start of the next chapter . = V (SCAN) Continue pressing for fast forward. ~ E (REC) Starts recording. ! H (STOP) Playback stops when pressing once. With some DVD players or DVD recorders, pressing the button twice may open the disc tray . ~ ! H (REC STOP) Pr ess and hold E , and then press this button to stop recording. This operation is true of only Pi oneer DVD recorders. ⢠The DVD player or DVD recorder cannot be selected at the same time. ⢠The color-highlighted buttons on the remote control can learn the control signal from another deviceâÂÂs remote control. PDP-ELITE-Eng (97-105) 9/9/03, 11:47 105
14 Appendix 106 En Pr oblem P ossible Solution ⢠No power . â¢G r een and r ed rectangles appear on the screen alt ernately . ⢠The sy stem cannot be oper at ed. â¢R emot e control unit doe s not oper ate. ⢠No image and audio is present ed. ⢠No picture. â¢I mages are pr esent ed but no audio is output. ⢠Sound is rev ersed bet ween the right and left. ⢠Sound is output from only a single speaker . â¢P icture is cut off. ⢠Str ange colour , light colour , dark or colour misalignment. â¢P ow er is suddenly turned off. Tr oubleshooting Code Message Check SD04 P ow ering off. Int ernal t emperatur e too high. Check if the ambient t emperatur e of the Plasma Displa y is high. Check t emper ature ar ound PDP . SD0 5 Po wering off. Int ernal protection cir cuits activa ted, Check the speaker cable connections be t ween the Plasma Displa y Is there a short in speak er cable? and the speak er s. SD1 1 P ow ering off. Internal t emperatur e too high. Check if the ambient t emper ature of the Pla sma Displa y and the Check t emper ature ar ound media receiver . Media Receiver is high. ⢠Mak e sure the Pla sma Displa y and the Media R eceiver ar e connected corr ectly . (See page 20.) â¢I s the pow er cord disconnect ed? (See page 2 7 .) â¢H as the main power been turned on? (See page 2 8.) ⢠Check if y ou pressed TV a on the remot e control unit. (See page 2 8.) If the indicat or on the syst em lights up r ed, pr ess TV a. ⢠Check if the s ystem cable ha s been disconnect ed or almost disconnect ed? (See page 2 0.) ⢠External influence s such as lightning, static electricit y , etc., ma y cause improper oper ation. In this case, oper ate the s ystem aft er first turning the pow er of the Plasma Displa y and the Media Receiv er , or unplug ging the pow er cor d and re-plugging it in after 1 or 2 min ute s. â¢I s the Mode switch set corr ectly? Slide it t o the TV set ting position. (See page 1 6.) â¢A re bat teries insert ed with polarit y ( , âÂÂ) aligned? (See page 2 2.) â¢A re bat teries w orn out? (Replace with ne w bat teries.) (See page 2 2.) ⢠Oper ate the r emote control unit while pointing it t ow ard the r emot e control sensor on the Plasma Displa y . (See page 1 7 .) â¢A re you using it under strong or fluor escent lighting? â¢I s a fluore scent light illuminat ed near the r emot e control sensor? ⢠Check if the input sour ce for video or PC has been unint entionally selected although y ou w ant to watch a TV channel. (See page 3 0.) ⢠Check if y ou have activ at ed the Par ental Contr ol function. (See page 90.) Ent er a passwor d to t empor arily cancel the P ar ental Contr ol function. (See page 9 4.) â¢I s connection t o o ther components correct? (See page s 6 5 to 7 7 .) â¢I s a non-compatible PC signal being input? (See page 1 0 7 .) ⢠Is picture adjustment corr ect? (See pages 4 7 to 5 3.) ⢠Check if y ou have select ed the minimum volume. (See page 3 1.) ⢠Check if y ou have m uted sound. (See page 3 1.) ⢠When using a video or PC input sour ce, check that the audio terminal is also in connection. (See pages 6 5 to 7 0 and 7 7 .) ⢠Check if the speak er cable connections have been r ev er sed bet ween the right and left or if the speaker cable fr om either speak er has been disconnect ed. (See pages 1 3 and 2 0.) â¢H as the balance been correctly adjusted? (See page 5 3.) â¢I s the image position corr ect? (See pages 8 1and 8 2.) ⢠Has the correct scr een size been select ed? (See page 8 3.) â¢A djust the picture tone. (See page s 4 7 to 5 3.) ⢠Is the room t oo bright? The picture ma y look dark in a room tha t is t oo bright. â¢I s the sleep timer set? (See page 8 5.) ⢠Check the pow er control set ting. (See pages 5 5 and 5 6.) ⢠The s ystemâ s internal temper ature ha s increased. R emove an y objects blocking vent or clean. (See pages 1 8 t o 1 9.) PDP-ELITE-Eng (106-111) 9/9/03, 11:43 106
14 Appendix 107 En Computer compatibility chart Re solution Fr equency R emarks 720 ÃÂ 4 00 7 0 Hz 640 ÃÂ 48 0 6 0 Hz 65 Hz Macint osh 1 3" (6 7 Hz) 72 H z 75 H z 8 00 ÃÂ 600 5 6 Hz 60 H z 72 H z 75 H z 832 ÃÂ 6 2 4 7 4.5 Hz Macint osh 1 6" 10 2 4 ÃÂ 7 68 6 0 Hz 70 H z 75 Hz Macint osh 1 9" 12 8 0 ÃÂ 7 6 8 5 6 Hz 60 H z 70 H z PDP-ELITE-Eng (106-111) 9/9/03, 11:43 107
14 Appendix 108 En Specifications It em 50"Pla sma Display , Model: PRO-5 04PU 43" Plasma Displa y , Model: PRO-4 3 4PU Number of Pixels 1 2 8 0 à7 68 pix els 1 0 2 4 à7 6 8 pix els Audio Amplifier 1 3 W 1 3 W (1 kHz, 1 0 %, 8 ⦠)1 3 W 1 3 W (1 kHz, 1 0 %, 8 ⦠) Surr ound Sy stem SRS/F OCUS/T ruBass SRS/FOCUS/T ruBass Po w er Requir ement 1 2 0 V AC, 6 0 Hz, 3 6 3 W (0.3 W Standb y) 1 20 V A C, 60 Hz, 2 98 W (0.3 W St andby) Dimensions 1 2 7 0 (W) à7 3 7 (H) à9 8 (D) mm 1 1 20 (W) à6 5 2 (H) à98 (D) mm (5 0 (W) à2 9 (H) à3 7 /8 (D) inches) (44 1 /8 (W) à25 11 /1 6 (H) à3 7 /8 (D) inches) W eight 3 8 kg (8 3.8 lbs.) 3 0.5 kg (6 7 .3 lbs.) It em Media R eceiver , Model: PRO-R04U R ecep tion Sy stem (Digital) A TSC Digital TV s yst em Cir cuit type 8VSB demodulation T uner VHF/UHF VHF 2âÂÂ1 3ch, UHF 1 4âÂÂ6 9ch CA TV 2âÂÂ1 2 5ch (Standar d Channel Plan, 8VSB only) Audio format Dolb y Digital R ecep tion Sy stem (Analog) American TV standard NTSC s yst em Cir cuit type Video signal de tection PLL full s ynchronous det ection, PLL digital s ynthesizer syst em T uner VHF/UHF VHF 2âÂÂ1 3ch, UHF 1 4âÂÂ6 9ch CA TV 1âÂÂ1 2 5ch Audio multiple x BTSC sy stem T erminals Rear DTV Ant enna 7 5 ⦠UNBAL, F T ype for D TV in Antenna A 7 5 ⦠UNBAL, F T ype for VHF/UHF/CA TV in Loop out Antenna B 7 5 ⦠UNBAL, F T ype for VHF/UHF/CA TV in Loop out i.LINK (TS) S4 00 (2) INPUT 1 COMPONENT VIDEO in, S- VIDEO in, VIDEO in, AUDIO in INPUT 2 S- VIDEO in, VIDEO in, AUDIO in INPUT 3 COMPONENT VIDEO in, A UDIO in Monitor Out S- VIDEO out, VIDEO out, A UDIO out Digital Audio Output Optical (1) VCR Control Output 1 CONTR OL IN 1 CONTR OL OUT 1 Fr ont INPUT 4 COMPONENT VIDEO in, S- VIDEO in, VIDEO in, AUDIO in, PC Analog R GB in, AUDIO in OSD English/Fr ench/Spanish Po w er Requir ement 1 2 0 V A C, 60 Hz, 4 4.5 W (0.3 W Standb y) Dimensions 4 2 0 (W) à90 (H) à29 7 (D) mm (1 6 9 /1 6 (W) à3 9 /1 6 (H) à11 11 /1 6 (D) inches) W eight 5.7 kg (1 2.2 lbs.) â¢D esign and specifications are subject to change without notice. PDP-ELITE-Eng (106-111) 9/9/03, 13:16 108
14 Appendix 109 En T rademarks ⢠SRS and the R symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. SRS technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. ⢠FOCUS and the R symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. FOCUS technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. ⢠is a trademark of SRS Labs, Inc. WOW technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. ⢠DOLBY DIGIT AL Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. âÂÂDolbyâ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. ⢠This product includes FontAvenue î fonts licensed by NEC Corporation. F ontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation. ⢠The i.LINK logo and i.LINK are registered trademarks of Sony Corporation. â¢D - VHS is a registered trademark of Victor Company of Japan, Limited. ⢠Apple and Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Computer , Inc. â¢M icrosoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. ⢠DDC is a registered trademark of Video Electronics Standards Association . â¢P ower Management is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. ⢠VGA and XGA are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Co., Inc. ⢠The names of the companies or institutions are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective companies or institutions. Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2003 Pioneer Corporation. All rights reserved. PDP-ELITE-Eng (106-111) 9/9/03, 11:43 109
PDP-ELITE-Eng (106-111) 9/9/03, 11:43 110
PDP-ELITE-Eng (106-111) 9/9/03, 11:43 111
Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2003 Pioneer Corporation. All rights reserved. <03I00001> Printed in Japan <ARB1556-A> PIONEER CORPORA TION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, T okyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS [USA] INC. P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: [03] 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. Blvd. Manuel Avila Camacho 138, 10 piso Col. Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000 TEL: 52-55-9178-4270 FAX: 52-55-5202-3714 PDP-ELITE-Eng (Back) 9/9/03, 11:47 1
About HDMI Quelques mots sur HDMI Acerca de HDMI PDP5040HD-UC (HDMI) 8/22/03, 10:48 1
2 En IN SERVICE ONLY MONITOR OUT DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL INPUT 1 COMPONENT VIDEO S400 DTV-ANTENNA IN INPUT 3 INPUT 1 INPUT 3 VCR CONTROL A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN IN OUT CONTROL OUT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y HDMI AC INLET BLACK WHITE SYSTEM CABLE R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO INPUT 2 (TS) HDMI equipment Media Receiver (r ear view) Audio cable (commercially available) Make this connection when inputting analog audio signals. HDMI cable (commercially available) Connecting HDMI equipment For the handling pr ocedures and the other functions, r efer to the dedicated operation manual. Input signal correlation t able 1 920 â 10 8 0 i @ 5 9 .94/6 0Hz 720 â 480 p @ 59 .94/6 0Hz 12 8 0 â 72 0p@5 9.94/6 0Hz 72 0(1 4 40) â 48 0i@5 9.94/6 0Hz ⢠PC signals are out of correspondence. Using HDMI Input The INPUT 1 and INPUT 3 terminals include HDMI terminals to which digital video and audio signals can be input. T o use the HDMI terminal, activate the termi- nal and specify the types of video and audio signals to be received from the connected equipment. F or the types of these signals, see the operation manual that came with the connected equipment. Before starting the menu, press INPUT 1 (or INPUT 3 ) on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select INPUT 1 (or INPUT 3). To activate the HDMI terminal: 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂOptionâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂHDMI InputâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSettingâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select âÂÂEnableâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . Setting Disable Enable Item Description Disable Deactivat es the HDMI t erminal. (fac t ory default) Enable A ctiva te s the HDMI terminal. 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. PDP5040HD-UC (HDMI) 8/22/03, 10:48 2
English 3 En To specif y the type of digital video signals: 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂOptionâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂHDMI InputâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂVideoâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select the type of digital video signals, and then press ENTER . Setting Auto Color-1 Color-2 Color-3 ⢠If you select â AutoâÂÂ, an attempt will be made to identify the type of digital video signals when digital video signals are received. Item Description Aut o Automa tically identifies input digital video (fac t ory default) signals. Color -1 Digital Component V ideo signals (4:2:2) lock ed Color -2 Digital Component V ideo signals (4:4:4) lock ed Color -3 Digital R GB signals locked 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠If you select a parameter other than â AutoâÂÂ, make such a setting that results in natural color . ⢠If no image appears, specify another digital video signal type. â¢F or the digital video signal types to be specified, check the operation manual that came with the connected equipment. To specif y the type of audio signals: 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂOption âÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂHDMI InputâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select â AudioâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select the type of audio signals, and then press ENTER . Setting Auto Digital Analog ⢠If you select â AutoâÂÂ, an attempt will be made to identify the type of audio signals when audio signals are received. Item Description Aut o Automa tically identifies input audio (fac t ory default) signals. Digital A ccept s digital audio signals. Analog A ccepts analog audio signals. 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠If no sound is output, specify another audio signal type. â¢F or the audio signal types to be specified, check the operation manual that came with the connected equipment. ⢠Depending on the equipment to be connected, you also need to connect analog audio cables. ⢠HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Inter face are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. PDP5040HD-UC (HDMI) 8/22/03, 10:48 3
4 Fr IN SERVICE ONLY MONITOR OUT DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL INPUT 1 COMPONENT VIDEO S400 DTV-ANTENNA IN INPUT 3 INPUT 1 INPUT 3 VCR CONTROL A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN IN OUT CONTROL OUT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y HDMI AC INLET BLACK WHITE SYSTEM CABLE R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO INPUT 2 (TS) Appareil HDMI Récepteur Média (vue de dos) Câble audio (disponible dans le commerce) Effectuez ce raccordement si les signaux dâÂÂentrée audio sont analogiques. Câble HDMI (disponible dans le commerce) Ra ccordement dâÂÂun appar eil HDMI Pour tout ce qui concerne le mode opératoire et les autr es fonctions, reportez- vous au mode dâÂÂemploi spécifique. T ableau de corrélation de s signaux dâÂÂentrée 1 920 â 10 8 0 i @ 5 9 ,94/6 0Hz 720 â 480 p @ 59 ,94/6 0Hz 12 8 0 â 72 0p@5 9,94/6 0Hz 72 0(1 4 40) â 48 0i@5 9,94/6 0Hz ⢠Les signaux PC ne sont pas en correspondance. Utilisation de lâÂÂentrée HDMI Les prises INPUT 1 et INPUT 3 assurent les liaisons HDMI et peuvent recevoir des signaux dâÂÂentrée audio et vidéo. P our utiliser la prise HDMI, mettez cette prise en service et précisez le type des signaux audio et vidéo en provenance de lâÂÂappareil relié. P our de plus amples détails concernant les signaux, reportez-vous au mode dâÂÂemploi qui accompagne lâÂÂappareil relié. Avant dâÂÂouvrir le menu, appuyez sur INPUT 1 , (ou INPUT 3 ), sur le boîtier de télécommande, ou bien appuyez sur INPUT, sur lâÂÂécran àplasma, pour sélectionner INPUT 1 (ou INPUT 3). P our mettre en service la prise HDMI: 1 Appuyez sur HOME MENU . 2 Utilisez / pour sélectionner âÂÂOptionsâ puis appuyez sur ENTER . 3 Utilisez / pour sélectionner âÂÂEntrée HDMIâ puis appuyez sur ENTER . 4 Utilisez / pour sélectionner âÂÂRéglageâ puis appuyez sur ENTER . 5 Utilisez / pour sélectionner â Activer â puis appuyez sur ENTER . Réglage Désactiver Activer Par amètre Description Désactiver La prise HDMI nâÂÂest pa s active. (valeur par défaut) Activer La prise HDMI est activ e. 6 Appuyez sur HOME MENU pour quitter le menu. PDP5040HD-UC (HDMI) 8/22/03, 10:48 4
5 Fr F rançais P our préciser le type des signaux vidéo numériques: 1 Appuyez sur HOME MENU . 2 Utilisez / pour sélectionner âÂÂOptionsâ puis appuyez sur ENTER . 3 Utilisez / pour sélectionner âÂÂEntrée HDMIâ puis appuyez sur ENTER . 4 Utilisez / pour sélectionner â Vidéoâ puis appuyez sur ENTER . 5 Utilisez / pour sélectionner le type des signaux vidéo puis appuyez sur ENTER . Réglage Auto Couleur-1 Couleur-2 Couleur-3 â¢S i vous sélectionnez â AutoâÂÂ, lâÂÂappareil tente dâÂÂidentifier les signaux vidéonumériques lorsquâÂÂils sont reçus. Pa ra mètre Description Aut o Le signal dâÂÂentrée vidéonumérique est (valeur par défaut) aut omatiquement identifié. Couleur -1 Signaux des composant es vidéo n umérique s (4:2:2) verr ouillés Couleur2 Signaux des composant es vidéo n umérique s (4:4:4) verr ouillés Couleur -3 Signaux R VB numérique s verr ouillés 6 Appuyez sur HOME MENU pour quitter le menu. â¢S i vous sélectionnez une valeur autre que â AutoâÂÂ, effectuez le réglage de manière que les couleurs soient naturelles. â¢S i aucune image nâÂÂapparaît, choisissez un autre type de signal vidéonumérique. â¢P our de plus amples détails concernant les types de signal vidéonumérique, reportez-vous au mode dâÂÂemploi qui accompagne lâÂÂappareil relié. P our préciser le type des signaux audionumériques: 1 Appuyez sur HOME MENU . 2 Utilisez / pour sélectionner âÂÂOptionsâ puis appuyez sur ENTER . 3 Utilisez / pour sélectionner âÂÂEntrée HDMIâ puis appuyez sur ENTER . 4 Utilisez / pour sélectionner â Audioâ puis appuyez sur ENTER . 5 Utilisez / pour sélectionner le type des signaux audio puis appuyez sur ENTER . Réglage Auto Numérique Analogique â¢S i vous sélectionnez â AutoâÂÂ, lâÂÂappareil tente dâÂÂidentifier les signaux audio lorsquâÂÂils sont reçus. Pa ra mètre Description Aut o Le t ype des signaux dâÂÂentr ée audio est (valeur par défaut) aut omatiquement identifié. Numérique Les signaux audionumérique s sont accept és. Analogique Les signaux audio analogiques sont accept és. 6 Appuyez sur HOME MENU pour quitter le menu. â¢S i aucun son nâÂÂest produit, sélectionner un autre type pour les signaux audio . â¢P our de plus amples détails concernant les types de signal audio, reportez-vous au mode dâÂÂemploi qui accompagne lâÂÂappareil relié. ⢠Selon lâÂÂappareil relié, il vous faut également des câbles pour les signaux audio analogiques. ⢠HDMI, le logo HDMI et High-Definition Multime- dia Interface sont des marques de fabrique ou des marques déposées de HDMI licensing LLC. PDP5040HD-UC (HDMI) 8/22/03, 10:48 5
6 Sp IN SERVICE ONLY MONITOR OUT DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL INPUT 1 COMPONENT VIDEO S400 DTV-ANTENNA IN INPUT 3 INPUT 1 INPUT 3 VCR CONTROL A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN IN OUT CONTROL OUT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y HDMI AC INLET BLACK WHITE SYSTEM CABLE R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO INPUT 2 (TS) Equipo HMDI Media Receiver (vista trasera) Cable de audio (disponible comercialmente) Haga esta conexión al introducir señales de audio analógicas. Cable HDMI (disponible comercialmente) Cone xión de un equipo HDMI Para los pr ocedimientos de manoseo y otras funciones, consulte el manual de instrucciones dedicado. T abla de correlación de las señale s de entrada 1 920 â 10 8 0 i @ 5 9 ,94/6 0Hz 720 â 480 p @ 59 ,94/6 0Hz 12 8 0 â 72 0p@5 9,94/6 0Hz 72 0(1 4 40) â 48 0i@5 9,94/6 0Hz ⢠Las señales de PC están fuera de correspondencia. Utilización de la entrada HDMI Los terminales INPUT 1 e INPUT 3 incluyen terminales HDMI a los cuales pueden introducirse señales digitales de audio y vÃÂdeo . P ara utilizar el terminal HDMI, active el terminal y especifique los tipos de señales de audio y vÃÂdeo que se van recibir desde el equipo conectado. P ara el tipos de señales, consulte el manual de instrucciones que acompaña el equipo conectado. Antes de iniciar el menú, pulse INPUT 1 (o INPUT 3 ) del mando a distancia o pulse INPUT de la pantalla de plasma para seleccionar INPUT 1 (o INPUT 3). P ara activar el terminal HDMI: 1 Pu l se HOME MENU . 2 Pu l se / para seleccionar âÂÂOpciónâ y , a continuación, pulse ENTER . 3 Pu l se / para seleccionar âÂÂEntrada HDMIâ y , a continuación, pulse ENTER . 4 Pu l se / para seleccionar âÂÂV alor â y , a continuación, pulse ENTER . 5 Pu l se / para seleccionar â Activar â y , a continuación, pulse ENTER . V alor Desactivar Activar ÃÂtem Descripción Desactivar Desactiva el t erminal HDMI. (valor pr edet erminado) Activar A ctiv a el t erminal HDMI. 6 Pul se HOME MENU para salir del menú. PDP5040HD-UC (HDMI) 8/22/03, 10:48 6
7 Sp Español P ara especificar el tipo de señales de vÃÂdeo digitales: 1 Pul se HOME MENU . 2 Pul se / para seleccionar âÂÂOpciónâ y , a continuación, pulse ENTER . 3 Pul se / para seleccionar âÂÂEntrada HDMIâ y , a continuación, pulse ENTER . 4 Pul se / para seleccionar â VÃÂdeoâ y , a continuación, pulse ENTER . 5 Pul se / para seleccionar el tipo de señales de vÃÂdeo digitales y , a continuación, pulse ENTER . V alor Auto Color-1 Color-2 Color-3 â¢S i se selecciona â AutoâÂÂ, se hará un intento para identificar el tipo de señales de vÃÂdeo digitales cuando se reciben las señales de vÃÂdeo digitales. ÃÂtem Descripción Aut o Identifica automáticament e la s (valor pr edet erminado) señales de vÃÂdeo digitale s. Color -1 Señale s de vÃÂdeo component e digitale s (4:2:2) bloqueadas Color -2 Señale s de vÃÂdeo component e digitale s (4:4:4) bloqueadas Color -3 Señale s R GB digitales bloqueadas 6 Pul se HOME MENU para salir del menú. â¢S i selecciona un parámetro diferente de â AutoâÂÂ, haga un ajuste que produzca un color natural. â¢S i no aparece ninguna imagen, especifique otro tipo de señal de vÃÂdeo digital. â¢P ara el tipo de señales de vÃÂdeo digitales que se debe especificar , consulte el manual de instrucciones que acompaña el equipo conectado. P ara especificar el tipo de señales de audio: 1 Pul se HOME MENU . 2 Pul se / para seleccionar âÂÂOpciónâ y , a continuación, pulse ENTER . 3 Pul se / para seleccionar âÂÂEntrada HDMIâ y , a continuación, pulse ENTER . 4 Pul se / para seleccionar â Audioâ y , a continuación, pulse ENTER . 5 Pul se / para seleccionar el tipo de señales de audio y , a continuación, pulse ENTER . V alor Auto Digital Analógico â¢S i se selecciona â AutoâÂÂ, se hará un intento para identificar el tipo de señales de audio cuando se reciben las señales de audio . ÃÂtem Descripción Aut o Identifica automáticament e las (valor pr edet erminado) señales de audio intr oducidas. Digital A cepta la s señales de audio digit ales. Analógico A cept a las señale s de audio analógicas. 6 Pul se HOME MENU para salir del menú. â¢S i no se genera ningún sonido , especifique otro tipo de señales de audio. â¢P ara el tipo de señales de audio que se debe especificar , consulte el manual de instrucciones que acompaña el equipo conectado . ⢠Dependiendo del equipo que se va conectar , también necesita conectar cables de audio analógicos. ⢠HDMI, el logotipo de HDMI, y la interfaz High- Definition Multimedia Interface son marcas comerciales o marcas comerciales registradas de HDMI licensing LLC. PDP5040HD-UC (HDMI) 8/22/03, 10:48 7
PIONEER CORPORA TION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, T okyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS [USA] INC. P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: [03] 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. Blvd. Manuel Avila Camacho 138, 10 piso Col. Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000 TEL: 52-55-9178-4270 FAX: 52-55-5202-3714 Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2003 Pioneer Corporation. All rights reserved. <03H00001> Printed in Japan / Imprimé au Japon < ARE1373-A > PDP5040HD-UC (HDMI) 8/22/03, 10:48 8
Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water . Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturerâ s instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other . A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer . Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer , or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over . Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way , such as power -supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally , or has been dropped. 11) 12) 13) 14) Note to CA TV system installer . This reminder is pr ovided to call the CA TV system installerâ s attention to Ar ticle 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper gr ounding and, in particular , specifies that the cable groundâÂÂshall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. A VERTISSEMENT : CET APP AREIL NâÂÂEST P AS ÃÂT ANCHE. POUR ÃÂVITER TOUT RISQUE DâÂÂINCENDIE OU TOUTE SECOUSSE ÃÂLECTRIQUE, NE L âÂÂEXPOSEZ P AS àL A PL UIE NI àL âÂÂHUMIDITÃÂ, NE LE PLACEZ P AS àPROXIMITàDâÂÂUN POINT DâÂÂEA U NI DâÂÂUN V ASE, DâÂÂUN FLACON DE COSMÃÂTIQUE OU DE MÃÂDICAMENT , ETC. W ARNING: THE APP ARA TUS IS NOT W A TER- PROOFS, TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOIS- TURE AND DO NOT PUT ANY W A TER SOURCE NEAR THIS APP ARA TUS, SUCH AS VASE, FL OWER POT , COSMETICS CONT AINER AND MEDICINE BOT TLE ETC. PDP-ELITE-Eng (02-03) 9/9/03, 16:32 2
CAUTION: This product satisfies FCC regulations when shielded cables and connectors are used to connect the unit to other equipment. T o prevent electromagnetic inter fer- ence with electric appliances such as radios and televi- sions, use shielded cables and connectors for connec- tions. FEDERAL COMMUNICA TIONS COMMISSION DECLARA TION OF CONFORMITY This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Op- eration is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including inter ference that may cause undesired op- eration. Pr oduct Name: Plasma Display System (Plasma Display) (Media Receiver) Model Number: PRO -1110HD PRO-910HD (PRO-504PU) (PRO-434PU) (PRO-R04U) (PRO-R04U) Pr oduct Categor y: Class B P ersonal Computers & Pe- ripherals Re sponsible P arty Name: PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA), INC., Customer Support Div . Address: P .O. BO X 1760, L ONG BEACH , CA., 90801-1760 U.S.A. Phone: (800) 421-1625 Fo r Business Customer URL http://www .PioneerUSA.com IMPORT ANT NOTICE: The serial number for this equipment is located on the rear panel. Please write this serial number on your enclosed warranty card and keep it in a secure area. This is for your security . WARNING: Handling the cord on this product or cords associated with accessories sold with the prod- uct will expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of California and other governmental entities to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. W ash hands after handling . NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pur - suant to P art 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio fre- quency energy and, if not installed and used in accor - dance with the instructions, may cause harmful inter - ference to radio communications. However , there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a par- ticular installation. If this equipment does cause harm- ful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the inter- ference by one or more of the following measures: â Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. â Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver . â Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. â Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV tech- nician for help. Information to User Alteration or modifications carried out without appro- priate authorization may invalidate the user âÂÂs right to operate the equipment. [For Canadian model] This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. [P our le modèle destiné au Canada] Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme àla norme canadienne ICES-003. DO NOT PLACE THIS PRODUCT ON AN UNST ABLE CART , ST AND, TRIPOD, BRACKET , OR T ABLE. THE PRODUCT MAY F ALL, CAUSING SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND SERIOUS DAMAGE TO THE PRODUCT . USE ONL Y WITH A CART , STAND, TRIPOD, BRACKET , OR T ABLE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER , OR SOLD WITH THE PRODUCT . FOLLOW THE MANUF ACTUREâÂÂS INSTRUCTIONS WHEN INST ALLING THE PRODUCT AND USE MOUNTING ACCESSORIES RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUF ACTURER. A PRODUCT AND CART COMBINA TION SHOULD BE MOVED WITH THE CARE. QUICK STOPS, EXCESSIVE FORCE, AND UNEVEN SURF ACES MA Y CAUSE THE PRODUCT AND CART COMBINA TION TO OVERTURN. NE DÃÂPOSEZ P AS L âÂÂAPP AREIL SUR UNE T ABLE, UN CHARIOT , UN SUPPORT , UN TRÃÂPIED, UNE CONSOLE INST ABLES. CET APP AREIL POURRAIT TOMBER, PROVOQUANT DES BLESSURES GRA VES OU DES DOMMAGES PHYSIQUES IMPORT ANTS. UTILISEZ UNIQUEMENT UN CHARIOT , UN SUPPORT , UN TRÃÂPIED, UNE CONSOLE OU UNE T ABLE CONSEILLÃÂS P AR LE FABRICANT OU VENDUS A VEC L âÂÂAPP AREIL. RESPECTEZ LES INSTRUCTIONS DU F ABRICANT POUR TOUT CE QUI CONCERNE L âÂÂINST ALLA TION DE Lâ APP AREIL ET L âÂÂEMPL OI DES ACCESSOIRES DE MONT AGE QUâÂÂIL CONSEILLE. Lâ ENSEMBLE QUE FORME UN APP AREIL ET LE CHARIOT àL âÂÂAIDE DUQUEL ON LE DÃÂPLACE, DOIT ÃÂTRE MANà ÂUVRàAVEC PRÃÂCA UTION. LES ARRÃÂTS BRUSQUES, LES POUSSÃÂES EXCESSIVES ET LES IRRÃÂGULARITÃÂS DU PL ANCHER , PEUVENT PROVOQUER LE BASCULEMENT DU CHARIOT ET LA CHUTE DE L âÂÂAPP AREIL. PDP-ELITE-Eng (02-03) 9/9/03, 16:32 3
Contents 4 En 01 Important User Guidance Information 02 Safety Precautions 03 Operational Precautions 04 Features 05 Supplied Accessories Plasma Display ................................................................... 12 Media Receiver .................................................................... 12 06 Part Names Plasma Display ................................................................... 13 Media Receiver .................................................................... 14 Remote control unit ............................................................ 16 07 Preparation Allowed operation range of the remote control unit ....... 17 Installing the Plasma Display ............................................ 17 Installing the Media receiver ............................................. 18 Installing the Media R eceiver vertically ...................... 19 Setting the system .............................................................. 20 R outing cables .................................................................... 21 Using the remote control unit ........................................... 22 Cautions regarding the remote control unit .............. 22 Inserting batteries ......................................................... 22 Cautions regarding batteries ....................................... 23 Cable connections for watching conventional TV channels .............................................................................. 24 Connecting a VHF/UHF antenna ................................. 24 Connecting a Cable Converter .................................... 24 Connecting a VHF/UHF antenna and Cable Converter ....................................................................... 25 Switching between tuner A and B .............................. 25 Cable connections for watching digital TV channels ...... 26 Connecting a VHF/UHF antenna ................................. 26 Connecting for cable TV ............................................... 26 Connecting the power cord ............................................... 27 08 Basic Operations T urning on the power .......................................................... 28 T urning off the power .......................................................... 29 Wa tching conventional TV channels ................................. 30 Selecting the antenna .................................................. 30 Changing channels ...................................................... 30 Changing the volume and sound ................................ 31 Setting MTS/SAP mode ............................................... 32 Wa tching digital TV channels ............................................ 34 Selecting the digital TV input ....................................... 34 Changing channels ...................................................... 34 Changing the volume and sound ................................ 35 Changing the language ................................................ 35 Vi ewing DTV banners ................................................... 36 Using the multiscreen functions ....................................... 36 Splitting the screen ...................................................... 36 F reezing images ............................................................ 37 09 Basic Adjustment Settings Using the menu .................................................................. 38 AV mode menus ............................................................ 38 PC mode menus ........................................................... 39 Menu operation keys .................................................... 40 Setting up conventional TV channels ............................... 41 Using Auto Channel P reset ......................................... 41 Setting for skipping unwanted channels .................... 42 Setting your favorite channels ..................................... 43 Setting up digital TV channels ........................................... 44 Using Auto Channel P reset ......................................... 44 Setting for skipping unwanted channels .................... 45 Checking signal strength ............................................. 45 Language setting ................................................................ 46 Clock setting ........................................................................ 46 AV Selection ........................................................................ 47 Pi cture adjustments ........................................................... 48 PureCinema .................................................................. 49 Color temperature ........................................................ 50 MPEG NR ....................................................................... 51 DNR ............................................................................... 51 CTI .................................................................................. 52 DRE ................................................................................ 52 Color Management ....................................................... 53 Sound adjustments ............................................................ 53 FOCUS ........................................................................... 54 F ront Surround .............................................................. 54 P ower Control ...................................................................... 55 P ower Control for AV source ........................................ 55 P ower Control for PC source ....................................... 56 10 Electr onic Program Guide (EPG) (for DTV Only) EPG display format ............................................................. 57 Using the EPG ..................................................................... 58 P resetting TV programs using the EPG ............................ 59 Using auto channel select ........................................... 59 Recording TV programs using a D- VHS recorder ...... 60 Recording TV programs via a VCR controller ............. 61 Setting the timer manually ................................................ 62 Pr iority rules for overlapped presettings ........................... 63 Changing/ canceling TV program presettings ................. 64 Using the EPG ............................................................... 64 Using the menu ............................................................ 64 Thank you for buying this P ioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly . After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference. In some countries or regions, the shape of the power plug and power outlet may sometimes differ from that shown in the explanatory drawings. However the method of connecting and operating the unit is the same. PDP-ELITE-Eng (04-05) 9/9/03, 11:43 4
Contents 5 En 11 Enjoying through External Equipment W atching a DVD image ...................................................... 65 Connecting a DVD player ............................................. 65 Displaying a DVD image .............................................. 65 W atching a VCR image ...................................................... 66 Connecting a VCR ........................................................ 66 Displaying a VCR image ............................................... 66 Enjoying a game console or watching camcorder images .............................................................. 67 Connecting a game console or camcorder ................ 67 Displaying an image of the game console or camcorder ..................................................................... 67 Recording digital TV programs using a VCR or DVD recorder ............................................................................... 68 Connecting a recorder ................................................. 68 Connecting other audio equipment .................................. 69 Connecting an AV receiver .......................................... 69 Switching the optical audio signal type ...................... 69 W atching a D-VHS image ................................................... 70 What is i.LINK? .............................................................. 70 Which i.LINK devices are connectable? ..................... 70 What can be recorded through i.LINK? ...................... 70 Connecting D-VHS recorders ...................................... 70 Displaying a D - VHS image ........................................... 72 Useful and important notification ............................... 72 Setting up for controlling a D - VHS recorder .............. 73 Operating the control panel screen ............................ 74 Editing the i.LINK list .................................................... 74 Setting up for i.LINK standby ....................................... 76 W atching an image from a personal computer ............... 77 Connecting a personal computer ............................... 77 Displaying an image from a personal computer ....... 77 Connecting a VCR controller ............................................. 78 The lists of controllable recording equipment manufactures ............................................ 79 Connecting control cords .................................................. 80 About SR .................................................................... 80 12 Useful Adjustment Settings Adjusting image positions (AV mode only) ...................... 81 Adjusting image positions and clock automatically (PC mode only) .................................................................... 81 Adjusting image positions and clock manually (PC mode only) .................................................................... 82 Selecting a screen size ....................................................... 83 Changing the brightness at both sides of the screen (Side Mask) .......................................................................... 84 Sleep Timer .......................................................................... 85 Closed caption for conventional TV channels .................. 86 Activating the closed caption ...................................... 86 Selecting the type of closed captions ......................... 86 Closed caption for digital TV channels ............................. 87 Activating the closed caption ...................................... 87 Selecting the type of conventional closed captions (for digital TV channels) ............................................... 87 Selecting digital closed captions ................................ 88 Selecting digital closed caption parameters ............. 88 P arental Control (setting the V - CHIP level) ....................... 90 Activating the P arental Control ................................... 90 Setting the voluntary moving rating system (MP AA) ............................................................. 91 Blocking Not Rated (NR) TV programs ....................... 91 Setting the TV P arental Guidelines (TV Guidelines) ... 92 Canadian rating systems ............................................. 92 Setting Canadian English ratings ............................... 93 Setting Canadian F rench ratings ................................ 93 T emporarily deactivating the V -CHIP Block ................ 94 R eactivating the V - CHIP Block .................................... 94 P rogramming a password (A V mode only) ....................... 95 Setting and changing the password ........................... 95 Resetting the password ............................................... 96 13 Useful Features Learning function of the remote control unit ................... 97 Using the learning function ......................................... 97 P resetting manufacture codes .................................... 98 Manufacture codes ...................................................... 99 Using the remote control unit to control other devices ..................................................................... 100 R eceiver control buttons ............................................ 100 Cable control buttons ................................................. 101 SA T control buttons .................................................... 102 VCR control buttons ................................................... 103 DVD/DVR control buttons .......................................... 104 14 Appendix Tr oubleshooting ................................................................ 106 Computer compatibility chart .......................................... 107 Specifications .................................................................... 108 PDP-ELITE-Eng (04-05) 9/9/03, 11:43 5
01 Important User Guidance Information 6 En In order to obtain maximum enjoyment from this Pi oneer PureVision PRO-1110HD/PRO-910HD Plasma Display System, please first read this information carefully . W ith the P ioneer PureV ision PRO-1110HD/PRO-910HD, you can be assured of a high quality Plasma Display System with long-life and high reliability . T o achieve images of exceptional quality , this Pioneer Plasma Display System incorporates state-of-the-art design and construction, as well as very precise and highly advanced technology . Over the course of its lifetime, the luminosity of the Pi oneer PRO -1110HD/PRO-910HD Plasma Display System will diminish ver y slowly , such as with all phosphor-based screens (for example, a traditional tube-type television). T o enjoy beautiful and bright images on your P ioneer Plasma Display System for many years to come, please carefully read and follow the usage guidelines below . Usage guidelines All phosphor-based screens (including conventional tube-type televisions) can be affected by displaying static images for a prolonged period. Plasma Display Systems are no exception to this rule. After-image and permanent effects on the screen can be avoided by taking some basic precautions. By following the recom- mendations listed below , you can ensure longer and satisfactor y results from your plasma: ⢠Whenever possible, avoid frequently displaying the same image or virtually still moving pictures (e.g. closed-captioned images or video game images which have static portions). ⢠Avoid viewing the On Screen Display for extended periods, from a DVD player , VCR, and all other components. ⢠Do not leave the same picture freeze-framed or paused continuously over a long period of time, when using the still picture mode from a TV , VCR , DVD player or any other component. â¢I mages which have both ver y bright areas and ver y dark areas side by side should not be displayed for a prolonged period of time. ⢠When playing a game, the âÂÂGAMEâ mode setting within â AV Selection â is strongly recommended. However , please limit its use to less than 2 hours at a time. â¢A ft er playing a game, or displaying a PC image or any still image, it is best to view a normal moving picture in the âÂÂWIDEâ or âÂÂFULL â screen setting for over 3 times longer than the previous still/moving image. â¢A ft er using the Plasma Display System, always switch the display to âÂÂST ANDBYâ mode. Installation guidelines The P ioneer P ureV ision PRO-1110HD/PRO -910HD Plasma Display System incorporates a very thin design. To ensure safety , please take the proper measures to mount or install the Plasma Display , in order to prevent the unit from tipping over in the event of vibration or accidental movement. This product should be installed by using only parts and accessories designed by PIONEER . Use of accessories other than the PIONEER stand or installation bracket may result in instability , and could cause injury. F or custom installation, please consult the dealer where the unit was purchased. T o ensure correct installation, experienced and qualified experts must install the unit. PIONEER will not be held responsible for accident or damage caused by the use of parts and accessories manufactured by other companies. To avoid malfunction and overheating when installing, make sure that the vents on the main unit are not blocked. T o ensure proper heat emission: â¢D istance the unit slightly from other equipment, walls, etc. F or the minimum space required around the unit, see pages 17 and 18. ⢠Do not fit the unit inside narrow spaces where ventilation is poor . ⢠Do not cover with a cloth, etc. â¢C lean the vents on the sides and rear of the unit to remove dust build-up by using a vacuum cleaner set to its lowest suction setting. ⢠Do not place the product on a carpet or blanket. ⢠Do not leave the product tilted over except the case of vertical installation of the Media Receiver . ⢠Do not reverse the product. Using the unit without proper ventilation may cause the internal temperature to rise, and could result in possible malfunction . When the surrounding or internal temperature exceeds a certain degree, the display will automatically power off in order to cool the internal electronics and prevent a hazardous occurrence. Malfunction can be caused by many factors: inappropriate installation site, improper assembly/ installation/mounting, improper operation of or modifications made to this product. However , PIONEER cannot be held responsible for accidents or malfunction caused by the above. Ty pical effects and characteristics of a phosphor-based matrix display such as permanent residual images upon the phosphors of the panel and the existence of a minute number of inactive light cells in the screen are not covered by local warranties. PDP-ELITE-Eng (06-12) 9/9/03, 11:43 6
01 Important User Guidance Information 7 En P anel sticking and after-image lag â¢D isplaying the same images such as still images for a long time may cause after-image lagging. This may occur in the following two cases. 1. After-image lagging due to r emaining electric load When image patterns with ver y high peak luminance are displayed more than 1 minute, after-image lagging may occur due to the remaining electric load. The after- images remaining on the screen will disappear when moving images are displayed. The time for the after- images to disappear depends on the luminance of the still images and the time they had been displayed. 2. After-image (lag image) due to bur ning Avoid displaying the same image on the Plasma Display continuously over a long period of time. If the same image is displayed continuously for several hours, or for shorter periods of time over several days, a permanent after-image may remain on the screen due to burning of the fluorescent materials. Such images may become less noticeable if moving images are later displayed, but they will not disappear completely . ⢠The Energy save function can be set to help prevent damage from screen burning (see page 55). About operations through i.LINK PIONEER shall not always assure normal video/audio recording or playback when a D-VHS is operated through i.LINK. PDP-ELITE-Eng (06-12) 9/9/03, 16:33 7
02 Safety Precautions 8 En Electricity is used to perform many useful functions, but it can also cause personal injuries and property damage if improperly handled. This product has been engineered and manufactured with the highest priority on safety . However , improper use can result in electric shock and/or fire. In order to prevent potential danger , please obser ve the following instructions when installing, operating and cleaning the product. T o ensure your safety and prolong the ser vice life of your product, please read the following precautions carefully before using the product. 1. Read instructionsâÂÂAll operating instructions must be read and understood before the product is operated. 2. Keep this manual in a safe placeâÂÂThese safety and operating instructions must be kept in a safe place for future reference. 3. Observe warningsâÂÂAll warnings on the product and in the instructions must be observed closely . 4. F ollow instructionsâÂÂAll operating instructions must be followed. 5. CleaningâÂÂUnplug the power cord from the AC outlet before cleaning the product. Use a damp cloth to clean the product. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol clean- ers. 6. AttachmentsâÂÂDo not use attachments not recom- mended by the manufacturer . Use of inadequate attach- ments can result in accidents. 7. W ater and moistureâÂÂDo not use the product near water , such as bathtub, washbasin, kitchen sink and laundry tub, swimming pool and in a wet basement. 8. StandâÂÂDo not place the product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod or table. Placing the product on an unstable base can cause the product to fall, resulting in serious personal injuries as well as damage to the product. Use only a cart, stand, tripod, bracket or table recommended by the manufacturer or sold with the product. When mounting the product on a wall, be sure to follow the manufacturer âÂÂs instructions. Use only the mounting hardware recommended by the manufacturer . 9. When relocating the product placed on a cart, it must be moved with utmost care. Sudden stops, excessive force and nueven floor surface can cause the product to fall from the cart. 10. V entilationâÂÂThe vents and other openings in the cabinet are designed for ventilation. Do not cover or block these vents and openings since insufficient ventilation can cause overheating and/or shorten the life of the product. Do not place the product on a bed, sofa, rug or other similar surface, since they can block ventilation openings. This product is not designed for built-in installation; do not place the product in an enclosed place such as a bookcase or rack, unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer âÂÂs instructions are followed. 11. P ower sourceâÂÂThis product must operate on a power source specified on the specification label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply used in your home, consult your dealer or local power company . 12. P ower cord protectionâÂÂThe power cords must be routed properly to prevent people from stepping on them or objects from resting on them. Check the cords at the plugs and product. 13. The plasma Display used in this product is made of glass. Therefore, it can break when the product is dropped or applied with impact. Be careful not to be injured by broken glass pieces in case the plasma Display breaks. 14. OverloadingâÂÂDo not overload AC outlets or extension cords. Overloading can cause fire or electric shock. 15. Entering of objects and liquidsâÂÂNever insert an object into the product through vents or openings. High voltage flows in the product, and inserting an object can cause electric shock and/or short internal parts. F or the same reason, do not spill water or liquid on the product. 16. Ser vicingâÂÂDo not attempt to ser vice the product yourself . R emoving covers can expose you to high voltage and other dangerous conditions. R equest a qualified ser vice person to perform ser vicing. 17. RepairâÂÂIf any of the following conditions occurs, unplug the power cord from the AC outlet, and request a qualified service person to per form repairs. a. When the power cord or plug is damaged. b. When a liquid was spilled on the product or when objects have fallen into the product. c. When the product has been exposed to rain or water . d. When the product does not operate properly as described in the operating instructions. Do not touch the controls other than those described in the operating instructions. Improper adjustment of controls not described in the instructions can cause damage, which often requires extensive adjustment work by a qualified technician . e. When the product has been dropped or damaged. f. When the product displays an abnormal condition. Any noticeable abnormality in the product indicates that the product needs servicing. 18. Replacement partsâÂÂIn case the product needs replace- ment parts, make sure that the service person uses replacement parts specified by the manufacturer , or those with the same characteristics and performance as the original parts. Use of unauthorized parts can result in fire, electric shock and/or other danger . 19. Safety checksâÂÂUpon completion of ser vice or repair work, request the service technician to per form safety checks to ensure that the product is in proper operating condition . 20. Wall or ceiling mountingâÂÂWhen mounting the product on a wall or ceiling, be sure to install the product according to the method recommended by the manufac- turer . 21. Heat sourcesâÂÂKeep the product away from heat sources such as radiators, heaters, stoves and other heat- generat- ing products (including amplifiers). 22. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet before install- ing the speakers. 23. Never expose the screen of the Plasma Display to a strong impact, for example, by hitting it. The screen may be broken, resulting in fire or personal injury . 24. Do not expose the Plasma Display to direct sunlight for a long period of time. The optical characteristics of the front protection panel changes, resulting in discoloration or warp. 25. The Plasma Display weighs about 38 kg (83.8 lbs.) for the PRO-504PU and about 30.5 kg (67.3 lbs.) for the PRO- 434PU. Because it has small depth and is unstable, unpack, carry, and install the product with one more person at least and use the handles. PDP-ELITE-Eng (06-12) 9/9/03, 11:43 8
02 Safety Precautions 9 En ⢠Be sure to use four or more mounting holes symmetrical to the vertical and horizontal median lines. ⢠Use M8 screws, which go 12 to 18 mm (0.5 to 0.7 inches) in depth from the mounting surface of the Plasma Display . See the side view above. ⢠Be careful not to block the ventilation opening at the rear of the Plasma Display . ⢠Be sure to install the Plasma Displayed on a flat sur face because it contains glass. ⢠The screw holes other than the above are to be used only for the specified products. Never use them for mounting non-specified products. ⢠Do not mount or remove the Plasma Display to or from the stand, with speakers attached. ⢠It is strongly recommended to use the optional PIONEER mounting products. â¢P IONEER shall not be liable for any personal injury or product damage that results from the use of mounting items other than the optional PIONEER products. Installation Precautions Obser ve the following precautions when installing with any items such as the optional stand. When using the optional stand, brackets, or equivalent items ⢠Ask your dealer to per form the installation. ⢠Be sure to use the supplied bolts. â¢F or details, see the instruction manual that comes with the optional stand (or equivalent items). When using other items ⢠Consult your dealer . ⢠The following six mounting holes can be used for the installation: Median line Mounting hole Mounting hole R ear view Median line Side view Plasma Display Mounting surface 12 to 18 mm (0.5 to 0.7 inches) M8 screw Mounting bracket (or equivalent item) PDP-ELITE-Eng (06-12) 9/9/03, 11:43 9
03 Operational Pr ecautions 10 En PIONEER bears no responsibility for any damages arising from incorrect use of the product by you or other people, malfunctions when in use, other product related problems, and use of the product except in cases where the company must be liable. Plasma Display pr otection function When still images (such as photos and computer images) stay on the screen for an extended period of time, the screen will be slightly dimmed. This is be- cause the protection function of the Plasma Display automatically adjusts the brightness to protect the screen when detecting still images; so this does not designate malfunction. The screen is dimmed when a still image is detected for about three minutes. Infrared rays The Plasma Display releases infrared rays because of its characteristics. Depending on how the Plasma Display is in use, the remote controls of nearby equip- ment may be adversely affected or wireless headphones using infrared rays are interfered by noise. If this is the case, place that equipment at a location where its remote control sensor is not affected. R adio interfer ence While this product meets the required specifications, it emits a small amount of noise. If you place such equipment as an AM radio, personal computer , and VCR close to this product, that equipment may be interfered. If this happens, place that equipment far enough from this product. F an motor noise When ambient temperature of the Media R eceiver becomes high, the rotation speed of the cooling fan motor increases. This may make you feel that the fan motor is noisy at such an occasion . Do not attach such items as labels and tape to the pr oduct. ⢠This may result in the discoloration or scratch of the cabinet. When not using the product for a long period of time ⢠If you do not use the product for a long period of time, the functions of the product may be adversely af- fected. Switch on and run the product occasionally . Condensation ⢠Condensation may take place on the surface or inside of the product when the product is rapidly moved from a cold place to a warm place or just after a heater is switched on in winter morning, for example. When condensation takes place, do not switch on the product and wait until condensation disappears. Using the product with condensation may result in malfunction. Cleaning the screen ⢠When cleaning the screen of this product, gently wipe it with a dry sof t cloth; the supplied cleaning cloth or other similar cloths (e.g., cotton and flannel). If you use a hard cloth or rub the screen hard, the sur face of the screen will be scratched. ⢠If you clean the surface of the screen with a wet cloth, water droplets on the sur face may enter into the product, resulting in malfunction. Cleaning the cabinet ⢠The cabinet of this product is mostly composed of plastic. Do not use chemicals such as benzine or thinner to clean the cabinet. Using these chemicals may result in quality deterioration or coating removal. ⢠Do not expose the product to volatile gas or fluid such as pesticide. Do not make the product contact with rubber or vinyl products for a long period of time. The effect of plasticizer in the plastic may result in quality deterioration or coating removal. ⢠If you clean the surface of the cabinet with a wet cloth, water droplets on the sur face may enter into the product, resulting in malfunction. Handles at the r ear of the Plasma Display ⢠Do not remove the handles from the rear of the Plasma Display . ⢠When moving the Plasma Display , ask another person for help and use the handles attached to the rear of the Plasma Display . Do not move the Plasma Display by holding only a single handle. Use the handles as shown. ⢠Do not use the handles to hang the product when installing or carr ying the product, for example. Do not use the handles for the purpose of preventing the product from tilting over . PDP-ELITE-Eng (06-12) 9/9/03, 11:43 10
04 Featur es 11 En ⢠Built-in Digital T elevision (DTV) T uner ⢠EPG for DTV programs ⢠New WIDE XGA Plasma Panel PRO-1110HD: 1280 x 768 (H x V) pixels PRO-910HD: 1024 x 768 (H x V) pixels ⢠PureCinema â¢T r uBass, FOCUS, and SRS sound systems ⢠Dual TV T uner ⢠Multi-scr een display (2-screen/pictur e-in-picture) ⢠Still image function ⢠4-Language On Screen Display â¢4 -V ideo Input and PC (XGA) Input â¢3 - Component Video Input ⢠2-i.LINK interface â¢P arental Contr ol System (V - CHIP) â¢P ower-Saving Design PDP-ELITE-Eng (06-12) 9/9/03, 11:43 11
05 Supplied Accessories 12 En Plasma Display Media Receiver Operating instruction â¢A lways use the power cord supplied with the Plasma Display and the one supplied with the Media Receiver for each respective unit. P ower cord (2 m/6.6 feet) Cleaning cloth Speed clamp x 3 Bead band x 3 W arranty card Speaker cushion x 3 (Use when installing the optional speakers at the bottom of the Plasma Display .) P ower cord (2 m/6.6 feet) R emote control unit System cable (3 m/9.8 feet) AA size batter y x 2 (Alkaline batter y) Stand Screw x 4 (for stand) Screw hole cap x 4 VCR controller x 1 (1.8 m/5.9 feet) Coaxial cable (0.15 m/0.49 feet) x 1 (Already set at the rear of the Media R eceiver) PDP-ELITE-Eng (06-12) 9/9/03, 11:43 12
06 Part Names 13 En Plasma Display 1 POWER button 2 ST ANDBY indicator 3 POWER ON indicator 4 Re mote control sensor 1 2 4 3 5 6 7 8 (right view) 5 ST ANDBY/ON button 6 INP UT button 7 VOLUME /â buttons 8 CHANNEL / â buttons 0 9 - = Re ar view Fr ont view 9 SYSTEM CABLE terminal (BLACK) 0 SYSTEM CABLE terminal (WHITE) - SPEAKER (right/left) terminals = AC INLET terminal The terminals have faced downward. PDP-ELITE-Eng (13-16) 9/9/03, 11:43 13
06 Part Names 14 En Media Receiver Fr ont view 1 POWER button 2 POWER ON indicator 3 ST ANDBY indicator 4 REC TIMER indicator 5 INPUT 4 COMPONENT VIDEO terminals (Y , C B/ P B, C R/ P R) 6 INPUT 4 terminal (S- VIDEO) 7 INPUT 4 terminal (VIDEO) 8 INPUT 4 terminals (AUDIO) 9 PC INPUT terminal (A UDIO) 0 PC INPUT terminal (ANAL OG RGB) 1 2 3 4 6 78 9 0 5 Pu ll this section to open the door . PDP-ELITE-Eng (13-16) 9/9/03, 11:43 14
06 Part Names 15 En Re ar view 1 Antenna A input terminal 2 RS-232C terminal (used in the factory setup) 3 Antenna B input terminal 4 Control input terminal 5 Control output terminal 6 VCR control terminal 7 INPUT 2 terminal (VIDEO) 8 INPUT 2 terminals (AUDIO) 9 DIGIT AL AUDIO output terminal (OPTICAL) 0 INPUT 1 terminal (VIDEO) - INPUT 1 terminals (AUDIO) = i.LINK terminals ~ DTV Antenna input terminal ! INPUT 1 COMPONENT VIDEO terminals (Y , C B/ P B, C R/ P R) @ AC INLET terminal # Antenna A output terminal $ Antenna B output terminal % INPUT 2 terminal (S- VIDEO) ^ MONITOR OUT terminal (S- VIDEO) & MONITOR OUT terminal (VIDEO) * MONITOR OUT terminals (AUDIO) ( INPUT 1 terminal (S- VIDEO) ) INPUT 3 terminals (AUDIO) _ INPUT 3 COMPONENT VIDEO terminals (Y , C B/ P B, C R/ P R) SYSTEM CABLE terminal (WHITE) á SYSTEM CABLE terminal (BLACK) IN SERVICE ONL Y MONITOR OUT DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL INPUT 1 COMPONENT VIDEO S400 DTV-ANTENNA IN INPUT 3 VCR CONTROL A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN IN OUT CONTROL OUT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y AC INLET BLACK WHITE SYSTEM CABLE R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R VIDEO VIDEO INPUT 2 (TS) VIDEO @ 0 8- 9=~ ! 7 á #$ % ^ & * ( ) _ 23 1 456 PDP-ELITE-Eng (13-16) 9/9/03, 11:43 15
06 Part Names 16 En Remote control unit With the mode switch set to TV 1 TV a : T urns on the power to the Plasma Display or places it into standby mode. 2 T ransmission confirmation LED 3 INPUT : Selects an input source of the Plasma Display . (DTV , i.LINK, INPUT 1, IN- PUT 2, INPUT 3, INPUT 4, PC) 4 â¢(dot) : Enters a dot. 5 CH RETURN : R eturns to the previous chan- nel. Mode switch (with âÂÂTVâ selected) 6 CH /â : Selects the channel. 7 RETURN : Returns to the previous menu screen. 8 / / / : Selects a desired item on the menu screen. 9 DTV INFO : Shows more information on DTV programs. 0 SPLIT : Switches the screen mode among 2- screen, picture-in-picture, and single-screen . - FREEZE : F reezes a frame from a moving image. Press again to cancel the function . = SLEEP : Sets the sleep timer . ~ : When pressed, all buttons on the remote control unit will light. The lighting will turn off if no operations are performed within about 5 seconds. This button is used for performing operations in dark places. ! ANT : Selects the antenna (A, B). See pages 24 to 26 for details. @ 0 â 9 : Sets the channel. # CH ENTER : Executes a channel number . $ VOL /â : Sets the volume. % e MUTING : Mutes the sound. ^ HOME MENU : Displays the menu screen. & ENTER : Executes a command. * DTV GUIDE : Displays the DTV Electronic Pr ogram Guide (EPG). ( FA VORITE CH (A, B, C, D ): Selects any of the four preset channels. See page 43 for details to set the F AVORITE CH . While watching, you can toggle the set chan- nels by pressing A , B , C and D . ) S CREEN SIZE : Selects the screen size. _ DISPL A Y : Displays the channel information . MTS : Selects the MTS/SAP . á AV SELECTION : Selects audio and video settings. (AV mode: ST ANDARD, DYNAMIC, MOVIE, GAME, USER . PC mode: ST ANDARD, USER.) ⢠When using the remote control unit, point it at the Plasma Display . ⢠See pages 97 to 105 for operating buttons not listed on this page. @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ á ! ~ 12 3 5 6 7 4 8 9 0 - = PDP-ELITE-Eng (13-16) 9/9/03, 11:43 16
07 Pr eparation 17 En Installing the Plasma Display L ocating ⢠Avoid direct sunlight. Maintain adequate ventilation. ⢠The length of the system cable used to connect the Plasma Display and the Media R eceiver is about 3 m (118 inches). ⢠Because the Plasma Display is heavy , be sure to have someone help you when moving it. ⢠If you place anything on the top of the Media Receiver it will not receive enough ventilation and will not operate properly . â¢A llow enough space around the upper and back parts when installing to ensure ventilation around the backside. Using the optional PIONEER stand â¢F o r details on installation, refer to the instruction manual provided with the stand. ⢠This product may be used only with model PDK- TS04 stand, use with other stands may result in instability causing possible injury. Using the optional PIONEER speakers â¢F o r details on installation, refer to the instruction manual provided with the speaker . Operating Environment Operating environment temperature and humidity: 0ðC to 40ðC ( 32ðF to 104ðF); less than 85% RH (cooling vents not blocked) Avoid installing at the following locations: ⢠Under direct exposure to sunlight ⢠Under strong artificial light â¢I n high humidity â¢P oorly ventilated Over 50 cm (19 11 / 16 inches) Over 10 cm (3 15 / 16 inches ) Allowed operation range of the remote control unit Operate the remote control unit while pointing it toward the remote control sensor ( t ) located at the bottom right of the front panel of the Plasma Display . The distance from the remote control sensor must be within 7 m (276 inches) and the angle relative to the sensor must be within 30 degrees in the right, left, upward, or downward direction. When the remote contr ol unit does not func- tion properly ⢠When any obstacle exists between the remote control unit and the remote control sensor , the remote control unit may not function . ⢠As the batteries become empty, the remote control unit can function within a shorter distance from the remote control sensor . Replace the batteries with new ones early enough. ⢠The Plasma Display emits ver y weak infrared rays from its screen. If you place such equipment oper - ated through infrared remote control as a VCR nearby , that equipment may not receive commands from its remote control unit properly or entirely . If this is the case, place that equipment at a location far enough from the Plasma Display . ⢠Depending on the installation environment, infrared rays from the Plasma Display may not allow this system to properly receive commands from the remote control unit or may shorten allowable dis- tances between the remote control unit and the remote control sensor . The strength of infrared rays emitted from the screen differs, depending on images displayed on the screen. 30ú 30ú Remote control sensor 7 m (276 inches) PDP-ELITE-Eng (17-27) 9/9/03, 11:44 17
07 Preparation 18 En Installing the Media receiver Plasma Display Media Receiver (vertical installation) (horizontal installation) System cable (approx. 3 meters/9.8 feet) ⢠Do not place a VCR or any other device on top of the Media Receiver . ⢠When installing, allow enough space on the sides and above the Media Receiver . ⢠Do not block the side cooling vents or the r ear ventilation fan opening of the Media Receiver . Over 10 cm (3 15 /16 inches) Over 5 cm (2 inches) Over 5 cm (2 inches) Over 5 cm (2 inches) Over 5 cm (2 inches) Over 5 cm (2 inches) Over 10 cm (3 15 /16 inches) PDP-ELITE-Eng (17-27) 9/9/03, 11:44 18
07 Pr eparation 19 En Right side Installing the Media Receiver vertically Y ou can use the accompanying stand to install the Media Receiver vertically . Installing the Media Receiver vertically Insert the vertical installation stand into the side of the Media Receiver . Secure the vertical installation stand with screws. V ertical installation stand screws Shock absorbing pad Y ou can remove the shock absorbing pads. Keep the shock absorbing pads and screws. They are required when you place the Media Receiver in the horizontal position. Plug the screw holes using the caps pr ovided. ⢠When you have installed the Media Receiver vertically , always use the accompanying stand. If you place the unit dir ectly on the floor the cooling vents will be block ed which will result in mechanical failure. R emove the separation sheet. Screw hole cap Align with the hole and attach. PDP-ELITE-Eng (17-27) 9/9/03, 11:44 19
07 Preparation 20 En IN SERVICE ONL Y MONITOR OUT DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL INPUT 1 COMPONENT VIDEO S400 DTV-ANTENNA IN INPUT 3 VCR CONTROL A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN IN OUT CONTROL OUT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y AC INLET BLACK WHITE SYSTEM CABLE R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO INPUT 2 (TS) Setting the system Connecting the system cable to the Plasma Display ⢠THESE SPEAKER TERMINALS CAN BE UNDER HAZARDOUS VOL T AGE WHEN YOU CONNECT OR DISCONNECT THE SPEAKER CABLES. TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT TOUCH UNINSULA TED P ARTS BEFORE DIS CONNECTING THE POWER CORD. Connecting the system cable to the Media R eceiver F or details on optional PIONEER speaker installation , refer to the speaker instruction manual provided. Plasma Display (rear view) (WHITE) (BLACK) System cable Media Receiver (r ear view) (WHITE) (BL ACK) PDP-ELITE-Eng (17-27) 9/9/03, 11:44 20
07 Pr eparation 21 En Routing cables Speed clamps and bead bands are included with this system for bunching cables. Once properly bunched, follow the steps below to route the cables. When the speakers ar e installed on the sides When the speakers ar e installed at the bottom (rear view) Speaker cable Attaching speed clamps to the main unit Attach the speed clamps using the 4 holes marked with below , depending on your routing system. A ttaching and removing speed clamps Insert 1 into an appropriate hole on the rear of the Plasma Display and snap 2 into the back of 1 to lock the clamp. Speed clamps are designed to be difficult to undo once in place. Please attach them carefully . Use pliers to twist the clamp 90ð, pulling outward. The clamp may deteriorate over time and become damaged if removed. 1 2 Speaker cable Speed clamps Speaker cable Speaker cable Cable binders (supplied with the stand)* Cable binders (supplied with the stand)* * Cable binder Using the cable binders supplied with the stand, put the speaker and system cables together so that the cables are invisible from the front. At that time be careful not to apply any force to the connection sections of the cables. PDP-ELITE-Eng (17-27) 9/9/03, 11:44 21
07 Preparation 22 En Using the r emote control unit Use the remote control unit by pointing it towards the remote sensor window . Objects between the remote control unit and sensor window may prevent proper operation . Cautions regar ding the r emote control unit ⢠Do not expose the remote control unit to shock. In addition, do not expose the remote control unit to liquids, and do not place in an area with high humid- ity . ⢠Do not install or place the remote control unit under direct sunlight. The heat may cause deformation of the unit. ⢠The remote control unit may not work properly if the remote sensor window of the Plasma Display is under direct sunlight or strong lighting. In such case, change the angle of the lighting or Plasma Display set, or operate the remote control unit closer to the remote sensor window . Inserting batteries If the remote control unit fails to operate Plasma Display System functions, replace the batteries in the remote control unit. 1 Open the batter y cover . 2 Insert the two AA size batteries supplied with the product. â¢P lace batteries with their terminals corresponding to the ( ) and (âÂÂ) indicators in the batter y compart- ment. 3 Close the batter y cover . PDP-ELITE-Eng (17-27) 9/9/03, 11:44 22
07 Pr eparation 23 En Cautions regarding batteries Improper use of batteries can result in chemical leakage or explosion. Be sure to follow the instructions below . ⢠Do not use manganese batteries. When you replace the batteries, use alkaline ones. â¢P lace the batteries with their terminals correspond- ing to the ( ) and (âÂÂ) indicators. ⢠Do not mix batteries of different types. Different types of batteries have different characteristics. ⢠Do not mix old and new batteries. Mixing old and new batteries can shorten the life of new batteries or cause chemical leakage in old batteries. ⢠Remove batteries as soon as they have worn out. Chemicals that leak from batteries can cause a rash. If you find any chemical leakage, wipe thoroughly with a cloth. ⢠The batteries supplied with this product may have a shorter life expectancy due to storage conditions. ⢠If you will not use the remote control unit for an extended period of time, remove the batteries from it. ⢠WHEN DISPOSING OF USED BA TTERIES, BE SURE TO COMPL Y WITH GOVERNMENT REGULA TIONS AND ENVIRONMENT AL PRO- TECTION GUIDELINES THA T APPL Y IN YOUR COUNTRY OR AREA. PDP-ELITE-Eng (17-27) 9/9/03, 11:44 23
07 Preparation 24 En IN A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN OUT Cable connections for watching conventional TV channels In order to watch conventional TV channels, connect coaxial cables as shown below . T o enjoy a clearer picture, use an outdoor antenna. If your outdoor antenna uses a 75-ohm coaxial cable with an F-type connector , plug it into the antenna terminal at the rear of the Media Receiver . Connecting a VHF/UHF antenna IN A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN OUT Cable TV VHF antenna Cable Converter UHF antenna U/V mix er The coaxial cable is already connected at the time of purchase. Media Receiver (r ear) Media Receiver (r ear) Connecting a Cable Converter When making the above connections, first remove the coaxial cable attached before shipment. PDP-ELITE-Eng (17-27) 9/9/03, 11:44 24
07 Pr eparation 25 En U/V mixer ⢠Be sure to connect the antenna or the Cable Converter as shown above. Signal r eception may fail if not properly connected. ⢠Be sure that the Cable Converter output signal is assigned to the ANTENNA/CABLE B input on the Media Receiver . ⢠How to change channels when the Cable Converter output signal is connected to the ANTENNA/CABLE B input on the Media Receiver . ⢠P ress ANT on the remote control unit to switch to ANTENNA/CABLE B. ⢠Y ou can view an image right after selecting the output channel on the Cable Converter . Switching between antenna A and B To watch broadcasts via the two antennas, you can select it by pressing ANT on the remote control unit. ⢠While watching a broadcast, press ANT to view the image received from the other antenna. â¢P ressing ANT while viewing in Dual Screen mode (TV image and video image) with TV selected will display the TV image of the other antenna. â¢P ressing ANT while viewing Dual Screen with two TV images displayed will not have any effect. â¢P ressing ANT while viewing Dual Screen with two video images displayed will switch the selected screen to a TV image. Media Receiver (r ear) VHF antenna UHF antenna Cable TV IN A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN OUT Cable Converter When making the above connections, first remove the coaxial cable attached before shipment. Connecting a VHF/UHF antenna and Cable Converter PDP-ELITE-Eng (17-27) 9/9/03, 11:44 25
07 Preparation 26 En Cable connections for watching digital TV channels In order to watch digital TV channels, connect coaxial cables as shown below . T o enjoy a clearer picture, use an outdoor antenna. If your outdoor uses a 75-ohm coaxial cable with an F-type connector , plug it into the antenna terminal at the rear of the Media Receiver . Connecting a VHF/UHF antenna Connecting for cable TV ⢠Be sure to connect coaxial cables as shown above. Signal reception may fail if not properly connected. IN A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN OUT DTV-ANTENNA IN IN A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN OUT DTV-ANTENNA IN U/V mixer VHF antenna UHF antenna Splitter Digital tuner Analog tuner Media Receiver (r ear) Media Receiver (r ear) Splitter Cable TV Digital tuner Analog tuner The coaxial cable is already connected at the time of purchase. When making the above connections, first remove the coaxial cable attached before shipment. Cable Converter PDP-ELITE-Eng (17-27) 9/9/03, 11:44 26
07 Pr eparation 27 En P ower cord P ower cord ⢠Use only the power cord pr ovided. ⢠Do not use a power supply voltage other than that indicated as this may cause fire or electric shock. â¢F or the Plasma Display System, a three-core power cord with a gr ound terminal is used for efficiency protection. Always connect the power cor d to a three-pr onged outlet and make sur e that the cord is pr operly grounded. If you use a power source converter plug, use an outlet with a ground ter minal and scr ew down the ground line. â¢A lways turn off the power of the Plasma Display and Media Receiver when connecting the power cords. ⢠Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet when the Plasma Display System is not going to be used for a long period of time. IN SERVICE ONLY MONITOR OUT DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL INPUT 1 COMPONENT VIDEO S400 DTV-ANTENNA IN INPUT 3 VCR CONTROL A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN IN OUT CONTROL OUT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y AC IN LET BLACK WHITE SYSTEM CABLE R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO INPUT 2 (TS) AC INLET Connecting the power cord Connect the power cord after all component connections have been completed. Plasma Display (rear view) Media R eceiver (rear view) Noise filter P artially eliminates noise caused by the power source. Noise filter P artially eliminates noise caused by the power source. PDP-ELITE-Eng (17-27) 9/9/03, 11:44 27
08 Basic Operations 28 En Plasma Display Tu r ning on the power 1 Pr ess POWER on the Plasma Display . ⢠The ST ANDBY indicator on the Plasma Display flashes red. 2 Pr ess POWER on the Media Receiver . ⢠The system is turned on or placed into the standby mode. 3 Confirm that the ST ANDBY indicators light up red, and then press TV a on the remote control unit or ST ANDBY/ON on the Plasma Display to turn the system on. ⢠The POWER ON indicators on the Plasma Display and Media R eceiver light up green. â¢I n this manual, âÂÂsystemâ means the Plasma Display P anel and Media Receiver . â¢Y ou can also reverse steps 1 and 2. POWER ON indicator POWER button ST ANDBY indicator Media R eceiver POWER ON indicator POWER button ST ANDBY/ON button ST ANDBY indicator (right view) PDP-ELITE-Eng (28-37) 9/9/03, 11:44 28
08 Basic Operations 29 En 2 Pr ess POWER on the Media Receiver . ⢠The ST ANDBY indicator on the Media R eceiver turns off and the one on the Plasma Display flashes red. 3 Pr ess POWER on the Plasma Display . ⢠The ST ANDBY indicator on the Plasma Display turns off . â¢Y ou can also reverse steps 2 and 3. ⢠If you are not going to use this system for a long period of time, be sure to remove the power cord from the power outlet. Tu r ning off the power 1 Pr ess TV a on the remote control unit or ST ANDBY/ON on the Plasma Display . ⢠The system enters the standby mode and the image on the screen disappears. ⢠Both ST ANDBY indicators light up red. ⢠It is recommended to place the system into the standby mode by pressing TV a on the remote control unit. This allows the system to automatically receive Electronic P rogram Guide information signals in the standby mode. Plasma Display/Media Receiver status indicators Indicat or Status S yst em Status Plasma Displa y Media Receiv er POWER ON ST ANDB Y POWER ON ST ANDBY Po w er to the Plasma Displa y and Media Receiver is off . Or the power cords ha ve been disconnected. Po w er to the s y stem is on. The s yst em is in the standby mode. Po w er to the Media R eceiver is off. Or the pow er cor d has been discon- nected fr om the Media Receiver . Po w er to the Plasma Displa y is off. Or the pow er cor d has been discon- nected fr om the Plasma Displa y . Fo r other than the above, see â T roubleshootingâ on page 106. Flashing Flashing PDP-ELITE-Eng (28-37) 9/9/03, 11:44 29
08 Basic Operations 30 En Plasma Display (right view) Channel display 8 AAA STEREO STANDARD FULL W atching conventional TV channels Unless you set up conventional TV channels that you can watch under the current conditions, you cannot tune in those channels. F or the procedure, see âÂÂSetting up conventional TV channelsâ on page 41. ⢠Conventional TV channels in this manual designate TV channels that are received through the conven- tional VHF/UHF frequencies or conventional cable TV channels. Selecting the antenna After confirming that the Mode switch on the remote control unit has been set to âÂÂTVâÂÂ, press ANT on the remote control unit to select antenna A or B. ⢠Make this selection depending on the connections to the antenna input terminals on the Media Receiver (pages 24 to 26). Changing channels Using CH /â on the r emote control unit â¢P ress CH to increase the channel number . â¢P ress CH â to decrease the channel number . ⢠CHANNEL /â on the Plasma Display operates the same as CH /â . Using CH RETURN on the r emote control unit Pr ess CH RETURN to switch the currently tuned channel to the previously tuned channel. Pr ess CH RETURN again to switch back to the currently tuned channel. Using 0 â 9 on the r emote contr ol unit Select channels directly by pressing buttons 0 to 9 . EXAMPLE â¢T o select channel 5 (1-digit channel), press 5 . â¢T o select channel 25 (2-digit channel), press 2 , followed by 5 . â¢T o select channel 125 (3-digit channel), press 1 , then 2 , followed by 5 . â¢A ft er entering a channel number , you may press CH ENTER to tune in the channel more quickly . CHANNEL /â PDP-ELITE-Eng (28-37) 9/9/03, 11:44 30
08 Basic Operations 31 En Plasma Display (right view) Vo lume adjustment Mute VOLUME /â Changing the volume and sound Using VOL /â on the remote contr ol unit â¢T o increase the volume, press VOL . â¢T o decrease the volume, press VOL âÂÂ. ⢠VOLUME /â on the Plasma Display operates the same as VOL /âÂÂ. Using e MUTING on the remote contr ol unit e mutes the current sound output. 1 Pr ess e MUTING . â¢â M â appears on the screen. 2 Pr ess e MUTING again to cancel the mute mode. â¢P ressing VOL can also cancel the mute mode. PDP-ELITE-Eng (28-37) 9/9/03, 11:44 31
08 Basic Operations 32 En Setting MTS/SAP mode The Plasma Display System has a feature that allows reception of sound other than the main audio for the program. This feature is called Multi-channel T elevision Sound (MTS). The Plasma Display System with MTS can receive mono sound, stereo sound and Secondary Audio P rograms (SAP). The SAP feature allows a TV station to broadcast other information, which could be audio in another language or something completely different like weather information. Y ou can enjoy Hi-Fi ster eo sound or SAP broadcasts wher e available. â¢S tereo broadcasts Vi ew programs like live sporting events, shows and concerts in dynamic stereo sound. ⢠SAP broadcasts R eceive TV broadcasts in either MAIN or SAP sound. MAIN sound: The normal program soundtrack (either in mono or stereo). SAP sound: Listen to second language, supplemen- tar y commentar y and other information. (SAP is mono sound.) If stereo sound is difficult to hear : ⢠Obtain a clearer sound by manually switching to the MONO mode. ⢠Once the MONO mode is selected, the Plasma Display System sound remains mono even if the system receives a stereo broadcast. Y ou must reselect the STEREO mode if you want to hear stereo sound again. ⢠Selecting MTS while the input source is INPUT 1 to 4 or PC does not change the type of sound. In this case, sound is determined by the video source. Each time you press MTS, MTS toggles as shown below . STEREO STEREO mode SAP SAP mode MONO MONO mode â¢I n each of the MTS/SAP modes selected using the MTS button, the display changes depending on broadcasting signals being received. See page 33. PDP-ELITE-Eng (28-37) 9/9/03, 11:44 32
08 Basic Operations 33 En When receiving STEREO sound signals A 125 STEREO In STEREO mode In SAP mode In MONO mode A 125 STEREO A 125 MONO When receiving MAIN SAP sound signals In STEREO mode In SAP mode In MONO mode A 125 MAIN (SAP) A 125 SAP (MAIN) A 125 MONO (SAP) When receiving STEREO SAP sound signals In STEREO mode In SAP mode In MONO mode A 125 STEREO (SAP) A 125 SAP (STEREO) A 125 MONO (SAP) When receiving MONO sound signals In STEREO mode In SAP mode In MONO mode A 125 MONO A 125 MONO A 125 MONO PDP-ELITE-Eng (28-37) 9/9/03, 11:44 33
08 Basic Operations 34 En Plasma Display (right view) Channel display 8 AAA STEREO STANDARD FULL W atching digital TV channels Unless you set up digital TV channels that you can watch under the current conditions, you cannot tune in those channels. F or the procedure, see âÂÂSetting up digital TV channelsâ on page 44. Selecting the digital TV input After confirming that the Mode switch on the remote control unit has been set to âÂÂTVâÂÂ, press DTV on the remote control unit to select the input source for digital TV channels. Changing channels Using CH /â on the r emote control unit â¢P ress CH to increase the channel number . â¢P ress CH â to decrease the channel number . ⢠CHANNEL /â on the Plasma Display operates the same as CH /â . Using CH RETURN on the r emote control unit Pr ess CH RETURN to switch the currently tuned channel to the previously tuned channel. Pr ess CH RETURN again to switch back to the currently tuned channel. Using 0 â 9 and ⢠(dot) on the r emote control unit Select channels directly by pressing buttons 0 to 9 . T o select subchannels, also use the ⢠(dot) button . EXAMPLE â¢T o select channel 5 (1-digit channel), press 5 . â¢T o select channel 25 (2-digit channel), press 2 , followed by 5 . â¢T o select channel 125 (3-digit channel), press 1 , then 2 , followed by 5 . â¢T o select subchannel 2.1, press 2 , ⢠(dot), then 1 . â¢T o select subchannel 10.1, press 1 , 0 , ⢠(dot), then 1. â¢A ft er entering a channel or subchannel number , you may press CH ENTER to tune in the channel more quickly . CHANNEL /â PDP-ELITE-Eng (28-37) 9/9/03, 11:44 34
08 Basic Operations 35 En Plasma Display (right view) Vo lume adjustment Mute VOLUME /â Changing the volume and sound Using VOL /â on the remote contr ol unit â¢T o increase the volume, press VOL . â¢T o decrease the volume, press VOL âÂÂ. ⢠VOLUME /â on the Plasma Display operates the same as VOL /âÂÂ. Using e MUTING on the remote contr ol unit e mutes the current sound output. 1 Pr ess e MUTING . â¢â M â appears on the screen. 2 Pr ess e MUTING again to cancel the mute mode. â¢P ressing VOL can also cancel the mute mode. Changing the language If you have selected a digital TV program that provides multi-language ser vices, you can switch among the languages by pressing MTS on the remote control unit. Each time you press MTS, the language switches. ⢠Switchable languages differ depending on the current broadcast. ⢠If the language selected through language setting is available when the channel or program is changed, you will hear that language. PDP-ELITE-Eng (28-37) 9/9/03, 11:44 35
08 Basic Operations 36 En Using the multiscr een functions Splitting the scr een Use the following procedure to select the 2-screen or picture-in-picture mode. 2-screen P icture-in-picture V iewing DTV banners While watching a digital TV program, pressing DTV INFO causes the following banner to appear . WHD-TV STEREO CC TV -PG *************************************************************** *************************************************************** *************************************************************** ************* 35 â 01 6:00 â 6:45 PM J AN. 1.Sat 5:10 AM 1 2 3 5 6 4 7 8 0 9 1 Station name 2 Channel number 3 Pr ogram time schedule 4 Pr ogram title 5 Date 6 Ti me 7 Appears if closed captions (CC) are available. 8 Shows the parental control ratings. 9 Shows available audio ser vices. 0 Information about the program ⢠The above information is not displayed if not included in broadcast signals. PDP-ELITE-Eng (28-37) 9/9/03, 11:44 36
08 Basic Operations 37 En 1 Pr ess SPLIT to select the display mode. ⢠Each time you press SPLIT, the display mode is switched among 2-screen , picture-in-picture, and single-screen. 2 When in the 2-screen or picture-in-picture mode, press / to select a screen to be active. â¢â z z z z z â appears on the active screen, which outputs sound. 3 To select the desired input source, press the appropriate input source button. ⢠If watching TV programs, press CH /â to change the channel. ⢠The multiscreen function cannot display images from the same input source at the same time. If you make such an attempt, a warning message appears. ⢠When you press HOME MENU, DTV GUIDE , or DTV INFO , the single-screen mode is restored and the corresponding menu is displayed. Freezing images Use the following procedure to capture and freeze one frame from a moving image that you are watching. 1 Pr ess FREEZE . â¢A still image appears on the right screen while a moving image is shown on the left screen. 2 Pr ess FREEZE again to cancel the function. â¢W ith the screen split, any image cannot be frozen . ⢠When this function is not available, a warning mes- sage appears. PDP-ELITE-Eng (28-37) 9/9/03, 11:44 37
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 38 En Using the menu AV mode menus Home Menu It em Descrip tion Page Picture AV Selection Select from the fiv e displa y mode options; S T ANDARD, D YNAMIC, MOVIE, G AME and USER. 4 7 Contr ast Adjusts the pictur e bet ween light and shade. 4 9 Brightness Adjusts pictur e brightness. 4 9 Color Adjusts color int ensit y . 4 9 T int Adjust s skin color to a mor e natur al tone. 4 9 Sharpness Adjusts pictur e sharpness. 4 9 Pr o Adju st Adjust s the lev els of PureCinema, Color T emp, MPEG NR, DNR, CTI, DRE, and Color Management. 49âÂÂ5 3 Re set All image adjustment set tings re turn to the fact ory defaults. 4 9 Sound Tr eble Adjusts the tr eble weak er or stronger . 5 3 Bass Adjusts the bass weak er or stronger . 5 3 Balance Adjusts audio output bet ween left and right speak ers. 5 3 Re set All audio adjustment set tings return to the fact ory defaults. 5 3 F OCUS Shift the sound coming direction (sound images) up ward and pr oduce s clear sound cont ours. 5 4 Fr ont Surround Pr ovide s three-dimensional sound effects and/or deep, rich ba ss. 5 4 Po w er Control Ener gy Save Sa ves pow er by decr easing picture brightne ss. 5 5 No Signal off Places the sy stem int o the standby mode when no signal is r eceived for 15 m i n u tes . 5 5 No Oper ation off Places the sy stem int o the standby mode when no oper ation is performed for three hour s. 5 6 Sleep Timer Aut omatically places the s yst em into the st andby mode when the select ed time elapses. 8 5 Option P osition Adjusts the vertical and horizont al positions of displa yed image s. 8 1 Side Mask With the 4:3 scr een size select ed, sets the brightne ss of the gr a y side ma sks that appear at both side s of the scr een. 8 4 Setup Channel Setup Sets up for con ventional TV channels. 4 1, 4 2 Fav orite Channel Sets y our fa vorit e TV channels to the four color but tons on the r emot e control unit. 4 3 Pa r ental Control Pre vents y our children from w atching specified t ypes of TV progr ams. 90âÂÂ9 4 Pa sswor d Pre vents other persons fr om changing especially P arent al Control set tings. 9 5, 96 Closed Caption Sets up for closed captions for conv entional TV channels. F or DTV channels, use âÂÂD TV Closed Captionâ under âÂÂD TV Setupâ . 8 6 Clock Corrects the da t e and time. 4 6, 4 7 Language Select the language to be used for on-scr een display such a s menus and instructions. 4 6 D TV Se tup D TV Channel Se tup Sets up for r eceiving D TV channels. 44âÂÂ4 5 D TV Closed Cap tion Set s up for closed captions for D TV channels. 8 7âÂÂ8 9 Digital Audio Out Sets up for optical digit al audio output. 6 9 i.LINK Setup Sets up for the i.LINK int er face. 7 3âÂÂ7 6 VCR Control Sets up for the manufactur e and model of recor ding equipment to be connect ed. 7 8, 7 9 R ec/V ie w Timer Allow s you t o make DTV pr ogram pr eset tings by manually specifying da te and time. 6 2âÂÂ6 4 PDP-ELITE-Eng (38-39) 9/9/03, 11:44 38
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 39 En PC mode menus Home Menu It em Descrip tion P age Picture AV Selection Select from the t wo displa y mode options; ST ANDARD and USER. 4 7 Contr ast Adjusts the pictur e betw een light and shade. 4 9 Brightness Adjusts pictur e brightness. 4 9 Re dA djusts red color int ensit y . 4 9 Gr een Adjusts gr een color intensit y. 4 9 Blue Adjusts blue color int ensity . 4 9 Re set All image adjustment set tings return t o the factory default s. 4 9 Sound Tr eble Adjusts the tr eble weaker or str onger . 5 3 Bass Adjusts the bass w eak er or stronger . 5 3 Balance Adjusts audio output bet ween left and right speak ers. 5 3 Re set All audio adjustment set tings return t o the fact ory defaults. 5 3 F OCUS Shifts the sound coming dir ection (sound images) upward and pr oduces clear sound cont ours. 5 4 Fr ont Surr ound Provide s three-dimensional sound effect s and/or deep, rich bass. 5 4 Pow er Control Ener gy Sav e Sav es po wer b y decreasing pictur e brightness. 5 5 Po w er Management Automatically place s the syst em into the st andby mode when no signal is r eceived fr om the personal comput er . 5 6 Sleep T imer Aut omatically place s the sy st em into the st andby mode when the selected time elapses. 8 5 Option Auto Setup Aut omatically op timizes image positions and clock. 8 1 Manual Setup Allow s you t o manually adjust image positions and clock. 8 2 PDP-ELITE-Eng (38-39) 9/9/03, 11:44 39
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 40 En Menu operation keys Use the following keys on the remote control to operate the menu. F or detailed menu operations, see appropri- ate pages that describe individual functions. HOME MENU :P ress to open or close the Home menu. / :P ress to select a menu item. F or some menu items, you can select parameters using these keys. / :P ress to select a parameter or adjustment level for menu items. ENTER :P ress to proceed to lower menu levels. F or some menu items, you need to press this key to complete selections. RETURN :P ress to return to upper menu levels. PDP-ELITE-Eng (40-56) 9/9/03, 11:45 40
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 41 En Setting up conventional TV channels This section describes how to search and set up conventional TV channels that you can watch under the current conditions. Unless you set up conventional TV channels using Auto channel Preset, you may not be able to tune in those channels. ⢠Conventional TV channels in this manual designate TV channels that are received through the conven- tional VHF/ UHF frequencies or conventional cable TV channels. Using Auto Channel Preset Auto Channel Preset automatically searches and sets up conventional TV channels. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂChannel SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select â Auto Channel P resetâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select â AntennaâÂÂ, and then press / to select â A â or âÂÂBâÂÂ. Auto Channel Preset Air/Cable Preset Antenna Start Air A 6 Pr ess / to select â Air/CableâÂÂ, and then press / to select â Air â or âÂÂCableâÂÂ. Auto Channel Preset Air/Cable Preset Antenna Start A Air 7 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP reset:StartâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . Auto Channel Preset Air/Cable Preset Antenna Start Air A ⢠Channel search automatically starts. Please wait. Auto channel preset searching. To cancel auto channel preset, press [RETURN]. PLASMA DISPLA Y â¢T o quit Auto Channel P reset halfway , press RETURN . 8 After Auto Channel Preset has been finished, press HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠When using the Cable Converter , you may need to manually add Cable Converter output channels. PDP-ELITE-Eng (40-56) 9/9/03, 11:45 41
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 42 En Setting for skipping unwanted channels Fr om among conventional TV channels searched and set up using Auto Channel P reset, you can select channels to be skipped when CH /â are operated. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂChannel SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂChannel ADD/DEL âÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select â AntennaâÂÂ, and then press / to select â A â or âÂÂBâÂÂ. Channel ADD/DEL Channel Add/Delete Antenna 2 Add A 6 Pr ess / to select âÂÂChannelâÂÂ, and then press / to select a channel to be skipped. Channel ADD/DEL Channel Add/Delete Antenna Add A 2 7 Pr ess / to select â Add/DeleteâÂÂ, and then press / to select âÂÂDeleteâÂÂ. Channel ADD/DEL Channel Add/Delete Antenna A 2 Delete 8 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢T o restore skipped channels, use the above procedure except that you select â Addâ in step 7. ⢠When using the Cable Converter , you may need to manually add Cable Converter output channels. PDP-ELITE-Eng (40-56) 9/9/03, 11:45 42
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 43 En Setting your favorite channels Set up to four TV channels to each of the four color buttons on the remote control unit (16 channels in total). Y ou can then quickly select from only your favorite channels. Y ou can program these buttons with conventional channels. 1 Select and tune to a TV channel to be registered. 2 Pr ess HOME MENU . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂF avorite ChannelâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . Favorite Channel Current Channel A 69 A 1 69 B 28 6 B 3 125 A 46 9 â âÂÂâÂÂâ â âÂÂâÂÂâ â âÂÂâÂÂâ A0 â âÂÂâÂÂâ â âÂÂâÂÂâ â âÂÂâÂÂâ A0 B8 6 A6 9 â âÂÂâÂÂâ B 125 5 Pr ess / and / to select a location where the TV channel is to be registered, and then press ENTER . Favorite Channel Current Channel B 86 A 1 69 B 2 86 B 3 125 A 4 69 â âÂÂâÂÂâ B8 6 â âÂÂâÂÂâ A0 â âÂÂâÂÂâ â âÂÂâÂÂâ â âÂÂâÂÂâ A0 B8 6 A 69 â âÂÂâÂÂâ B 125 6 Pr ess ENTER to execute the registration . ⢠Before pressing ENTER , you can also change a TV channel to be registered. P ress / to select ANT A or ANT B, and then press / to select a TV channel. T o clear the channel registered at the current location , select âÂÂâÂÂâ by pressing / and then press ENTER . â¢T o register another TV channel at a different location, select a TV channel, and then repeat steps 5 and 6. 7 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢Y ou cannot program the four color buttons with digital TV channels. PDP-ELITE-Eng (40-56) 9/9/03, 11:45 43
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 44 En Setting up digital TV channels This section describes how to search and set up digital TV channels that you can watch under the current conditions. Unless you set up digital TV channels using Auto Channel P reset, you cannot tune in those channels. Using Auto Channel Preset Auto Channel P reset automatically searches and sets up digital TV channels. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV Channel SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select â Auto Channel PresetâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select â Air â or âÂÂCableâÂÂ. Auto Channel Preset Air/Cable Air Start 6 Pr ess / to select âÂÂStartâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . Auto channel preset sear ching. Please wait. To cancel auto channel preset, press [RETURN]. PLASMA DISPLA Y ⢠Channel search automatically starts. 7 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢W ith âÂÂCableâ selected, this system can receive only digital TV signals (Standard Channel Plan) with the 8VSB modulation. This system does not support the QAM modulation. PDP-ELITE-Eng (40-56) 9/9/03, 11:45 44
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 45 En Setting for skipping unwanted channels Fr om among digital TV channels searched and set up using Auto Channel Preset, you can select channels to be skipped when CH /â are operated. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV Channel SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂChannel Add/DelâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select âÂÂChannelâÂÂ. 6 Pr ess / to select a channel to be skipped. Channel Add/Del Add/Delete Channel 120.001 Add 7 Pr ess / to select â Add/DeleteâÂÂ. 8 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDeleteâÂÂ. Channel Add/Del Add/Delete Channel 120.001 Delete 9 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢T o restore skipped channels, use the above procedure except that you select â Addâ in step 8. Checking signal strength When watching a digital TV program, you can check its current signal strength. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV Channel SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSignal StrengthâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . Signal Strength Maximum : 49 Weak Strong Current : 49 ⢠Adjust the direction of the antenna so that the current signal strength reaches as close to the maximum signal strength as possible. 5 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. PDP-ELITE-Eng (40-56) 9/9/03, 11:45 45
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 46 En Language setting Y ou can select a language to be used for on-screen display such as menus from among three languages; English, F rench, and Spanish. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂLanguageâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select a language. Language Menu English 5 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. Clock setting Use the following procedure to set the time correctly . If you disconnect the power cord from the power outlet or power black out occurs after setting the time, the set time is cleared. With â Autoâ selected for Clock Setting, time information is then acquired and set automatically . With âÂÂManualâ selected, you then need to manually set the correct time again . 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂClockâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂClock SettingâÂÂ, and then press / to select â Autoâ or âÂÂManualâÂÂ. Clock Clock Setting Clock Set Channel Time Zone D.S.T . Time & Date 0 at ANT -B A TLANTIC Adjust Off Auto 01/01/2003 SA T 12:30AM ⢠If you select â AutoâÂÂ, the date and time will be automatically corrected. 5 Pr ess / to select âÂÂClock Set ChannelâÂÂ, and then press / to select a TV channel to be used for auto clock setting. 6 Pr ess / to select âÂÂTime ZoneâÂÂ, and then press / to select a time zone for your area. 7 Pr ess / to select âÂÂD.S.T .âÂÂ, and then press / to select âÂÂOnâ or âÂÂOff â depending on whether summer time is employed in your area. ⢠When selecting â Autoâ for âÂÂClock SettingâÂÂ, be sure to connect the Antenna B input terminal to the output of the VHF/UHF antenna or Cable Converter . See page 26. PDP-ELITE-Eng (40-56) 9/9/03, 11:45 46
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 47 En 8 Pr ess / to select âÂÂTime & DateâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . ⢠The date & time entr y screen appears. Enter the current date and time using / and / , and then press ENTER . Time & Date Date Time 01 / 01 / 2003 SA T 12 : 32 AM 9 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠When the time has not yet been set, the REC TIMER indicator on the front of the Media Receiver blinks. ⢠When the time has not yet been set, you cannot view EPG information , use auto channel select, and preset TV programs for recording. AV Selection AV Selection gives you five viewing options to choose from to best match the Plasma Display System environ- ment, which can var y due to factors like room bright- ness, type of program watched or the type of image input from external equipment. 1 Pr ess AV SELECTION . â¢P resent AV Selection mode appears. 2 Pr ess AV SELECTION again before the mode displayed on the screen disappears. â¢F or AV source, the mode is switched in the order ; ST ANDARD, DYNAMIC, MOVIE, GAME, then USER . â¢F or PC source, the mode is switched between ST ANDARD and USER . PDP-ELITE-Eng (40-56) 9/9/03, 11:45 47
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 48 En Y ou can also use the menu to change the options. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂPictureâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select â AV SelectionâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select the desired option, and then press ENTER . AV Selection ST ANDARD DYNAMIC MOVIE GAME USER Fo r AV source It em Descrip tion ST AND ARD F or a highly defined image in a normally bright room D YNAMIC F or a very sharp image with the maximum contr ast This mode does not allo w manual image qualit y adjustment. MO VIE F or a movie G AME Lower s image brightness for ea sier viewing. USER Allo ws the user to cust omize set tings as desired. Y ou can set the mode for each input source. Fo r PC source It em Descrip tion ST AND ARD F or a highly defined image in a normally bright room USER Allo ws the user to cust omize set tings as desired. Y ou can set the mode for each input source. 5 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. Pictur e adjustments Adjust the picture to your preference for the chosen A V Selection option (except D YNAMIC). 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP ictureâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select an item to be adjusted, and then press ENTER . Picture AV Selection Contrast Brightness Color Tint Sharpness Pro Adjust Reset ST ANDARD 40 0 0 0 0 4 Pr ess / to select the desired level, and then press ENTER . Contrast 40 ⢠When an adjustment screen is in display , you can also change an item to be adjusted, by pressing / . 5 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. PDP-ELITE-Eng (40-56) 9/9/03, 11:45 48
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 49 En For AV source Item but t on but t on Contr ast F or less contr ast F or more contr ast Brightness F or less brightness F or more brightness Color F or less color int ensity F or mor e color intensit y Tin t Skin t ones become Skin t ones become purplish greenish Sharpness F or less sharpness F or more sharpness For PC source Item but t on but t on Contr ast F or less contr ast F or more contr ast Brightness F or less brightness F or more brightness Red F or weaker r ed F or stronger r ed Green F or weaker green F or stronger green Blue F or weaker blue F or stronger blue Fo r PC source, the following screen appears: Picture AV Selection Contrast Brightness Red Green Blue Reset ST ANDARD 40 0 0 0 0 â¢T o make settings for âÂÂPureCinemaâÂÂ, âÂÂColor T empâÂÂ, âÂÂMPEG NRâÂÂ, âÂÂDNRâÂÂ, âÂÂCTIâÂÂ, âÂÂDREâÂÂ, and âÂÂColor ManagementâÂÂ, select âÂÂP ro Adjustâ in step 3, and then press ENTER . F or the subsequent procedures, see pages 49 to 52. â¢T o restore the factor y defaults for all the items, press / to select âÂÂResetâ in step 3, and then press ENTER . A confirmation screen appears. P ress / to select âÂÂY esâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . PureCinema Automatically detects a film-based source (originally encoded at 24 frames/second), analyzes it, then recre- ates each still film frame for high-definition picture quality . 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP ictureâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP ro AdjustâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP ureCinemaâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select the desired parameter , and then press ENTER . PureCinema Off ADV Standard Item De scription Off Deactiv at es the PureCinema. Standard Pr oduces smooth and vivid moving image s (film specific) b y automatically de tecting r ecorded image informa tion when displaying D VD or 1 0 80i HD TV images (e.g., movies) ha ving 2 4 frame s per second. AD V Pr oduces smooth and qualit y moving images (as shown on thea ter scr eens) by converting t o 7 2 Hz when displaying D VD images (e.g., movies) ha ving 2 4 frames per second. 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢Y ou cannot select âÂÂStandardâ when 480p or 720p signals are being input. PDP-ELITE-Eng (40-56) 9/9/03, 11:45 49
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 50 En Color temperatur e Adjust the color temperature to give a better white balance. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂPictureâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂPro AdjustâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂColor T empâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select the desired level, and then press ENTER . Color T emp High Mid-High Mid-Low Low Manual Mid It em Descrip tion High White with bluish t one Mid-High Intermediat e tone bet ween High and Mid Mid Natur al tone Mid-Lo w Intermedia t e tone be t ween Mid and Lo w Lo w White with r eddish tone Manual Colour temper ature adjust ed to your pr eference 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. Y ou can manually adjust the color temperature, using the following procedure: 1 Select âÂÂManualâ in step 5 above, and then press and hold ENTER for more than three seconds to display the manual adjustment screen. 2 Pr ess / to select an item to be adjusted, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select the desired level, and then press ENTER . Item but t on but t on R High F or weaker red F or stronger r ed G High F or weaker green F or stronger green B High F or weaker blue F or stronger blue R Low F or weaker r ed F or stronger red G Low F or weaker gr een F or stronger gr een B Low F or weaker blue F or stronger blue â¢T o perform adjustment for another item, press RETURN , and then repeat steps 2 and 3 . â¢Y ou may press / to immediately change an item to be adjusted. 4 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. F ine adjustment for bright portions F ine adjustment for dark portions PDP-ELITE-Eng (40-56) 9/9/03, 11:45 50
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 51 En DNR Select the DNR (Digital Noise Reduction) level to eliminate video noise for a clean crisp image. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP ictureâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP ro AdjustâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDNRâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select the desired level, and then press ENTER . DNR Off High Mid Low Item De scription Off Deactiv at es the DNR. High Enhanced DNR Mid St andar d DNR Low Moder at e DNR 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. MPEG NR This eliminates mosquito noise from video images when a DTV channel is watched or a DVD is played, resulting in noise-free images. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP ictureâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP ro AdjustâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂMPEG NRâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select the desired parameter , and then press ENTER . MPEG NR Off High Low Mid Item Description Off Deactiv at es the MPEG NR. High Enhanced MPEG NR Mid St andard MPEG NR Low Moder ate MPEG NR 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. PDP-ELITE-Eng (40-56) 9/9/03, 11:45 51
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 52 En CTI Use the CTI (Color T ransient Improvement) to make images have clearer color contours. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂPictureâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂPro AdjustâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂCTIâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select the desired parameter , and then press ENTER . CTI Off On It em Descrip tion Off Deactivat es the CTI. On A ctiv at es the CTI. 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. DRE Use the DRE (Dynamic Range Expander) to adjust dark and bright portions on images so that the contrast between brightness and darkness becomes clearer . 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP ictureâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP ro AdjustâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDREâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select the desired parameter , and then press ENTER . DRE Off High Mid Low Item Description Off Deactivat e s the DRE. High Enhanced DRE Mid St andard DRE Low Moder ate DRE 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. PDP-ELITE-Eng (40-56) 9/9/03, 11:45 52
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 53 En Color Management Pe rf orm fine hue adjustment for each basic color . 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP ictureâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP ro AdjustâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂColor ManagementâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select an item to be adjusted, and then press ENTER . Color Management 0 0 0 0 0 0 Y R G C B M 6 Pr ess / to select the desired level. Item but t on but ton Red Closer to magent a Closer to y ellow Y ellow Closer t o red Closer t o gr een Green Closer t o yellow Closer t o cyan Cy an Closer t o green Closer t o blue Blue Closer to cy an Closer to magent a Magenta Closer t o blue Closer to r ed â¢T o per form adjustment for another item, press RETURN , and then repeat steps 5 and 6. â¢Y ou may press / to immediately change an item to be adjusted. 7 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. Sound adjustments Adjust the sound to your preference for the chosen A V Selection option. See page 47. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSoundâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select an item to be adjusted, and then press / to select the desired level. Bass Balance T reble Reset FOCUS Front Surround 0 0 Off Off 2 Sound ST ANDARD Item but t on but t on Tr eble F or weak er tr eble F or stronger treble Bass F or weak er bass F or stronger bass Balance Decr eases audio fr om Decrease s audio from the right speak er the left speaker 4 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢T o restore the factor y defaults for all the items, press / to select âÂÂResetâ in step 3, and then press ENTER . A confirmation screen appears. P ress / to select âÂÂY esâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . PDP-ELITE-Eng (40-56) 9/9/03, 11:45 53
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 54 En FOCUS This shifts the sound coming direction (sound images) upward and produces clear sound contours. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSoundâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂFOCUSâÂÂ, and then press / to select the desired parameter . Bass Balance T reble Reset FOCUS Front Surround 0 0 Off 2 Sound ST ANDARD On It em Description Off Deactivat es the F OCUS. (factory default) On A ctivat es the FOCUS. 4 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. Front Sur round This provides three-dimensional sound effects and/or deep, rich bass. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSoundâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂF ront SurroundâÂÂ, and then press / to select the desired parameter . Bass Balance T reble Reset FOCUS Front Surround 0 0 On 2 Sound ST ANDARD T ruBass SRS Item Description Off Deactivat es both the SR S and T ruBass. SRS R eproduce s highly effective thr ee- dimensional sound. Tr uBa ss Pr ovides deep, rich bass using a new (fac t ory default) technology . T ruBass SRS Provides bo th T ruBass and SR S effect s. 4 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠(WOW) designates a status where the FOCUS is on and T ruBass SRS has been selected for Front Surround. ⢠is a trademark of SRS Labs, Inc. ⢠WOW technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. PDP-ELITE-Eng (40-56) 9/9/03, 11:45 54
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 55 En Power Control P ower Control provides convenient functions for power saving. Power Control for A V source Energy Save P ower consumption is saved by decreasing picture brightness. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP ower ControlâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂEnergy SaveâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSaveâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . Energy Save Standard Save Item Description Standard Does not decr ease picture brightness. (fac t ory default) Sav e Decr eases pictur e brightness t o sa ve pow er . 5 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢Y ou can also select this function using the Home menu when the input source is a PC. No Signal off The system will be automatically placed into the standby mode if no signal is received for 15 minutes. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP ower ControlâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂNo Signal off âÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂEnableâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . No Signal off Disable Enable Item Description Disable Does not place the sy st em int o the (fac t ory default) standb y mode. Enable Places the s y stem int o the standb y mode if no signal is receiv ed for 1 5 minutes. 5 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢F ive minutes before the system is placed into the standby mode, a message appears every minute. ⢠The system may not be placed into the standby mode when noise signals are present at the Media Receiver after a TV program finishes. PDP-ELITE-Eng (40-56) 9/9/03, 11:45 55
09 Basic Adjustment Settings 56 En No Operation off The system will be automatically placed into the standby mode when no operation is performed for three hours. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂPower ControlâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂNo Operation off âÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂEnableâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . No Operation off Disable Enable It em Descrip tion Disable Does not place the s yst em into the (factory default) standb y mode. Enable Places the syst em into the st andby mode if no oper ation is performed for three hour s. 5 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢F ive minutes before the system is placed into the standby mode, a message appears every minute. Power Contr ol for PC source P ower Management The system will be automatically placed into the standby mode when no signal is received from the personal computer . 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP ower ControlâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP ower ManagementâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂMode1âÂÂor âÂÂMode2âÂÂ, and then press ENTER . Power Management Off Mode1 Mode2 Item Description Off No power management (fac t ory default) Mode1 ⢠Places the s yst em into the st andb y mode when no signal is received fr om the personal comput er for eight minut es. ⢠Ev en when you start using the comput er and a signal is receiv ed again, the sy stem sta ys off. ⢠The s yst em is switched on again by pressing ST ANDB Y/ON on the Plasma Displa y or TV a on the remot e control unit. Mode2 ⢠Places the s yst em into the st andb y mode when no signal is received for eight seconds. ⢠When y ou start using the comput er and a signal is receiv ed again, the s yst em is switched on. ⢠The s yst em is switched on again by pressing ST ANDB Y/ON on the Plasma Displa y or TV a on the remot e control unit. 5 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. PDP-ELITE-Eng (40-56) 9/9/03, 11:45 56
10 Electr onic Program Guide (EPG) (for DTV Only) 57 En EPG display format The Electronic P rogram Guide (EPG) shows the table of scheduled digital TV programs and detailed information about individual programs. It also allows you to easily select and tune to a desired program. The EPG Screen consists of the schedule window , information window , and picture window . This section describes information to be displayed on the schedule and information windows. The picture window shows moving images of a TV program watched when DTV GUIDE is pressed. â¢F or digital TV programs that do not provide EPG information, you cannot watch the corresponding EPG information . ⢠If the current time has not been correctly set, there may be TV programs whose EPG information is not displayed. ******* 7:00 PM â 8:30 PM ******* ******* 1.01 1.02 3.01 4.01 4.02 ABC ABC CBS NBC NBC Program A Program F Program K 11:30pm 11:00pm 10:30pm 10:00pm 9:30pm Program N Program G Program H Program I Program J Program O Program P Program L Program M Schedule window Pi cture window Information window Schedule window OCT . 25. MON 7:15pm A ABC CBS NBS NNNNNNN 1.01 1.12 3.01 14.11 15.11 Program A Program B Program C Program D Program E Program I Program J Program G Program H Program F 9:30pm 9:00pm 8:30pm 8:00pm 12 3 2 45 6 8 7 1 C urrent date and time 2 Appears when the schedule table can be scrolled forward or backward. 3 Ti me schedule 4 Station name 5 Channel number 6 P rogram title 7 Highlights the currently selected channel. 8 Appears when other programs (often short ones) have been scheduled for the period. PDP-ELITE-Eng (57-64) 9/9/03, 11:45 57
10 Electronic Program Guide (EPG) (for DTV Only) 58 En Infor mation window ... More Information DTV INFO 8:00pmâÂÂ9:00pm WWWWWWW 31 1.1 11 STEREO CC FV TV -PG NC-17 1 6 5 7 8 2 6 3 4 1 S tation name 2 Channel number 3 P rogram time schedule 4 P rogram title 5 A blue icon appears when the program has been preset for auto channel select; and a red icon appears when it has been preset for recording. 6 Appears when other programs have been scheduled for the period. Y ou will find this arrow only for programs with ( 8 ) shown on the schedule window . 7 Shows services available for the program and ratings for parent control. 8 Information about the program ⢠The schedule window may show sections whose bottom right corners have been folded. This indicates that other programs (often short ones) have been scheduled for that period. T o view the title of such a program and related information, highlight a folded section, and then press / . â¢F or programs whose title and/or time information have not been acquired, âÂÂNo Titleâ appears. Using the EPG Use the following procedure to check the schedule of digital TV programs, view information about desired programs, and/or select programs to watch. 1 Pr ess DTV GUIDE . ⢠The EPG screen appears. ⢠âÂÂDownloading EPG data now â appears on the picture window . ⢠When EPG data acquisition is finished, the picture window shows moving images of a TV program watched when DTV GUIDE is pressed. 2 Pr ess / and / to select a desired TV program. EPG ******* 7:00 PM â 8:30 PM ******* ******* APR.11.Fri 7:00PM 7:30PM 8:00PM 8:30PM 7:34PM ******* 12.08 12.05 ******* ******* 12.06 ******* 12.07 ******* ******* ******* ******* ******* â¢I nformation about the selected program appears in the information window . â¢T o watch a program currently on air , select the program, and then press ENTER . â¢Y ou can check information about programs scheduled for up to 12 coming hours. ⢠Depending on conditions, it may take some time to acquire EPG data. PDP-ELITE-Eng (57-64) 9/9/03, 11:46 58
10 Electr onic Program Guide (EPG) (for DTV Only) 59 En 3 To view more information (not current displayed) about the selected program, press DTV INFO . ⢠Detailed information appears on the schedule window . EPG ***** *** MONO 4:00 PM â 7:00 PM **************************************************************************************** **************************************************************************************** **************************************************************************************** **************************************************************************************** **************************************************************************************** **************************************************************************************** **************************************************************************************** **************************************************************************************** **************************************************************************************** ****************************************************** ****************************************************** ******** ******** ***** *** â¢W ith / shown in the schedule window , you can scroll the window by pressing / . â¢T o quit display of detailed information, press DTV INFO again (or RETURN ). 4 To quit the Program Guide, press DTV GUIDE again. ⢠The schedule window does not show finished programs. ⢠When the power to the system is switched off , all acquired EPG data is cleared. Presetting TV pr ograms using the EPG Using the EPG, you can easily preset digital TV pro- grams for watching later (auto channel select), record- ing with a D-VHS recorder , or recording via a VCR controller . Using auto channel select W ith the power to the system left on, this function automatically selects the preset TV program when its on-air time comes. Then you will not miss watching an important TV program when you are enjoying another TV program. 1 Pr ess DTV GUIDE . ⢠The EPG screen appears. 2 Pr ess / and / to select a program to be preset, and then press ENTER . ⢠Select a program not yet started. â¢A setup menu appears. EPG ******* 8:30 PM â 10:00 PM ******* ******* Reservation Setting Program View Program Rec ****** 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP rogram ViewâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . â¢A dialog box for confirmation appears. EPG ******* 8:30 PM â 10:00 PM ******* ******* Reservation Setting Program View Pr ogram Rec ****** OK Cancel PDP-ELITE-Eng (57-64) 9/9/03, 11:46 59
10 Electronic Program Guide (EPG) (for DTV Only) 60 En 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂOKâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . ⢠The program is preset and the schedule table is restored. â¢A blue square icon appears for the preset program. â¢A black icon appears for overlapped presetttings. 5 Pr ess DTV GUIDE to exit the P rogram Guide. W ith the system switched on , a channel switch alarm message approximately 30 seconds before execution and the channel is switched a short time before the start of the program. ⢠Auto channel select is not executed when the system is in the standby mode. â¢F inish presetting operations one minute before the start of the program; otherwise presettings may fail. â¢F or priorities about overlapped presettings, see âÂÂP riority rules for overlapped presettingsâ on page 63. Recording TV pr ograms using a D-VHS r ecor der Use the following procedure to preset TV programs for recording with a connected D- VHS recorder . 1 Pr ess DTV GUIDE . ⢠The EPG screen appears. 2 Pr ess / and / to select a program to be preset, and then press ENTER . ⢠Select a program not yet started. â¢A setup menu appears. EPG ******* 8:30 PM â 10:00 PM ******* ******* Reservation Setting Program View Program Rec ****** 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP rogram RecâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . EPG ******* 8:30 PM â 10:00 PM ******* ******* Reservation Setting Program View Program Rec ****** â¢A dialog box for mode selection appears. 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂi.LINKâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . EPG ******* 10:00 PM â 11:30 PM ******* ******* Reservation Setting Program View Program Rec ****** Recording T ype ANALOG i.LINK â¢A dialog box for model selection appears. PDP-ELITE-Eng (57-64) 9/9/03, 11:46 60
10 Electr onic Program Guide (EPG) (for DTV Only) 61 En 5 Pr ess / to select the D- VHS recorder model, and then press ENTER . EPG ******* 10:00 PM â 11:30 PM ******* ******* Reservation Setting Program View Pr ogram Rec ****** Recording T ype ANALOG Device i.LINK DâÂÂVHS1 â¢A dialog box for confirmation appears. 6 Pr ess / to select âÂÂOKâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . ⢠The program is preset and the schedule table is restored. â¢A red square icon appears for the preset program. â¢A black icon appears for overlapped presetttings. 7 Pr ess DTV GUIDE to exit the Program Guide. ⢠Switch on the recording equipment at least 30 seconds before the start of the preset program; otherwise recording will not be executed. â¢R ecording is not executed if recordable D- VHS tape is not present in the D- VHS recorder when the preset program starts. This is also true when a D-VHS recorder specified for recording with a timer is not in connection. â¢F inish presetting operations two minutes before the start of the program; otherwise presettings may fail. â¢F or priorities about overlapped presettings, see âÂÂP riority rules for overlapped presettingsâ on page 63. ⢠If you switch off the system using the POWER button, the program presetting will become ineffective. Be careful not to switch off the power . Recording TV pr ograms via a VCR controller If you connect an appropriate VCR controller to the Media Receiver , you can preset digital TV programs for recording with a connected VCR. See page 78. 1 Pr ess DTV GUIDE . ⢠The EPG screen appears. 2 Pr ess / and / to select a program to be preset, and then press ENTER . â¢A setup menu appears. EPG ******* 8:30 PM â 10:00 PM ******* ******* Reservation Setting Program View Program Rec ****** 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP rogram RecâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . EPG ******* 8:30 PM â 10:00 PM ******* ******* Reservation Setting Program View Program Rec ****** â¢A dialog box for mode selection appears. PDP-ELITE-Eng (57-64) 9/9/03, 11:46 61
10 Electronic Program Guide (EPG) (for DTV Only) 62 En Setting the timer manually Using the menu, you can also preset digital TV pro- grams by specifying their scheduled date and time. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂR ec/View T imer âÂÂ, and then press ENTER . ⢠The schedule table appears. Rec/View Timer Timer Date Start Stop Channel Ta r g e t Information T otal:0 Overlap 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 --/-- --/-- --/-- --/-- --/-- --/-- --/-- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- ---.--- ---.--- ---.--- ---.--- ---.--- ---.--- ---.--- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- 1/4 3 Pr ess / to select a list number , then press . â¢Y ou can select any desired list number . 4 Pr ess / to specify a date, and then press . 5 Pr ess / to specify the start hour , and then press . 6 Pr ess / to specify the start minute, and then press . 7 Pr ess / to specify the end hour , and then press . 8 Pr ess / to specify the end minute, and then press . 9 Pr ess / to specify a channel number , and then press . 4 Pr ess / to select â ANALOGâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . EPG ******* 10:00 PM â 11:30 PM ******* ******* Reservation Setting Program View Pr ogram Rec ****** Recording T ype ANALOG i.LINK â¢A dialog box for confirmation appears. 5 Pr ess / to select âÂÂOKâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . ⢠The program is preset and the schedule table is restored. â¢A red square icon appears for the preset program. â¢A black icon appears for overlapped presetttings. 6 Pr ess DTV GUIDE to exit the P rogram Guide. ⢠Switch on the recording equipment at least 30 seconds before the start of the preset program; otherwise recording will not be executed. â¢F inish presetting operations two minutes before the start of the program; otherwise presettings may fail. â¢F or priorities about overlapped presettings, see âÂÂP riority rules for overlapped presettingsâ on page 63. ⢠Confirm that the video output terminals on the Media R eceiver have been connected to the signal input terminals on the VCR to be used for recording. ⢠If you switch off the system using the POWER button, the program presetting will become ineffective. Be careful not to switch off the power . PDP-ELITE-Eng (57-64) 9/9/03, 11:46 62
10 Electr onic Program Guide (EPG) (for DTV Only) 63 En 10 Pr ess / to select âÂÂVIEWâÂÂ, â ANALOGâ or a D- VHS recorder , and then press ENTER . ⢠Select â VIEWâ when presetting the program for auto channel select. Select â ANALOG â when presetting it for recording via a VCR controller . Select a D- VHS recorder when presetting it for recording with a D- VHS recorder . â¢I n the Info field, âÂÂView OKâ appears when presetting for auto channel select is accepted, and âÂÂRec OKâ appears when presetting for recording is accepted. Rec/View Timer Timer Date Start Stop Channel Ta r g e t Information To t a l:1 1/4 Overlap 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 APR 11FRI --/-- --/-- --/-- --/-- --/-- --/-- 9:30 PM -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- 11:00 PM -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- E 12.05 ---.--- ---.--- ---.--- ---.--- ---.--- ---.--- VIEW View OK -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- 11 If presetting another program, press / to select another list number , and then repeat steps 4 to 6. â¢Y ou can preset up to 28 programs. 12 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠If the schedule of the selected program is overlapped with another presetting, âÂÂOverlapâ appears in the Info field. P resettigs with âÂÂOverlapâ may not be partially or entirely executed. ⢠When entering into the schedule table, pressing ENTER causes the cursor to jump to an empty field. â¢P resetting becomes ineffective if the start time and the end time are identical or if presetting operations are per formed within two minutes before the start of the program. â¢P resettings made using the EPG are automatically shown in the schedule table. â¢F or presetting made using the EPG, âÂÂEâ appears beside the channel number in the schedule table. If you alter the presetting content, âÂÂEâ disappears. â¢F or priorities about overlapped presettings, see âÂÂP riority rules for overlapped presettingsâ on page 63. ⢠If you switch off the system using the POWER button, the program presetting will become ineffective. Be careful not to switch off the power . Priority rules for overlapped presettings When preset TV programs are overlapped, the following three rules are used to determine a higher priority . If more than one of the three rules are met, the rules are applied in the order; 1, 2, then 3. Rul e 1 : Pr esetting for recording is given a higher priority over presetting for auto channel select. Rul e 2 : If two presettings are overlapped, presetting with earlier start time is given a higher priority . If two presettings are sequential, the last portion of the first program is not re- corded for 15 seconds because recording of the second program is started at the exact start time. Rul e 3 : If presettings at the same start time are overlapped, presetting with a smaller list number is given a higher priority . P resetting for recording P resetting for auto channel select The shaded area is not executed. P rogram A P rogram B The shaded area is not executed. PDP-ELITE-Eng (57-64) 9/9/03, 11:46 63
10 Electronic Program Guide (EPG) (for DTV Only) 64 En Changing/ canceling TV pr ogram presettings Using the EPG Use the following procedure to change or cancel program presettings using the EPG. 1 Pr ess DTV GUIDE . ⢠The EPG screen appears. 2 Pr ess / and / to select the desired preset program, and then press ENTER . â¢A dialog box appears. 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂEditâ or âÂÂDeleteâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . Edit Delete Select [Edit] or [Delete]. PLASMA DISPLA Y ⢠If you select âÂÂDeleteâÂÂ, the program presetting is canceled. ⢠If you select âÂÂEditâÂÂ, go to step 4. 4 Pr ess / and / to make new selections, and then press ENTER . â¢A dialog box for confirmation appears. 5 Pr ess / to select âÂÂOKâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . EPG ******* 8:00 PM â 9:30 PM ******* ******* Reservation Setting STEREO Program View Program Rec ****** Recording T ype ANALOG OK DâÂÂVHS1:************** Cancel Device i.LINK DâÂÂVHS1 ⢠The presetting is corrected and the schedule table is restored. ⢠When you want to quit recording (in progress) started by program presetting, for example, to change the channel, cancel the program presetting using the menu. In this case, you cannot cancel the program presetting using the EPG. Using the menu Use the following procedure to change or cancel program presetings using the menu. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂR ec/View T imer âÂÂ, and then press ENTER . ⢠The schedule table appears. Rec/View Timer Timer Date Start Stop Channel Ta r g e t Information T otal:0 Overlap 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 --/-- --/-- --/-- --/-- --/-- --/-- --/-- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- -- : -- ---.--- ---.--- ---.--- ---.--- ---.--- ---.--- ---.--- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- 1/4 3 Pr ess / to select a list number to be changed. 4 Pr ess to change the presetting or press (or ENTER ) to cancel it. ⢠If you press (or ENTER), the cursor moves to the Info field where âÂÂDeleteâ appears. P ress ENTER to execute cancel. ⢠If you press , go to step 5. P ressing with the cursor positioned at the Info field also allows you to go to step 5. 5 Pr ess / to select a field to be corrected and press / to make a new entry . 6 R epeat step 4 to enter for all fields to be corrected. 7 Pr ess ENTER . â¢â Vi ew OKâ or âÂÂRec OKâ appears in the Info field. 8 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. PDP-ELITE-Eng (57-64) 9/9/03, 11:46 64
11 Enjoying through External Equipment 65 En IN SERVICE ONL Y MONITOR OUT DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL INPUT 1 COMPONENT VIDEO S400 DTV-ANTENNA IN INPUT 3 VCR CONTROL A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN IN OUT CONTROL OUT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y AC INLET BLACK WHITE SYSTEM CABLE R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y C B /PB C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO INPUT 2 (TS) W atching a DVD image Connecting a DVD player Use the INPUT 1 terminals when connecting a DVD player and other audiovisual equipment. Displaying a DVD image To watch a DVD image, press INP UT 1 on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select INPUT1. DVD player Y ou can connect many types of external equipment to your Plasma Display System, like a DVD player , VCR, personal computer , game console, and camcorder . To view images coming from external equipment, select the input source using the INPUT buttons on the remote control (page 16) or the INPUT button on the Plasma Display . Media Receiver (r ear view) AV cable (commercially available) Component Video cable (commercially available) S- Video cable (commercially available) â¢T o protect all equipment, always turn off the system before connecting to a DVD player , VCR, personal computer , game console, camcorder , or other exter- nal equipment. â¢R efer to the relevant operation manual (DVD player , personal computer , etc.) carefully before making connections. â¢R efer to your DVD player operation manual for the signal type. ⢠The INPUT 1 terminals are checked for cable connec- tions in the order where; 1) Component V ideo, 2) S- V ideo, 3) V ideo. ⢠Connect external equipment to only terminals that are to be actually used. â¢Y ou can also use the INPUT 3 terminals when con- necting only with the Component V ideo output terminals on a DVD player . PDP-ELITE-Eng (65-80) 9/9/03, 11:46 65
11 Enjoying through External Equipment 66 En W atching a VCR image Connecting a VCR Use the INPUT 2 terminals when connecting a VCR and other audiovisual equipment. Displaying a VCR image To watch a VCR image, press INPUT 2 on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select INPUT2. ⢠The INPUT 2 terminals are checked for cable connec- tions in the order where; 1) S- Video , 2) V ideo. ⢠Connect external equipment to only terminals that are to be actually used. VCR IN SERVICE ONL Y MONITOR OUT DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL INPUT 1 COMPONENT VIDEO S400 DTV-ANTENNA IN INPUT 3 VCR CONTROL A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN IN OUT CONTROL OUT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y AC INLET BLACK WHITE SYSTEM CABLE R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO INPUT 2 (TS) Media Receiver (r ear view) AV cable (commercially available) S- Video cable (commercially available) VCR PDP-ELITE-Eng (65-80) 9/9/03, 11:46 66
11 Enjoying through External Equipment 67 En Game console/Camcorder Media Receiver (fr ont view) AV cable (commercially available) S- Video cable (commercially available) ⢠The INPUT 4 terminals are checked for cable connec- tions in the order where; 1) Component V ideo, 2) S- Video , 3) V ideo. ⢠Connect external equipment to only terminals that are to be actually used. Component Video cable (commercially available) Displaying an image of the game console or camcorder To watch an image coming from the game console or camcorder , press INP UT 4 on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select INPUT4. Enjoying a game console or watching camcorder images Connecting a game console or camcorder Use the INPUT 4 terminals to connect a game console, camcorder and other audiovisual equipment. PDP-ELITE-Eng (65-80) 9/9/03, 11:46 67
11 Enjoying through External Equipment 68 En IN SERVICE ONL Y MONITOR OUT DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL INPUT 1 COMPONENT VIDEO S400 DTV-ANTENNA IN INPUT 3 VCR CONTROL A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN IN OUT CONTROL OUT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y AC IN LET BLACK WHITE SYSTEM CABLE R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO INPUT 2 (TS) Media Receiver (r ear view) VCR controller (for presetting digital TV programs for recording) S- Video cable (commercially available) AV cable (commercially available) VCR or DVD recor der Recording digital TV pr ograms using a VCR or DVD recor der If you connect recording equipment such as a VCR or DVD recorder to the MONITOR OUT terminals on the rear of the Media Receiver , you can record, for example, digital TV programs using the recording equipment. Y ou can also record digital TV programs more easily by using the supplied VCR controller . Connect the VCR controller to the VCR control terminal on the rear of the Media Receiver and then position the controller so that its light emitting section faces the remote control sensor on the recording equipment. F or more informa- tion, see page 78. Connecting a recor der ⢠About the MONITOR OUT terminals The MONITOR OUT terminals cannot output the following signals: 1 Vi deo signals input from the COMPONENT VIDEO terminal 2 Vi deo signals from a personal computer 3 S-V ideo signals when a conventional TV channel is being received 4 S-V ideo signals when Video signals (INPUT 1, 2, and 4) are being input ⢠When watching images played back on a VCR or DVD recorder connected to the MONITOR OUT terminals, select an input source (e.g., TV channel reception) on the recording equipment other than external input sources. Selecting an external input source may result in distorted images or noise. PDP-ELITE-Eng (65-80) 9/9/03, 11:46 68
11 Enjoying through External Equipment 69 En Connecting other audio equipment The digital audio output terminal (optical) on this system can output Dolby Digital signals. Using an optical digital cable, connect an AV receiver to the digital audio output terminal (optical) on the rear of the Media Receiver . This allows audio such as digital TV broadcasting to be played in high quality . Media Receiver (r ear view) IN SERVICE ONL Y MONITOR OUT DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL INPUT 1 COMPONENT VIDEO S400 DTV-ANTENNA IN INPUT 3 VCR CONTROL A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN IN OUT CONTROL OUT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y AC INLET BLACK WHITE SYSTEM CABLE R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO INPUT 2 (TS) AV receiver Audio cable (commercially available) Optical digital cable (commercially available) Switching the optical audio signal type Set up for the DIGIT AL AUDIO output terminal (OPTI- CAL), depending on your A V receiver . 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDigital Audio OutâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . If your AV receiver does not have a digital audio input terminal (optical), connect the MONITOR OUT termi- nals (AUDIO) on the rear of the Media Receiver to the audio input terminals on the AV receiver . ⢠When using the digital audio output terminal (opti- cal), you need to make settings depending on your A V receiver . F or more information, see the user âÂÂs manual for the A V receiver . Connecting an A V receiver 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDolby Digitalâ or âÂÂPCMâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . Digital Audio Out Dolby Digital PCM Item Description PCM Alwa ys outputs in the PCM format (fac t or y default) r egardless of the t ypes of signals. Dolby Digit al F or Dolby Digit al encoded signals, outputs in the Dolb y Digital forma t. F or PCM encoded signals, outputs in the PCM format. 5 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. PDP-ELITE-Eng (65-80) 9/9/03, 11:46 69
11 Enjoying through External Equipment 70 En W atching a D-VHS image What is i.LINK? i.LINK is a digital serial interface for handling digital video, digital audio , and other data in two directions. i.LINK is SonyâÂÂs term for the IEEE 1394 data transport bus. Digital A V equipment compatible with i.LINK can be connected using a single i.LINK cable. The i.LINK interface allows this PDP system to control one of up to two i.LINK compatible devices (in connection) that can be identified. Which i.LINK devices ar e connectable? Fo r i.LINK devices, this system supports only D-VHS recorders. The i.LINK terminals on this system cannot be connected with other equipment such as DVD recorders, digital video cameras, personal computers, and PC peripheral devices because of differences in the specifications. Media Receiver (r ear view) i.LINK cable (commercially available) D- VHS recorder (The function and performance are the same for both terminals.) IN SERVICE ONL Y MONITOR OUT DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL INPUT 1 COMPONENT VIDEO S400 DTV-ANTENNA IN INPUT 3 VCR CONTROL A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN IN OUT CONTROL OUT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y AC INLET BLACK WHITE SYSTEM CABLE R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO INPUT 2 (TS) To use i.LINK, you need to connect only an i.LINK cable; you need not connect cables to the video and audio terminals. What can be r ecorded through i.LINK? W ith D - VHS recorders connected to this system through i.LINK, you can record only digital TV pro- grams. Y ou cannot record conventional TV channels nor contents coming from external input sources and personal computers. Connecting D-VHS recor ders Use the i.LINK terminals when connecting D- VHS recorders. When connecting a single D- VHS recorder PDP-ELITE-Eng (65-80) 9/9/03, 11:46 70
11 Enjoying through External Equipment 71 En When connecting two D-VHS r ecorders Y ou can connect two D - VHS recorders directly to the i.LINK terminals on the rear of the Media Receiver . Using i.LINK cables you can also connect up to two D- VHS recorders in a daisy chain. Precautions about i.LINK connections ⢠Use S400 i.LINK cables that have 4-pin plugs and are shorter than 3.5 m (11.48 feet). ⢠Some i.LINK devices cannot relay data when their power is off . ⢠Do not make the following loop connections: Media Receiver D- VHS recorder D- VHS recorder Media Receiver D- VHS recorder Media Receiver D- VHS recorder D-VHS r ecorder i.LINK cable Media Receiver D-VHS r ecorder i.LINK cables D- VHS r ecorder PDP-ELITE-Eng (65-80) 9/9/03, 11:46 71
11 Enjoying through External Equipment 72 En Displaying a D-VHS image To watch a D- VHS image, press i.LINK on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select i.LINK. Useful and important notification Useful information â¢D - VHS recorders connected through i.LINK can play back digital TV programs recorded using this system. â¢D - VHS recorders connected through i.LINK can record only digital TV programs. Using i.LINK, those recorders cannot record conventional TV channels nor contents coming from external input sources. ⢠This system can be simultaneously connected with up to two D- VHS recorders that support i.LINK. Y ou can control one of these D- VHS recorders (basic functions only). ⢠Some D- VHS recorders connected through i.LINK may not allow this system to control through the control panel screen or to display images and output sound. â¢T o record digital TV programs using connected D- VHS recorders, use D- VHS tape. Y ou cannot use VHS tape nor S- VHS tape. ⢠Some D- VHS recorders connected though i.LINK may not allow this system to play back images and sound recorded on VHS tape, S- VHS tape, or (if with analog signals) D-VHS tape. If this is the case, connect the analog output terminals on the D-VHS recorder to INPUT 1, 2, 3, or 4 terminals on this system. See pages 65 to 67. ⢠This system supports the Digital T ransmission Con- tent P rotection (DTCP) technology . The DTCP is a copy protection technology that presents data coding and device authentification. ⢠i.LINK may not allow copy-restricted video, audio , and other data to be copied from one i.LINK device to another . It also may not allow video, audio, and other data to be transferred with equipment that does not support the DTCP . Precautions ⢠While one D-VHS recorder connected through i.LINK is recording or playing back, do not switch on or off the other connected D-VHS recorder (not in use) or do not connect or disconnect the i.LINK cable from that D-VHS recorder . Doing so can result in image and sound interruption. ⢠Some D- VHS recorders that support i.LINK cannot relay data when their power is off . Check the user âÂÂs manual for your D- VHS recorder . This system allows you to change the setting for data relay in the standby mode. See âÂÂSetting up for i.LINK standbyâ on page 76. PDP-ELITE-Eng (65-80) 9/9/03, 11:46 72
11 Enjoying through External Equipment 73 En Setting up for controlling a D-VHS r ecorder Y ou can operate the connected D - VHS recorder from the Plasma Display that shows the control panel screen. After making the connections, use the menu to specif y the model of the D-VHS recorder to be operated. Y ou can operate only a single D-VHS recorder from the Plasma Display . 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂi.LINK SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂi.LINK ListâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . ⢠The list of the registered D-VHS recorders (i.LINK list) appears. i.LINK List Delete All Name Maker Number Status 1/1 DâÂÂVHS1 ****** ****** Connected 5 Pr ess / to select the D- VHS recorder model to be operated, and then press ENTER . i.LINK Setting Connect Rename Replace Delete DâÂÂVHS1 ****** ****** Connected 6 Pr ess / to select âÂÂConnectâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 7 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠The following information appears at the right end of the i.LINK list to indicate the connection status of the D- VHS recorders: Control: Data connection with the D-VHS recorder has been established and the recorder is ready for control. Connected: The D - VHS recorder has been physi- cally connected, and can be controlled if it is selected for control. Other: Equipment other than a D- VHS re- corder has been physically connected and thus cannot be controlled. âÂÂ: Currently not physically connected PDP-ELITE-Eng (65-80) 9/9/03, 11:46 73
11 Enjoying through External Equipment 74 En Operating the control panel scr een The control panel screen appears when you press i.LINK . It disappears when you press i.LINK again . T o select a button on the control panel screen , press / or / , and then press ENTER on the remote control. Name Status(Play) i.LINK/DTV D Device 00:00:00 1 2 3 @ # $ % 6 9- 5 780 = 4 ~ ! 1 Shows the model and manufacture name of the D- VHS recorder to be operated. 2 Shows counter time output by the D- VHS recorder . 3 Shows the current status of the D- VHS recorder . 4 Switches on and off the D- VHS recorder . 5 Starts recording. 6 R ewinds the tape. 7 R ewinds to the start of the current program. 8 P auses the tape. 9 Starts playing back. 0 Stops the current tape motion . - Fo r wards the tape. = Fo r wards to the start of the next program. ~ Switches the input source between i.LINK and DTV . ! Allows you to change the D- VHS recorder to be operated. After pressing this button, press / to select the desired model from the list, and then press ENTER . @ Shows the type of inserted video tape; D for D- VHS, S for S- VHS, and no display for VHS. # Appears when any tape has been inserted. $ Appears when the inserted tape has been write protected. The inserted tape cannot be used for recording when this indicator appears. % Appears when the D- VHS recorder has been preset for recording and is in the standby mode. ⢠If no i.LINK device has been connected, âÂÂNo i.LINK devices are connected.â appears. If this is the case, connect i.LINK devices. ⢠If none of the connected equipment has been sup- ported for control, you cannot execute control. Editing the i.LINK list The i.LINK list shows all devices connected through i.LINK interfaces. In this list, you can change the name or order of devices or delete device information . To change the name of a device: 1 Pr ess / to select the desired device from the list, and then press ENTER . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂR enameâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . i.LINK Setting Connect Rename Replace Delete DâÂÂVHS1 ****** ****** Connected 3 Pr ess / to change the character for the first digit. Rename OK Cancel Input the device name. DâÂÂVHS1 ****** ****** Connected D â¢Y ou can select A to Z, 0 to 9, special codes, and space in the order . 4 Pr ess / to move the cursor to the second digit. 5 Pr ess / to change the character for the second digit. 6 R epeat steps 3 and 4 to enter up to eight digits, and then press ENTER . 7 Pr ess / to select OK, and then press ENTER . PDP-ELITE-Eng (65-80) 9/9/03, 11:46 74
11 Enjoying through External Equipment 75 En To change the order of devices: 1 Pr ess / to select the desired device from the list, and then press ENTER . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂR eplaceâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . i.LINK Setting Connect Rename Replace Delete DâÂÂVHS1 ****** ****** Connected 3 Pr ess / to select the new desired position, and then press ENTER . Replace Cancel Name Maker Number Status 1/1 DâÂÂVHS1 ****** ****** Connected DâÂÂVHS2 ****** ****** Connected ⢠The selected device is moved to the selected position. To delete information about a single device: 1 Pr ess / to select the desired device from the list, and then press ENTER . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDeleteâ and then press ENTER . i.LINK Setting Connect Rename Replace Delete DâÂÂVHS1 ****** ****** Connected â¢A confirmation message appears. â¢A warning message appears if the selected device has been preset for recording with the timer or if its power is on . If this is the case, you cannot delete the device that you have selected. 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDeleteâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . Cancel Delete this device? PLASMA DISPLA Y Delete D-VHS â¢A confirmation message appears. 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDeleteâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . Cancel Are you sure y ou want to delete? PLASMA DISPLA Y Delete D-VHS PDP-ELITE-Eng (65-80) 9/9/03, 11:46 75
11 Enjoying through External Equipment 76 En To delete information about all devices: 1 Pr ess to select âÂÂDelete AllâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂY esâ and then press ENTER . No Are you sure y ou want to delete the infomation for all de vices? PLASMA DISPLA Y Ye s â¢A confirmation message appears. â¢A warning message appears if the selected device has been preset for recording with the timer or if its power is on . If you delete a device that has been preset for recording, its all presettings are deleted. 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂY esâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . No Are you sure you want to delete? PLASMA DISPLA Y Ye s â¢A confirmation message appears. 4 Pr ess ENTER to exit the menu. OK Deletion completed. PLASMA DISPLA Y Setting up for i.LINK standby Use the following procedure to enable data transfer between multiple i.LINK devices even when the system is in the standby mode. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂi.LINK SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂi.LINK StandbyâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select âÂÂEnableâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . i.LINK Standby Disable Enable 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢W ith âÂÂEnableâ selected, the system relays data between multiple i.LINK devices even when in the standby mode; the i.LINK circuits are energized in that mode. â¢W ith âÂÂDisableâ (factor y default) selected, less power is consumed when the system is in the standby mode; however the system does not relay data between multiple i.LINK devices. When i.LINK de- vices are not in connection , select âÂÂDisableâÂÂ, result- ing in less power consumption. In standby mode i.LINK device Media Receiver i.LINK device No data relay PDP-ELITE-Eng (65-80) 9/9/03, 11:46 76
11 Enjoying through External Equipment 77 En Signal names for 15-pin mini D-sub connecter 15 14 13 12 9 11 10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 (front view) Pin No. Signal name 1 R 2 G 3 B 4 No t connect ed 5 No t connect ed 6 GND (gr ound) 7 GND (gr ound) 8 GND (gr ound) 9 5V 0 GND (gr ound) - No t connect ed = SD A ~ HD ! VD @ SCL ⢠A Macintosh adaptor may be required for use with some Macintosh computers. W atching an image from a personal computer Connecting a personal computer Use the PC terminals to connect a personal computer . ⢠The PC input terminals are DDC1/2B -compatible. â¢R efer to page 107 for a list of personal computer signals compatible with the Plasma Display System. Media Receiver (fr ont view) ø 3.5 mm stereo mini-plug cable (commercially available) RGB cable (commercially available) Pe rsonal computer Displaying an image from a personal com- puter When connecting to a personal computer , the input signal type is automatically identified. If the personal computer image does not come in clearly , you may need to use Auto Setup in the menu. See page 81. To watch an image coming from the personal com- puter , press PC on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select âÂÂPCâÂÂ. ⢠The PC terminals cannot be used for audiovisual equipment. PDP-ELITE-Eng (65-80) 9/9/03, 11:46 77
11 Enjoying through External Equipment 78 En VCR CONTROL IN SERVICE ONLY MONITOR OUT DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL INPUT 1 COMPONENT VIDEO S400 DTV-ANTENNA IN INPUT 3 VCR CONTROL A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN IN OUT CONTROL OUT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y AC INLET BLACK WHITE SYSTEM CABLE R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO INPUT 2 (TS) P osition the light emitting section on the VCR controller cable so that it faces the VCR. Connecting a VCR controller Connect the supplied VCR controller to the Media R eceiver . This allows you to preset digital TV programs for recording, using the Electronic P rogram Guide. When the specified time comes, the system in the standby mode is automatically switched on and the specified TV program is recorded using the connected VCR or DVD recorder . ⢠Make sure to leave the VCR power on when preset- ting TV programs for recording with the VCR control- ler . ⢠Be sure to firmly connect the VCR controller to the VCR control terminal on the rear of the Media R eceiver . If you have mistakenly connected it to the CONTROL IN or CONTROL OUT terminal, remote control or other operations may be disabled. (Once you have positioned the VCR controller , secure with the tape provided.) R emote control sensor Media Receiver (r ear view) VCR or DVD recor der Use the following procedure to set the manufacture of the recording equipment: 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select â VCR ControlâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select the manufacture of the recording equipment, and then press ENTER . 1 / 5 VCR Control Pioneer ******** ******** ******** ******** ******** ******** ******** ⢠The screen for recording test appears. 5 Check that the power to the recording equipment is on, and insert tape into the slot. â¢I nsert tape you think it all right to erase its contents. The contents will be erased because R ec and Stop codes are output in the test. ⢠Check that the light emitting section on the VCR controller cable faces the recording equipment. 6 Pr ess ENTER to execute recording test. ⢠If the recording equipment fails to start and stop recording, check and change the specified recording equipment manufacture. 7 Pr ess / to select âÂÂYESâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 8 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠Even if you correctly specify the manufacture of the recording equipment, control of some models may be disabled. â¢P erform the recording test when the recording equipment is not in recording standby or is not recording. ⢠The recording test takes approximately 10 seconds. ⢠The PIONEER 1 (DVD recorder) has been set as the factor y default. PDP-ELITE-Eng (65-80) 9/9/03, 11:46 78
11 Enjoying through External Equipment 79 En The lists of controllable r ecording equipment manufactures Manufacture R emot e control type PIONEER 1âÂÂ5 P ANASONIC 1âÂÂ7 PHILIPS 1âÂÂ6 SHARP 1âÂÂ5 T OSHIBA 1âÂÂ4 S AMSUNG 1âÂÂ6 FISHER 1âÂÂ3 GOLDST AR 1 HIT ACHI 1, 2 MAGNA VO X 1 MITSUBISHI 1âÂÂ7 RC A 1âÂÂ6 S ANY O 1âÂÂ3 SONY 1âÂÂ3 JVC 1âÂÂ4 ZENITH 1 GRANDIENTE 1 AKAI 1 MA TSUI 1 AIW A 1 ALB A 1, 2 BUSH 1 THOMSON 1 BAI R D 1 TELEFUNKEN 1 Grunding 1âÂÂ3 MARANTZ 1âÂÂ2 GE 1âÂÂ3 Y AMAHA 1âÂÂ4 CUR TIS MA THIS 1âÂÂ3 FUNAI 1 ADMIRAL 1 KENW OOD 1âÂÂ3 NEC 1, 2 W ARDS 1âÂÂ4 MEMOREX 1 , 2 JC PENNY 1âÂÂ6 Some modes of the listed manufactures may not allow control through the VCR controller . PDP-ELITE-Eng (65-80) 9/9/03, 11:46 79
11 Enjoying through External Equipment 80 En Media Receiver (r ear view) IN CONTROL OUT CONTROL IN OUT CONTROL IN OUT CONTROL IN OUT IN SERVICE ONL Y MONITOR OUT DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL INPUT 1 COMPONENT VIDEO S400 DTV-ANTENNA IN INPUT 3 VCR CONTROL A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN IN OUT CONTROL OUT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y AC INLET BLACK WHITE SYSTEM CABLE R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO INPUT 2 (TS) Connecting control cor ds Connect control codes between the Media R eceiver and other PIONEER equipment having the t logo . Y ou can then operate the connected equipment by sending commands from its remote control unit to the remote control sensor on the Media Receiver . After the CONTROL IN terminals have been connected, the remote control sensors on the connected equip- ment do not accept commands from the remote control units. F ace the remote control units to the remote control sensor on the Plasma Display when operating the connected equipment. ⢠Make sure that the power is turned off when making connections. ⢠Complete all component connections before making control cord connections. About SR The CONTROL OUT terminal on the rear of the Media R eceiver supports SR that allows linked operations with a PIONEER A V receiver . SR presents functions such as the input switch linkage operation function and the DSP surround mode display function . For more information, see the user âÂÂs manual for the PIONEER A V receiver supporting SR . ⢠While in connection through SR , the volume on this system is temporarily minimized. The control cables (commercially available) are mono sound cables with mini plugs (no resistance). PDP-ELITE-Eng (65-80) 9/9/03, 11:46 80
12 Useful Adjustment Settings 81 En Adjusting image positions (A V mode only) Adjust the horizontal and vertical positions of images on the Plasma Display . 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂOptionâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP ositionâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂH/V P osition AdjustâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . Position H/V Position Adjust Reset 5 Pr ess / to adjust the vertical position or press / to adjust the horizontal position. H/V Position Adjust 0 0 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢T o restore the factor y defaults for all the items, press / to select âÂÂResetâ in step 4, and then press ENTER . A confirmation screen appears. P ress / to select âÂÂY esâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . ⢠Adjustments are stored separately according to input source. Adjusting image positions and clock automatically (PC mode only) Use Auto Setup to automatically adjust positions and clock of images coming from a personal computer . 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂOption âÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select â Auto SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . Option Auto Setup Manual Setup ⢠Auto Setup starts. 4 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠When Auto Setup is finished, â Auto Setup com- pleted.â appears. ⢠Even when â Auto Setup completed.â appears, Auto Setup may have failed, depending on conditions. ⢠Auto Setup may fail with a PC image composed of similar patterns or monochrome. If not successful, change the PC image and tr y again . ⢠Be sure to connect the computer to the Media R eceiver and switch it on before starting Auto Setup. PDP-ELITE-Eng (81-96) 9/9/03, 11:47 81
12 Useful Adjustment Settings 82 En Adjusting image positions and clock manually (PC mode only) Usually you can easily adjust the positions and clock of images using Auto Setup. Use Manual Setup to opti- mize the positions and clock of images when neces- sar y . 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂOptionâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂManual SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select the item to be adjusted, and then press ENTER . Manual Setup H/V Position Adjust Clock Phase Reset 0 0 5 Pr ess / (and / ) to per form adjustment. ⢠Use / only when you adjust the vertical position after selecting âÂÂH/V P osition AdjustâÂÂ. 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢T o restore the factory defaults for all the items, press / to select âÂÂResetâ in step 4, and then press ENTER . A confirmation screen appears. P ress / to select âÂÂY esâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . PDP-ELITE-Eng (81-96) 9/9/03, 11:47 82
12 Useful Adjustment Settings 83 En AV mode PC mode ex cept for XGA signals PC mode for XGA signals Selecting a screen size Pr ess S CREEN SIZE to switch among the screen size options selectable for the type of video signals currently received. ⢠Each time you press S CREEN SIZE , the selection is switched. ⢠The selectable screen sizes differ depending on the types of input signals. AV mode Item Description 4:3 F or 4:3 âÂÂst andardâ pictur es. A side bar appear s on each side. FULL F or 1 6:9 squeeze pictur es. ZOOM F or 1 6:9 let terbo x picture s. Bars ma y appear on the t op and bot t om with some progr ams. CINEMA F or 1 4:9 let terbox pictur es. Bar s ma y appear on the t op and bot t om on some progr ams. WIDE In this mode pictur es ar e progr essiv ely stre tched to wa rd each side of the screen. PC mode ex cept for XGA signals Item Description 4:3 F ills the screen without alt ering the input signal a spect r atio. FULL Fu ll 1 6:9 screen displa y Dot by Dot Matche s input signal with same number of scr een pixels. PC mode for XGA signals (Ex. 1024 à768 input at PRO-1110HD) Item Description 4:3 Matches input signal with the same number of scr een pixels. Optimized for 1 02 4 à7 68 displa y FULL1 Fu ll 1 6:9 screen displa y Optimized for 1 02 4 à7 68 displa y FULL2 F or wide signal display Use when displa ying 1 2 80 à7 6 8 signal resolution. ⢠The PC mode above is for the PRO-1110HD. For the PRO-910HD the number of panel pixels is different, so signal processing and actual viewing conditions will vary slightly. ZOOM 4:3 WIDE FULL CINEMA 4:3 Dot by Dot FULL 4:3 FULL2 FULL1 PDP-ELITE-Eng (81-96) 9/9/03, 11:47 83
12 Useful Adjustment Settings 84 En Changing the brightness at both sides of the scr een (Side Mask) W ith the 4:3 screen size selected for the A V mode, you can change the brightness of the gray side masks that appear at both sides of the screen. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂOptionâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSide MaskâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select the desired parameter , and then press ENTER . Side Mask Fixed Auto It em Descrip tion Fixe d Alway s se ts the same brightness for the (factory default) gr ay side ma sks. Aut o Ad justs the brightne ss of the gr a y side masks accor ding t o the brightness of images. 5 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. PDP-ELITE-Eng (81-96) 9/9/03, 11:47 84
12 Useful Adjustment Settings 85 En Sleep Timer When the selected time elapses, the Sleep Timer automatically places the system into the standby mode. Pr ess SLEEP to select the desired time. ⢠The timer starts counting. ⢠Each time you press SLEEP, the selection is switched as below : (cancel) 30 60 90 120 Off (minutes) ⢠The factor y default is âÂÂOff âÂÂ. â¢T o cancel the Sleep Timer , select âÂÂOff â by pressing SLEEP . â¢F ive minutes before the selected time elapses, the remaining time appears ever y minute. Y ou can also use the menu to set the Sleep Timer . 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSleep Timer âÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select the desired time, and then press ENTER . Sleep Timer Remain 90min Off 30min 60min 120min 90min 4 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. PDP-ELITE-Eng (81-96) 9/9/03, 11:47 85
12 Useful Adjustment Settings 86 En Closed caption for conventional TV channels Y our Plasma Display System is equipped with an internal closed caption decoder . Closed caption is a system which allows you to view conversations, narra- tion, and sound effects in TV programs and home videos as subtitles on your Plasma Display screen . ⢠Not all programs and videos offer closed caption. Please look for the â Nâ symbol to ensure that captions will be shown. Activating the closed caption 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂClosed CaptionâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSettingâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select âÂÂOnâ or âÂÂOn If MuteâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . Setting Off On If Mute On It em Descrip tion Off Does not sho w closed captions. (factory default) On Alway s sho ws closed cap tions. On If Mut e Show s closed captions only while sound is being mut ed. 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. Selecting the type of closed captions â¢â CC -1â or âÂÂCC -2â displays subtitles of TV dramas and news programs while allowing a full view of the picture. â¢â T1â or âÂÂT2â superimposes on the picture other information (e.g. TV guide, weather) that is indepen- dent of the TV in progress. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂClosed CaptionâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂChannelâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to change the selection, and then press ENTER . Channel CC-1 TEXT -2 TEXT -1 CC-2 ⢠The factor y default is âÂÂCC -1âÂÂ. 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. PDP-ELITE-Eng (81-96) 9/9/03, 11:47 86
12 Useful Adjustment Settings 87 En Closed caption for digital TV channels Y our Plasma Display System is equipped with an internal closed caption decoder also for digital TV channels. Y ou can enjoy digital closed captions whenever their ser vices are provided. Digital closed captions allow you to change parameters such as fonts and colors. How- ever , some digital TV programs may provide you with only conventional closed captions. If this is the case, conventional closed captions are displayed. Activating the closed caption Use the following procedure to activate the closed caption. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV Closed Caption âÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSettingâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select âÂÂOn â or âÂÂOn If MuteâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . Setting Off On If Mute On Item Description Off Does not show closed cap tions. (fac t ory default) On Alwa y s shows closed captions. On If Mute Sho ws closed cap tions only while sound is being mut ed. 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢F or MONITOR OUT , only conventional closed caption signals are output; digital closed caption signals are not output. Selecting the type of conventional closed captions (for digital TV channels) Use the following procedure to select the type of conventional closed captions. Y ou will watch the selected type of closed captions when the selected digital TV program provides only conventional closed captions. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV Closed Caption âÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select â Analog CaptionâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to change the selection , and then press ENTER . Analog Caption CC-1 TEXT 2 TEXT 1 CC-2 ⢠The factor y default is âÂÂCC -1âÂÂ. 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. PDP-ELITE-Eng (81-96) 9/9/03, 11:47 87
12 Useful Adjustment Settings 88 En Selecting digital closed captions Use the following procedure to select digital closed captions. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV Closed CaptionâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDigital CaptionâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to change the selection, and then press ENTER . Digital Caption Service 1 Service 4 Service 5 Service 6 Service 3 Service 2 ⢠The factor y default is âÂÂSer vice 1âÂÂ. 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠The P rimar y Caption Ser vice is usually offered for Ser vice 1, and the Secondar y Language Ser vice is usually offered for Ser vice 2 if these ser vices are available. Selecting digital closed caption param- eters Use the following procedure to change such param- eters of digital closed captions as font size, font type, foreground and background colors. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDTV Closed Caption âÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂDigital Caption SetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select the item, and then press / to change the parameter . Digital Caption Setup Font Size Font Style Foreground Color Foreground Opacity Background Color Background Opacity Auto Auto Auto Aut o Auto Small ABCdef123 ⢠The field at the bottom of the dialog box shows how closed captions will appear . 6 R epeat step 5 as necessary , and then press ENTER . 7 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. PDP-ELITE-Eng (81-96) 9/9/03, 11:47 88
12 Useful Adjustment Settings 89 En The following table shows the parameters selectable for each item. Item Selection F ont Size Aut o/ Small/ Standar d / Large F ont St yle 1 Aut o/ F ont 1 / F ont 2/ F ont 3/ F ont 4/ F ont 5/ F ont 6/ F ont 7/ F ont 8 Fo r eground Color Aut o/ Black/ White / Red/ Gr een/ Blue/ Ye llow/ Magent a/ Cyan Fo r eground Opacit y Aut o/ Opaque / T r anslucent/ T r anspar ent/ Flashing Background Color Aut o/ Black / White/ R ed/ Green/ Blue/ Ye llow/ Magent a/ Cyan Background Opacit y Aut o/ Opaque / T r anslucent/ T r anspar ent/ Flashing 1 F ont 1 (default font)/ F ont 2 (monospaced with serifs)/ Font 3 (proportionally spaced with serifs)/ Font 4 (monospaced without serifs)/ F ont 5 (proportionally spaced without serifs)/ F ont 6 (casual font)/ Font 7 (cursive font)/ F ont 8 (small capitals font) W ith â Autoâ selected, parameters specified by the provider are used; if not specified by the provider , the bolded default parameters are used. If you select parameters other than â AutoâÂÂ, the selected parameters are used regardless of provider âÂÂs specifications. PDP-ELITE-Eng (81-96) 9/9/03, 11:47 89
12 Useful Adjustment Settings 90 En ⢠The voluntary movie rating system only uses an age- based rating. TV P arental Guidelines C ont ent FV D L S V Ra ting (F antas y (Sexually (Adult (Sexual (Violence) violence) sug gestiv e language) situation) dialog) TV - Y (All childr en) TV - Y7 (Direct ed t o older children) X TV -G Age-Base (Gener al audience) TV -PG (P arent al guidance suggested) X XXX TV -1 4 (P arents str ongly cautioned) X XXX TV -MA (Ma ture audience only) XXX X: Content rating can be set. Activating the Par ental Control 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP arental ControlâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . ⢠If you have set a password (page 95), the password entry screen appears. Enter your 4- digit password using buttons 0 â 9 . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂStatusâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select âÂÂOn âÂÂ, and then press ENTER . Status Off On ⢠The factor y default is âÂÂOff âÂÂ. 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. Parental Contr ol (setting the V -CHIP level) The V - CHIP is an electronic filtering device built into your system. This tool gives parents a great degree of control over broadcasts accessed by their children . It allows parents to select programs judged suitable for child viewing while blocking ones judged not suitable. It does so automatically once you activate the V - CHIP feature in your Plasma Display . This tool functions for both conventional and digital TV channels. ⢠The U.S. has two rating systems for viewing content: TV P arental Guidelines and movie ratings. ⢠The TV P arental Guidelines work in conjunction with the V - CHIP to help parents screen out inappropriate television shows from their children. ⢠Movie ratings are used for original movies rated by the Motion Picture Association of America (MP AA) as watched on cable TV and not edited for television. The V- CHIP can also be set to block MP AA-rated movies. Vo luntar y movie rating system (MP AA) Ra ting Description G Gener al audiences. All ages admit ted. PG Pa r ent al guidance suggested. Some mat erial may not be suit able for childr en. PG-1 3 Pa r ents str ongly cautioned. Some mat erial ma y be inappropria t e for children under 13 . Age-Base R Re stricted. Under 1 7 requir es accompan y- ing par ent or adult guardian (age v aries in some jurisdictions). NC-1 7 No one 1 7 and under admit t ed. X A ra ting that has no w been superseded by NC-1 7 . NR Not r at ed. PDP-ELITE-Eng (81-96) 9/9/03, 11:47 90
12 Useful Adjustment Settings 91 En Setting the voluntary moving rating sys- tem (MP AA) 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP arental ControlâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . ⢠If you have set a password (page 95), the password entry screen appears. Enter your 4- digit password using buttons 0 â 9 . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂMP AA RatingsâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select the desired rating, and then press / to select âÂÂViewâ or âÂÂBlockâÂÂ. MP AA Ratings PG PG-13 G R NC-17 X View View View View View Block ⢠The factor y defaults for all the ratings are âÂÂV iewâÂÂ. 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. Example 1: Changing âÂÂRâ from âÂÂBlockâ to âÂÂViewâ causes â Viewâ to be automatically selected also for âÂÂGâÂÂ, âÂÂPGâÂÂ, and âÂÂPG- 13âÂÂ. Example 2: Changing âÂÂRâ from âÂÂViewâ to âÂÂBlockâ causes âÂÂBlockâ to be automatically selected also for âÂÂNC -17â and âÂÂXâÂÂ. Blocking Not Rated (NR) TV programs Use the following procedure to block movies not rated by the MP AA. 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP arental ControlâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . ⢠If you have set a password (page 95), the password entry screen appears. Enter your 4- digit password using buttons 0 â 9 . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂMP AA NRâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select âÂÂViewâ or âÂÂBlockâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . MP AA NR View Block ⢠The factor y default is â V iewâÂÂ. 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. PDP-ELITE-Eng (81-96) 9/9/03, 11:47 91
12 Useful Adjustment Settings 92 En Setting the TV Par ental Guidelines (TV Guidelines) 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂParental ControlâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . ⢠If you have set a password (page 95), the password entry screen appears. Enter your 4- digit password using buttons 0 â 9 . 4 Pr ess / to select â TV P arental GuidelinesâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . TV Parental Guidelines TVâÂÂY TVâÂÂY7 TVâÂÂG TVâÂÂPG TVâÂÂY TVâÂÂMA FV D L S V V VV V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V 5 Pr ess / or / to select the desired cell (rating). 6 Pr ess ENTER to select âÂÂV â (View) or âÂÂBâ (Block). TV Parental Guidelines TVâÂÂY TVâÂÂY7 TVâÂÂG TVâÂÂPG TVâÂÂY TVâÂÂMA FV D L S V V B B V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V ⢠Each time you press ENTER, the selection is switched. ⢠The factory defaults for all the ratings are â Vâ (V iew). 7 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢B locking a low rated program will cause all higher rated programs to be blocked. Canadian rating systems ⢠The TV rating systems in Canada are based on the Canadian Radio- T elevision and T elecommunications Commission (CRTC) policy on violence in television programming. ⢠While violence is the most important content element to be rated, the structure developed takes into consid- eration other program content like language, nudity , sexuality and mature themes. ⢠When setting the V - CHIP on the Canadian system you can chose either the Canadian English ratings or the Canadian F rench ratings. Canadian English ratings Ra ting Description E Exemp t: Includes news, sports, documen- t arie s and other information pr ogramming; ta lk shows, music videos, and v ariet y pr ogramming. C Children: Int ended for y ounger children under the age of 8 y ears. P a y s careful at tention t o themes that could thr eaten their sense of securit y and well-being. C8 Childr en ov er 8 years old: Cont ains no portra yal of violence as the pr eferred, accept able, or only wa y to r esolv e conflict; nor encour age childr en to imit ate danger - ous acts which the y ma y see on the screen. G Gener al: Considered accep table for all age groups. Appr opriate vie wing for the entire family , contains very lit tle violence, ph ysical, v erbal or emotional. Age-Base PG Par ental Guidance: Int ended for a general audience, but ma y not be suit able for y ounger childr en (under the age of 8) because it could contain contr over sial themes or issues. 14 Ov er 1 4 Y ears: Could contain theme s where violence is one of the dominant elements of the st oryline, but it must be integr al t o the development of plo t or char act er . Language usage could be pr ofane and nudity pr esent within the cont ext of the theme. 18 A dults: Int ended for view ers 1 8 year s and older and might cont ain depictions of violence, which while r elat ed to the de velopment of plot, char acter or themes, ar e intended for adult vie wing. Could cont ain gr aphic language and portra yals of se x and nudit y . PDP-ELITE-Eng (81-96) 9/9/03, 11:47 92
12 Useful Adjustment Settings 93 En Canadian F r ench ratings Ra ting Description E Exemp t progr amming. G Gener al: All ages and childr en, contains minimal dir ect violence, but may be integr at ed int o the plot in a humorous or unrealistic manner . 8ans Gener al but inadvisable for young childr en: Ma y be view ed b y a wide public audience, but could cont ain scenes disturbing t o children under eight who canno t distin- guish bet ween imaginary and real situa- tions. Recommended for vie wing with par ent. 1 3ans Over 1 3 y ears: Could contain scene s of frequent violent scene s and therefor e r ecommended for viewing with par ent. 1 6ans Over 1 6 year s: Could contain frequent violent scenes and int ense violence. 1 8ans Over 1 8 year s: Only for adult vie wing. Could contain fr equent violent scenes and e xtr eme violence. Setting Canadian English ratings 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP arental ControlâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . ⢠If you have set a password (page 95), the password entry screen appears. Enter your 4- digit password using buttons 0 â 9 . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂCanadian English R atingsâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select the desired rating, and then press / to select âÂÂViewâ or âÂÂBlockâÂÂ. Canadian English Ratings C8 G C PG 14 18 View View View View View Block ⢠The factor y defaults for all the ratings are âÂÂV iewâÂÂ. 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. Setting Canadian French ratings 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP arental ControlâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . ⢠If you have set a password (page 95), the password entry screen appears. Enter your 4- digit password using buttons 0 â 9 . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂCanadian F rench RatingsâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select the desired rating, and then press / to select â Viewâ or âÂÂBlockâÂÂ. Canadian French Ratings G 8ans E 13ans 16ans 18ans View View View View Block View ⢠The factor y defaults for all the ratings are âÂÂV iewâÂÂ. 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. Age-Base PDP-ELITE-Eng (81-96) 9/9/03, 11:47 93
12 Useful Adjustment Settings 94 En T emporarily deactivating the V -CHIP Block Y ou can temporarily deactivate the V -CHIP Block. When the V - CHIP Block is working and censors TV programs or VCR or DVD contents to be blocked, a password entry screen appears. Please Input Y our Password. To temporarily deactivate the V - CHIP block, enter a 4- digit password that you have set using the Home menu. Image and sound muting is quitted. If you press ENTER instead of entering the password, the password entr y screen disappears. ⢠The password entry screen stays only for one minute. Pr essing ENTER causes the password entr y screen to appear again. Reactivating the V -CHIP Block Executing one of the following procedures reactivates the V -CHIP Block. Method 1: Make a selection (âÂÂOnâ or âÂÂOff âÂÂ) for âÂÂStatusâ under âÂÂP arental Controlâ in the menu. See page 90. Method 2: Make a selection for âÂÂMP AA RatingsâÂÂ, âÂÂMP AA NRâÂÂ, âÂÂTV Pa rental GuidelinesâÂÂ, âÂÂCanadian English Ratingsâ or âÂÂCanadian F rench Ratingsâ under âÂÂP arental Controlâ in the menu. See pages 91 to 93. Method 3: Switch off the power to the system. PDP-ELITE-Eng (81-96) 9/9/03, 11:47 94
12 Useful Adjustment Settings 95 En Programming a password (A V mode only) Y ou can program a password to prevent other persons from changing especially P arental Control settings. Setting and changing the password Use the following procedure to newly set or change the password: 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂP asswordâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . ⢠If you have set a password, the password entr y screen appears. Enter your 4-digit password using buttons 0 â 9 . ⢠The factor y default is âÂÂ1234âÂÂ. 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂChange P asswordâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Enter a 4-digit password to be newly set, using buttons 0 â 9 . Change Password Please Input New Password. Reconfirm New Password. 6 Enter the same password that you have entered in step 4, using buttons 0 â 9 . Change Password Please Input New Password. Reconfirm New Password. **** 7 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢T ake a note of the newly set password and keep it handy . PDP-ELITE-Eng (81-96) 9/9/03, 11:47 95
12 Useful Adjustment Settings 96 En Cut along the dotted line and file after reading and filling out. We suggested you write down your password so you donâÂÂt forget it. PRO-1 1 10HD/PRO-910HD Y our passwor d No.: If you for get the password When the message âÂÂPlease Input Y our P asswordâ is displayed in step 3 above, press the ENTER button on the remote control unit and hold it down for 3 seconds or longer . The password reverts to âÂÂ1234âÂÂ. Resetting the password 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSetupâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂPasswordâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . ⢠The password entr y screen appears. Enter your 4-digit password using buttons 0 â 9 . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂResetâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . No Resets passwor d. PLASMA DISPLA Y Ye s 5 Pr ess / to select âÂÂY esâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠The above procedure will reset the password to the factor y default (1234). PDP-ELITE-Eng (81-96) 9/9/03, 11:47 96
13 Useful Features 97 En Lear ning function of the remote control unit Y ou can operate the connected AV products (A V Re- ceiver , Cable Box, SAT tuner , VCR , DVD, DVD recorder , LD) using the learning function of your remote control unit. This remote control unit has a function that can memorize each remote control code. 2 to 5 cm (0.8 to 2.0 inches) Remote control Remote control of (Supplied accessory) A V product Using the learning function 1 Slide the Mode switch to match the device whose remote control signal you want to be learned. 2 Pr ess EDIT/LEARN and 2 at the same time. â¢The LED flashes. 3 Pr ess a button to be learned. ⢠The LED lights up. â¢F or the functions that can be learned, see pages 100 to 105. ⢠When learning is finished, the LED starts flashing again. 4 Pr ess EDIT/LEARN again to exit the Learn mode. â¢T o exit the Learn mode half way , press EDIT/LEARN again. ⢠If the Mode switch selection is changed when in the Learn mode, the Learn mode is cancelled. ⢠If no operation is per formed for more than one minute, the Learn mode is cancelled. ⢠It takes about 2 seconds to finish code transmission. Do not interrupt it halfway. W ait until the LED flashes again. â¢Y ou can reset all learned codes to the factor y de- faults. When not in the Learn mode, press and hold TV a , and then press D and k at the same time. PDP-ELITE-Eng (97-105) 9/9/03, 11:47 97
13 Useful Features 98 En Pr esetting manufacture codes 1 Slide the Mode switch to match the device to which you want to preset the remote control signal. 2 Pr ess EDIT/LEARN and 1 at the same time. ⢠The LED flashes. 3 Pr ess 0 â 9 to enter the manufacture code. See page 99. â¢P reset mode is finished once the LED no longer lights up. â¢T o exit the Edit mode halfway , press EDIT/LEARN again. ⢠If the Mode switch selection is changed when in the Edit mode, the Edit mode is cancelled. ⢠If no operation is performed for more than one minute, the Edit mode is cancelled. ⢠When you enter a code not listed, the LED flashes quickly . ⢠If the table on page 99 does not include your desired manufacturer or the remote control does not work, you can make the memory learn its signal by the Learn mode. ⢠The initial mode is âÂÂ000â (PIONEER). PDP-ELITE-Eng (97-105) 9/9/03, 11:47 98
13 Useful Features 99 En Manufacture codes CABLE/S A T VCR D VD/D VR 000 PIONEER1(CABLE) PIONEER PIONEER(DVD) 00 1 PIONEER2(CABLE) FISHER P ANASONIC(DVD) 00 2 JERR OLD1(CABLE) FISHER2 S AMSUNG(D VD) 00 3 JERR OLD2(CABLE) FISHER3 SONY(D VD) 004 JERROLD3(CABLE) GOLDST AR TOSHIB A(DVD) 00 5 JERR OLD4(CABLE) HIT ACHI JVC(D VD) 006 JERROLD5(CABLE) HIT ACHI2 PIONEER(D VD-RECORDER) 00 7 JERR OLD6(CABLE) HIT ACHI3 PIONEER2(DVD-RECORDER) 008 JERROLD7(CABLE) MAGNAV OX2 PIONEER3(DVD-RECORDER) 009 JERROLD8(CABLE) MITSUBISHI P ANASONIC(DVD-RECORDER) 010 JERR OLD9(CABLE) MITSUBISHI2 P ANASONIC2(DVD-RECORDER) 01 1 JERR OLD1 0(CABLE) MITSUBISHI3 P ANASONIC3(DVD-RECORDER) 012 S.A.1(CABLE) MITSUBISHI4 PHILIPS(DVD-RECORDER) 013 S.A.2(CABLE) MITSUBISHI5 SHARP(DVD-RECORDER) 014 S.A.3(CABLE) MITSUBISHI6 SHARP2(D VD-RECORDER) 015 S.A.4(CABLE) P ANASONIC TOSHIB A(D VD-RECORDER) 016 ZENITH1(CABLE) P ANASONIC2 T OSHIBA2(D VD-RECORDER) 017 ZENITH2(CABLE) P ANASONIC3 01 8 ZENITH3(CABLE) RCA 019 R CA2 020 PIONEER(S A T) RCA3 PIONEER(LD) 02 1R CA1(SA T) SANY O KENWOOD(LD) 02 2R CA2(SA T) SANY O2 P ANASONIC1(LD) 02 3S ONY(SA T) S ANY O3 P ANASONIC2(LD) 024 SHARP PHILIPS(LD) 025 SHARP2 RCA(LD) 026 SHARP3 SONY(MDP) 027 SONY(BET A) SONY(LD) 028 S ONY(VHS) 029 SONY(8mm) 03 0T OSHIBA 03 1 J V C 03 2 J VC2 03 3 J VC3 034 J VC4 035 J VC5 036 ZENITH 03 7M ITSUBISHI(J-3) 03 8S HARP(J-2) 03 9P ANASONIC(J-3) 04 0T OSHIBA(J-3) 04 1 G R ANDIENTE 04 2 AKAI 04 3P IONEER2 044 S ANY O4 04 5 MA TSUI 04 6 AIW A 04 7 ALBA8 1 04 8 B USH 04 9 THOMSON 05 0B AIRD 05 1 TELEFUNKEN 052 ALBA CABLE/S A T VCR D VD/DVR 05 3G rundig1 05 4G rundig2 05 5G rundig3 056 SONY2 057 SONY3 058 SONY4 059 R CA4 060 P H I LIPS 061 PHILIPS2 062 PHILIPS3 063 PHILIPS4 064 PHILIPS5 065 PHILIPS6 066 S AMSUNG 06 7S AMSUNG2 068 S AMSUNG3 069 S AMSUNG4 070 S AMSUNG5 071 S AMSUNG6 072 MAR ANTZ 073 MAR ANTZ2 074 G E 075 G E 2 076 G E 3 077 Y AMAHA 078 YA M A HA2 079 YA M AHA3 080 YAM A HA4 08 1 CUR TIS_MA THIS 082 CUR TIS_MA THIS2 083 CUR TIS_MA THIS3 084 F U N AI 085 A D M I R A L 086 K E NWOOD 087 KENWOOD2 088 KENWOOD3 089 N E C 090 N E C2 09 1 N E C 3 092 N E C4 093 W ARDS 094 W ARDS2 09 5W ARDS3 096 W ARDS4 097 M E MOREX 098 MEMOREX2 099 JC_PENNY 10 0 J C _PENNY2 101 J C _PENNY3 10 2 J C _PENNY4 10 3 J C _PENNY5 10 4 J C _PENNY6 PDP-ELITE-Eng (97-105) 9/9/03, 11:47 99
13 Useful Features 100 En Mode switch (with âÂÂTV â selected) Using the r emote control unit to control other devices 1 2 3 Receiver contr ol buttons When a P ioneer receiver is connected to the display , the receiver can be operated using buttons 1 to 3 . When a non-P ioneer receiver is connected to the display , the signals for 1 to 3 must first be learned before operating. See page 97. 1 RECEIVER a (ST ANDBY/ON) Tu rns the receiver power on and off . 2 RECEIVER INP UT Selects the input source connected to the receiver . 3 RECEIVER VOL /â Adjusts the receiver volume level. P ress VOL to increase the volume and VOL â to decrease it. ⢠(RECEIVER) e MUTING Allows the remote control unit to learn receiver âÂÂs mute signal. Use this button when the mode switch is set to a position other than TV . ⢠The color-highlighted buttons on the remote control can learn the control signal from another deviceâÂÂs remote control. PDP-ELITE-Eng (97-105) 9/9/03, 11:47 100
13 Useful Features 101 En 1 3 2 4 5 Cable control buttons When the Mode switch is set to CBL/SA T the cable converter connected to the display can be operated using 1 to 5 . Cable converters made by other manufacturers and not preset can also be operated using the remote control unit if 1 to 5 have learned the functions. See page 97. 1 0 â 9 Pr ess a button (or buttons) that corresponds to the channel that you want to watch. 2 CH / â Pr ess CH or CH â to tune in a higher or lower channel. 3 SOURCE a Tu rns the cable converter power on and off. 4 CH ENTER * Fi x the selected channel with the direct channel selection buttons. 5 CH RETURN * Pr ess to switch between the current channel and the channel you were watching immediately before. * Some manufacturers do not preset CH ENTER and CH RETURN . Use these buttons to learn if neces- sar y . ⢠CABLE and SA T cannot be selected at the same time. ⢠The color-highlighted buttons on the remote control can learn the control signal from another deviceâÂÂs remote control. Mode switch (with âÂÂCBL/SA Tâ selected) PDP-ELITE-Eng (97-105) 9/9/03, 11:47 101
13 Useful Features 102 En 1 6 8 7 3 4 5 2 SA T control buttons When the SA T is preset by the learning function of the remote control, the remote control unit buttons will function as shown below . ⢠When the Mode switch is set to CBL/SA T , satellite broadcast tuners made by other manufacturers and not preset can also be operated with the remote control unit if 1 to 8 have learned the functions. See page 97. 1 0 â 9 Pr ess a button (or buttons) that corresponds to the channel that you wish to watch. 2 CH /â Pr ess CH or CH â to tune in a higher or lower channel. 3 ENTER, / / / ENTER :P ress to activate the selected function. / / / :P ress the button to select items on the SA T GUIDE screen or SA T MENU screen. 4 SA T INFO When this button is pressed, information on satellite broadcasting will appear . ⢠Use this button to learn if necessar y . 5 SOURCE a Tu rns the Satellite broadcast tuner power on and off . 6 CH ENTER Fi x the selected channel with the direct channel selection buttons. ⢠Use this button to learn if necessar y . 7 SA T MENU When this button is pressed, the satellite broadcasting menu screen will appear . 8 SA T GUIDE When this button is pressed, the satellite broadcasting guide screen will appear . ⢠CABLE and SA T cannot be selected at the same time. ⢠The color-highlighted buttons shown in the figure at left can learn the control signal from another deviceâÂÂs remote control. Mode switch (with âÂÂCBL/SA Tâ selected) PDP-ELITE-Eng (97-105) 9/9/03, 11:47 102
13 Useful Features 103 En 8 7 1 4 3 2 6 5 VCR control buttons When the VCR is preset by the learning function of the remote control, the remote control unit buttons will function as follows when the Mode switch of the remote control unit is set to VCR . ⢠When the input selector button having the same number as the input terminal connecting the VCR is pressed, the VCR can be operated using 1 to 8 . ⢠VCR made by other manufacturers and not preset can also be operated using the remote control unit if 1 to 8 have learned the functions. See page 97. 1 CH / â Pr ess to select the channel of the TV tuner on the VCR. 2 I (PLAY) Selects playback. 3 S (REW) R ewinds the tape and allows picture search. 4 SOURCE a Tu rns the power of the VCR on and off . 5 F (PA USE/STILL) Sets pauses and still pictures. 6 V (FF) R apidly advances the tape and allows picture search. 7 E (REC) Starts recording. 8 H (STOP) Stop tape transport. ⢠The color-highlighted buttons on the remote control can learn the control signal from another deviceâÂÂs remote control. Mode switch (with âÂÂVCRâ selected) PDP-ELITE-Eng (97-105) 9/9/03, 11:47 103
13 Useful Features 104 En ! ~ 6 5 2 = - 0 8 9 7 3 4 1 DVD/DVR contr ol buttons When the DVD/DVR is preset by the learning function of the remote control, the remote control unit buttons will function as follows when the Mode switch of the remote control unit is set to DVD/DVR . ⢠When the input selector button having the same number as the input terminal connecting a DVD player or DVD recorder is pressed, these players can be operated using 1 to ! . ⢠DVD players or DVD recorders made by other manu- facturers and not preset can also be operated using the remote control unit if 1 to ! have learned the functions. See page 97. 1 CH / â (DVD recorder only) Pr ess to change the channel of the tuner built in the DVD recorder . 2 RETURN When the DVD menu is in display , press to restore the immediately previous screen. 3 I (PLAY) Selects playback. 4 T (CHAPTER SEARCH) Pr essing quickly once takes you to the start of the chapter currently playing. Each time you press it, you move back to the start of the previous chapter . 5 S (SCAN) Continue pressing to go backward. 6 SOURCE a Tu rns the power of the DVD player or DVD recorder on and off . 7 F (P AUSE/STILL) Sets pauses and still pictures. 8 SA T/DVD MENU (DVD, DVD recor der) When this button is pressed, the DVD menu will appear . 9 ENTER, / / / (DVD, DVD recor der) ENTER :P ress to activate the selected function. / / / :P ress the button to select items on the DVD MENU screen . 0 DVD TOP MENU (DVD, DVD recorder) When this button is pressed, the DVD top menu will appear . Mode switch (with âÂÂDVD/DVRâ selected) PDP-ELITE-Eng (97-105) 9/9/03, 11:47 104
13 Useful Features 105 En - U (CHAPTER SEARCH) Pr essing quickly once takes you to the start of the next chapter . Each time you press it, you move ahead to the start of the next chapter . = V (SCAN) Continue pressing for fast forward. ~ E (REC) Starts recording. ! H (STOP) Playback stops when pressing once. With some DVD players or DVD recorders, pressing the button twice may open the disc tray . ~ ! H (REC STOP) Pr ess and hold E , and then press this button to stop recording. This operation is true of only Pi oneer DVD recorders. ⢠The DVD player or DVD recorder cannot be selected at the same time. ⢠The color-highlighted buttons on the remote control can learn the control signal from another deviceâÂÂs remote control. PDP-ELITE-Eng (97-105) 9/9/03, 11:47 105
14 Appendix 106 En Pr oblem P ossible Solution ⢠No power . â¢G r een and r ed rectangles appear on the screen alt ernately . ⢠The sy stem cannot be oper at ed. â¢R emot e control unit doe s not oper ate. ⢠No image and audio is present ed. ⢠No picture. â¢I mages are pr esent ed but no audio is output. ⢠Sound is rev ersed bet ween the right and left. ⢠Sound is output from only a single speaker . â¢P icture is cut off. ⢠Str ange colour , light colour , dark or colour misalignment. â¢P ow er is suddenly turned off. Tr oubleshooting Code Message Check SD04 P ow ering off. Int ernal t emperatur e too high. Check if the ambient t emperatur e of the Plasma Displa y is high. Check t emper ature ar ound PDP . SD0 5 Po wering off. Int ernal protection cir cuits activa ted, Check the speaker cable connections be t ween the Plasma Displa y Is there a short in speak er cable? and the speak er s. SD1 1 P ow ering off. Internal t emperatur e too high. Check if the ambient t emper ature of the Pla sma Displa y and the Check t emper ature ar ound media receiver . Media Receiver is high. ⢠Mak e sure the Pla sma Displa y and the Media R eceiver ar e connected corr ectly . (See page 20.) â¢I s the pow er cord disconnect ed? (See page 2 7 .) â¢H as the main power been turned on? (See page 2 8.) ⢠Check if y ou pressed TV a on the remot e control unit. (See page 2 8.) If the indicat or on the syst em lights up r ed, pr ess TV a. ⢠Check if the s ystem cable ha s been disconnect ed or almost disconnect ed? (See page 2 0.) ⢠External influence s such as lightning, static electricit y , etc., ma y cause improper oper ation. In this case, oper ate the s ystem aft er first turning the pow er of the Plasma Displa y and the Media Receiv er , or unplug ging the pow er cor d and re-plugging it in after 1 or 2 min ute s. â¢I s the Mode switch set corr ectly? Slide it t o the TV set ting position. (See page 1 6.) â¢A re bat teries insert ed with polarit y ( , âÂÂ) aligned? (See page 2 2.) â¢A re bat teries w orn out? (Replace with ne w bat teries.) (See page 2 2.) ⢠Oper ate the r emote control unit while pointing it t ow ard the r emot e control sensor on the Plasma Displa y . (See page 1 7 .) â¢A re you using it under strong or fluor escent lighting? â¢I s a fluore scent light illuminat ed near the r emot e control sensor? ⢠Check if the input sour ce for video or PC has been unint entionally selected although y ou w ant to watch a TV channel. (See page 3 0.) ⢠Check if y ou have activ at ed the Par ental Contr ol function. (See page 90.) Ent er a passwor d to t empor arily cancel the P ar ental Contr ol function. (See page 9 4.) â¢I s connection t o o ther components correct? (See page s 6 5 to 7 7 .) â¢I s a non-compatible PC signal being input? (See page 1 0 7 .) ⢠Is picture adjustment corr ect? (See pages 4 7 to 5 3.) ⢠Check if y ou have select ed the minimum volume. (See page 3 1.) ⢠Check if y ou have m uted sound. (See page 3 1.) ⢠When using a video or PC input sour ce, check that the audio terminal is also in connection. (See pages 6 5 to 7 0 and 7 7 .) ⢠Check if the speak er cable connections have been r ev er sed bet ween the right and left or if the speaker cable fr om either speak er has been disconnect ed. (See pages 1 3 and 2 0.) â¢H as the balance been correctly adjusted? (See page 5 3.) â¢I s the image position corr ect? (See pages 8 1and 8 2.) ⢠Has the correct scr een size been select ed? (See page 8 3.) â¢A djust the picture tone. (See page s 4 7 to 5 3.) ⢠Is the room t oo bright? The picture ma y look dark in a room tha t is t oo bright. â¢I s the sleep timer set? (See page 8 5.) ⢠Check the pow er control set ting. (See pages 5 5 and 5 6.) ⢠The s ystemâ s internal temper ature ha s increased. R emove an y objects blocking vent or clean. (See pages 1 8 t o 1 9.) PDP-ELITE-Eng (106-111) 9/9/03, 11:43 106
14 Appendix 107 En Computer compatibility chart Re solution Fr equency R emarks 720 ÃÂ 4 00 7 0 Hz 640 ÃÂ 48 0 6 0 Hz 65 Hz Macint osh 1 3" (6 7 Hz) 72 H z 75 H z 8 00 ÃÂ 600 5 6 Hz 60 H z 72 H z 75 H z 832 ÃÂ 6 2 4 7 4.5 Hz Macint osh 1 6" 10 2 4 ÃÂ 7 68 6 0 Hz 70 H z 75 Hz Macint osh 1 9" 12 8 0 ÃÂ 7 6 8 5 6 Hz 60 H z 70 H z PDP-ELITE-Eng (106-111) 9/9/03, 11:43 107
14 Appendix 108 En Specifications It em 50"Pla sma Display , Model: PRO-5 04PU 43" Plasma Displa y , Model: PRO-4 3 4PU Number of Pixels 1 2 8 0 à7 68 pix els 1 0 2 4 à7 6 8 pix els Audio Amplifier 1 3 W 1 3 W (1 kHz, 1 0 %, 8 ⦠)1 3 W 1 3 W (1 kHz, 1 0 %, 8 ⦠) Surr ound Sy stem SRS/F OCUS/T ruBass SRS/FOCUS/T ruBass Po w er Requir ement 1 2 0 V AC, 6 0 Hz, 3 6 3 W (0.3 W Standb y) 1 20 V A C, 60 Hz, 2 98 W (0.3 W St andby) Dimensions 1 2 7 0 (W) à7 3 7 (H) à9 8 (D) mm 1 1 20 (W) à6 5 2 (H) à98 (D) mm (5 0 (W) à2 9 (H) à3 7 /8 (D) inches) (44 1 /8 (W) à25 11 /1 6 (H) à3 7 /8 (D) inches) W eight 3 8 kg (8 3.8 lbs.) 3 0.5 kg (6 7 .3 lbs.) It em Media R eceiver , Model: PRO-R04U R ecep tion Sy stem (Digital) A TSC Digital TV s yst em Cir cuit type 8VSB demodulation T uner VHF/UHF VHF 2âÂÂ1 3ch, UHF 1 4âÂÂ6 9ch CA TV 2âÂÂ1 2 5ch (Standar d Channel Plan, 8VSB only) Audio format Dolb y Digital R ecep tion Sy stem (Analog) American TV standard NTSC s yst em Cir cuit type Video signal de tection PLL full s ynchronous det ection, PLL digital s ynthesizer syst em T uner VHF/UHF VHF 2âÂÂ1 3ch, UHF 1 4âÂÂ6 9ch CA TV 1âÂÂ1 2 5ch Audio multiple x BTSC sy stem T erminals Rear DTV Ant enna 7 5 ⦠UNBAL, F T ype for D TV in Antenna A 7 5 ⦠UNBAL, F T ype for VHF/UHF/CA TV in Loop out Antenna B 7 5 ⦠UNBAL, F T ype for VHF/UHF/CA TV in Loop out i.LINK (TS) S4 00 (2) INPUT 1 COMPONENT VIDEO in, S- VIDEO in, VIDEO in, AUDIO in INPUT 2 S- VIDEO in, VIDEO in, AUDIO in INPUT 3 COMPONENT VIDEO in, A UDIO in Monitor Out S- VIDEO out, VIDEO out, A UDIO out Digital Audio Output Optical (1) VCR Control Output 1 CONTR OL IN 1 CONTR OL OUT 1 Fr ont INPUT 4 COMPONENT VIDEO in, S- VIDEO in, VIDEO in, AUDIO in, PC Analog R GB in, AUDIO in OSD English/Fr ench/Spanish Po w er Requir ement 1 2 0 V A C, 60 Hz, 4 4.5 W (0.3 W Standb y) Dimensions 4 2 0 (W) à90 (H) à29 7 (D) mm (1 6 9 /1 6 (W) à3 9 /1 6 (H) à11 11 /1 6 (D) inches) W eight 5.7 kg (1 2.2 lbs.) â¢D esign and specifications are subject to change without notice. PDP-ELITE-Eng (106-111) 9/9/03, 13:16 108
14 Appendix 109 En T rademarks ⢠SRS and the R symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. SRS technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. ⢠FOCUS and the R symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. FOCUS technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. ⢠is a trademark of SRS Labs, Inc. WOW technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. ⢠DOLBY DIGIT AL Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. âÂÂDolbyâ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. ⢠This product includes FontAvenue î fonts licensed by NEC Corporation. F ontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation. ⢠The i.LINK logo and i.LINK are registered trademarks of Sony Corporation. â¢D - VHS is a registered trademark of Victor Company of Japan, Limited. ⢠Apple and Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Computer , Inc. â¢M icrosoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. ⢠DDC is a registered trademark of Video Electronics Standards Association . â¢P ower Management is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. ⢠VGA and XGA are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Co., Inc. ⢠The names of the companies or institutions are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective companies or institutions. Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2003 Pioneer Corporation. All rights reserved. PDP-ELITE-Eng (106-111) 9/9/03, 11:43 109
PDP-ELITE-Eng (106-111) 9/9/03, 11:43 110
PDP-ELITE-Eng (106-111) 9/9/03, 11:43 111
Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2003 Pioneer Corporation. All rights reserved. <03I00001> Printed in Japan <ARB1556-A> PIONEER CORPORA TION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, T okyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS [USA] INC. P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: [03] 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. Blvd. Manuel Avila Camacho 138, 10 piso Col. Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000 TEL: 52-55-9178-4270 FAX: 52-55-5202-3714 PDP-ELITE-Eng (Back) 9/9/03, 11:47 1
About HDMI Quelques mots sur HDMI Acerca de HDMI PDP5040HD-UC (HDMI) 8/22/03, 10:48 1
2 En IN SERVICE ONLY MONITOR OUT DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL INPUT 1 COMPONENT VIDEO S400 DTV-ANTENNA IN INPUT 3 INPUT 1 INPUT 3 VCR CONTROL A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN IN OUT CONTROL OUT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y HDMI AC INLET BLACK WHITE SYSTEM CABLE R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO INPUT 2 (TS) HDMI equipment Media Receiver (r ear view) Audio cable (commercially available) Make this connection when inputting analog audio signals. HDMI cable (commercially available) Connecting HDMI equipment For the handling pr ocedures and the other functions, r efer to the dedicated operation manual. Input signal correlation t able 1 920 â 10 8 0 i @ 5 9 .94/6 0Hz 720 â 480 p @ 59 .94/6 0Hz 12 8 0 â 72 0p@5 9.94/6 0Hz 72 0(1 4 40) â 48 0i@5 9.94/6 0Hz ⢠PC signals are out of correspondence. Using HDMI Input The INPUT 1 and INPUT 3 terminals include HDMI terminals to which digital video and audio signals can be input. T o use the HDMI terminal, activate the termi- nal and specify the types of video and audio signals to be received from the connected equipment. F or the types of these signals, see the operation manual that came with the connected equipment. Before starting the menu, press INPUT 1 (or INPUT 3 ) on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select INPUT 1 (or INPUT 3). To activate the HDMI terminal: 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂOptionâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂHDMI InputâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂSettingâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select âÂÂEnableâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . Setting Disable Enable Item Description Disable Deactivat es the HDMI t erminal. (fac t ory default) Enable A ctiva te s the HDMI terminal. 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. PDP5040HD-UC (HDMI) 8/22/03, 10:48 2
English 3 En To specif y the type of digital video signals: 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂOptionâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂHDMI InputâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select âÂÂVideoâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select the type of digital video signals, and then press ENTER . Setting Auto Color-1 Color-2 Color-3 ⢠If you select â AutoâÂÂ, an attempt will be made to identify the type of digital video signals when digital video signals are received. Item Description Aut o Automa tically identifies input digital video (fac t ory default) signals. Color -1 Digital Component V ideo signals (4:2:2) lock ed Color -2 Digital Component V ideo signals (4:4:4) lock ed Color -3 Digital R GB signals locked 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠If you select a parameter other than â AutoâÂÂ, make such a setting that results in natural color . ⢠If no image appears, specify another digital video signal type. â¢F or the digital video signal types to be specified, check the operation manual that came with the connected equipment. To specif y the type of audio signals: 1 Pr ess HOME MENU . 2 Pr ess / to select âÂÂOption âÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 3 Pr ess / to select âÂÂHDMI InputâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 4 Pr ess / to select â AudioâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . 5 Pr ess / to select the type of audio signals, and then press ENTER . Setting Auto Digital Analog ⢠If you select â AutoâÂÂ, an attempt will be made to identify the type of audio signals when audio signals are received. Item Description Aut o Automa tically identifies input audio (fac t ory default) signals. Digital A ccept s digital audio signals. Analog A ccepts analog audio signals. 6 Pr ess HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠If no sound is output, specify another audio signal type. â¢F or the audio signal types to be specified, check the operation manual that came with the connected equipment. ⢠Depending on the equipment to be connected, you also need to connect analog audio cables. ⢠HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Inter face are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. PDP5040HD-UC (HDMI) 8/22/03, 10:48 3
4 Fr IN SERVICE ONLY MONITOR OUT DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL INPUT 1 COMPONENT VIDEO S400 DTV-ANTENNA IN INPUT 3 INPUT 1 INPUT 3 VCR CONTROL A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN IN OUT CONTROL OUT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y HDMI AC INLET BLACK WHITE SYSTEM CABLE R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO INPUT 2 (TS) Appareil HDMI Récepteur Média (vue de dos) Câble audio (disponible dans le commerce) Effectuez ce raccordement si les signaux dâÂÂentrée audio sont analogiques. Câble HDMI (disponible dans le commerce) Ra ccordement dâÂÂun appar eil HDMI Pour tout ce qui concerne le mode opératoire et les autr es fonctions, reportez- vous au mode dâÂÂemploi spécifique. T ableau de corrélation de s signaux dâÂÂentrée 1 920 â 10 8 0 i @ 5 9 ,94/6 0Hz 720 â 480 p @ 59 ,94/6 0Hz 12 8 0 â 72 0p@5 9,94/6 0Hz 72 0(1 4 40) â 48 0i@5 9,94/6 0Hz ⢠Les signaux PC ne sont pas en correspondance. Utilisation de lâÂÂentrée HDMI Les prises INPUT 1 et INPUT 3 assurent les liaisons HDMI et peuvent recevoir des signaux dâÂÂentrée audio et vidéo. P our utiliser la prise HDMI, mettez cette prise en service et précisez le type des signaux audio et vidéo en provenance de lâÂÂappareil relié. P our de plus amples détails concernant les signaux, reportez-vous au mode dâÂÂemploi qui accompagne lâÂÂappareil relié. Avant dâÂÂouvrir le menu, appuyez sur INPUT 1 , (ou INPUT 3 ), sur le boîtier de télécommande, ou bien appuyez sur INPUT, sur lâÂÂécran àplasma, pour sélectionner INPUT 1 (ou INPUT 3). P our mettre en service la prise HDMI: 1 Appuyez sur HOME MENU . 2 Utilisez / pour sélectionner âÂÂOptionsâ puis appuyez sur ENTER . 3 Utilisez / pour sélectionner âÂÂEntrée HDMIâ puis appuyez sur ENTER . 4 Utilisez / pour sélectionner âÂÂRéglageâ puis appuyez sur ENTER . 5 Utilisez / pour sélectionner â Activer â puis appuyez sur ENTER . Réglage Désactiver Activer Par amètre Description Désactiver La prise HDMI nâÂÂest pa s active. (valeur par défaut) Activer La prise HDMI est activ e. 6 Appuyez sur HOME MENU pour quitter le menu. PDP5040HD-UC (HDMI) 8/22/03, 10:48 4
5 Fr F rançais P our préciser le type des signaux vidéo numériques: 1 Appuyez sur HOME MENU . 2 Utilisez / pour sélectionner âÂÂOptionsâ puis appuyez sur ENTER . 3 Utilisez / pour sélectionner âÂÂEntrée HDMIâ puis appuyez sur ENTER . 4 Utilisez / pour sélectionner â Vidéoâ puis appuyez sur ENTER . 5 Utilisez / pour sélectionner le type des signaux vidéo puis appuyez sur ENTER . Réglage Auto Couleur-1 Couleur-2 Couleur-3 â¢S i vous sélectionnez â AutoâÂÂ, lâÂÂappareil tente dâÂÂidentifier les signaux vidéonumériques lorsquâÂÂils sont reçus. Pa ra mètre Description Aut o Le signal dâÂÂentrée vidéonumérique est (valeur par défaut) aut omatiquement identifié. Couleur -1 Signaux des composant es vidéo n umérique s (4:2:2) verr ouillés Couleur2 Signaux des composant es vidéo n umérique s (4:4:4) verr ouillés Couleur -3 Signaux R VB numérique s verr ouillés 6 Appuyez sur HOME MENU pour quitter le menu. â¢S i vous sélectionnez une valeur autre que â AutoâÂÂ, effectuez le réglage de manière que les couleurs soient naturelles. â¢S i aucune image nâÂÂapparaît, choisissez un autre type de signal vidéonumérique. â¢P our de plus amples détails concernant les types de signal vidéonumérique, reportez-vous au mode dâÂÂemploi qui accompagne lâÂÂappareil relié. P our préciser le type des signaux audionumériques: 1 Appuyez sur HOME MENU . 2 Utilisez / pour sélectionner âÂÂOptionsâ puis appuyez sur ENTER . 3 Utilisez / pour sélectionner âÂÂEntrée HDMIâ puis appuyez sur ENTER . 4 Utilisez / pour sélectionner â Audioâ puis appuyez sur ENTER . 5 Utilisez / pour sélectionner le type des signaux audio puis appuyez sur ENTER . Réglage Auto Numérique Analogique â¢S i vous sélectionnez â AutoâÂÂ, lâÂÂappareil tente dâÂÂidentifier les signaux audio lorsquâÂÂils sont reçus. Pa ra mètre Description Aut o Le t ype des signaux dâÂÂentr ée audio est (valeur par défaut) aut omatiquement identifié. Numérique Les signaux audionumérique s sont accept és. Analogique Les signaux audio analogiques sont accept és. 6 Appuyez sur HOME MENU pour quitter le menu. â¢S i aucun son nâÂÂest produit, sélectionner un autre type pour les signaux audio . â¢P our de plus amples détails concernant les types de signal audio, reportez-vous au mode dâÂÂemploi qui accompagne lâÂÂappareil relié. ⢠Selon lâÂÂappareil relié, il vous faut également des câbles pour les signaux audio analogiques. ⢠HDMI, le logo HDMI et High-Definition Multime- dia Interface sont des marques de fabrique ou des marques déposées de HDMI licensing LLC. PDP5040HD-UC (HDMI) 8/22/03, 10:48 5
6 Sp IN SERVICE ONLY MONITOR OUT DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL INPUT 1 COMPONENT VIDEO S400 DTV-ANTENNA IN INPUT 3 INPUT 1 INPUT 3 VCR CONTROL A ANTENNA/CABLE B OUT IN IN OUT CONTROL OUT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y HDMI AC INLET BLACK WHITE SYSTEM CABLE R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO INPUT 2 (TS) Equipo HMDI Media Receiver (vista trasera) Cable de audio (disponible comercialmente) Haga esta conexión al introducir señales de audio analógicas. Cable HDMI (disponible comercialmente) Cone xión de un equipo HDMI Para los pr ocedimientos de manoseo y otras funciones, consulte el manual de instrucciones dedicado. T abla de correlación de las señale s de entrada 1 920 â 10 8 0 i @ 5 9 ,94/6 0Hz 720 â 480 p @ 59 ,94/6 0Hz 12 8 0 â 72 0p@5 9,94/6 0Hz 72 0(1 4 40) â 48 0i@5 9,94/6 0Hz ⢠Las señales de PC están fuera de correspondencia. Utilización de la entrada HDMI Los terminales INPUT 1 e INPUT 3 incluyen terminales HDMI a los cuales pueden introducirse señales digitales de audio y vÃÂdeo . P ara utilizar el terminal HDMI, active el terminal y especifique los tipos de señales de audio y vÃÂdeo que se van recibir desde el equipo conectado. P ara el tipos de señales, consulte el manual de instrucciones que acompaña el equipo conectado. Antes de iniciar el menú, pulse INPUT 1 (o INPUT 3 ) del mando a distancia o pulse INPUT de la pantalla de plasma para seleccionar INPUT 1 (o INPUT 3). P ara activar el terminal HDMI: 1 Pu l se HOME MENU . 2 Pu l se / para seleccionar âÂÂOpciónâ y , a continuación, pulse ENTER . 3 Pu l se / para seleccionar âÂÂEntrada HDMIâ y , a continuación, pulse ENTER . 4 Pu l se / para seleccionar âÂÂV alor â y , a continuación, pulse ENTER . 5 Pu l se / para seleccionar â Activar â y , a continuación, pulse ENTER . V alor Desactivar Activar ÃÂtem Descripción Desactivar Desactiva el t erminal HDMI. (valor pr edet erminado) Activar A ctiv a el t erminal HDMI. 6 Pul se HOME MENU para salir del menú. PDP5040HD-UC (HDMI) 8/22/03, 10:48 6
7 Sp Español P ara especificar el tipo de señales de vÃÂdeo digitales: 1 Pul se HOME MENU . 2 Pul se / para seleccionar âÂÂOpciónâ y , a continuación, pulse ENTER . 3 Pul se / para seleccionar âÂÂEntrada HDMIâ y , a continuación, pulse ENTER . 4 Pul se / para seleccionar â VÃÂdeoâ y , a continuación, pulse ENTER . 5 Pul se / para seleccionar el tipo de señales de vÃÂdeo digitales y , a continuación, pulse ENTER . V alor Auto Color-1 Color-2 Color-3 â¢S i se selecciona â AutoâÂÂ, se hará un intento para identificar el tipo de señales de vÃÂdeo digitales cuando se reciben las señales de vÃÂdeo digitales. ÃÂtem Descripción Aut o Identifica automáticament e la s (valor pr edet erminado) señales de vÃÂdeo digitale s. Color -1 Señale s de vÃÂdeo component e digitale s (4:2:2) bloqueadas Color -2 Señale s de vÃÂdeo component e digitale s (4:4:4) bloqueadas Color -3 Señale s R GB digitales bloqueadas 6 Pul se HOME MENU para salir del menú. â¢S i selecciona un parámetro diferente de â AutoâÂÂ, haga un ajuste que produzca un color natural. â¢S i no aparece ninguna imagen, especifique otro tipo de señal de vÃÂdeo digital. â¢P ara el tipo de señales de vÃÂdeo digitales que se debe especificar , consulte el manual de instrucciones que acompaña el equipo conectado. P ara especificar el tipo de señales de audio: 1 Pul se HOME MENU . 2 Pul se / para seleccionar âÂÂOpciónâ y , a continuación, pulse ENTER . 3 Pul se / para seleccionar âÂÂEntrada HDMIâ y , a continuación, pulse ENTER . 4 Pul se / para seleccionar â Audioâ y , a continuación, pulse ENTER . 5 Pul se / para seleccionar el tipo de señales de audio y , a continuación, pulse ENTER . V alor Auto Digital Analógico â¢S i se selecciona â AutoâÂÂ, se hará un intento para identificar el tipo de señales de audio cuando se reciben las señales de audio . ÃÂtem Descripción Aut o Identifica automáticament e las (valor pr edet erminado) señales de audio intr oducidas. Digital A cepta la s señales de audio digit ales. Analógico A cept a las señale s de audio analógicas. 6 Pul se HOME MENU para salir del menú. â¢S i no se genera ningún sonido , especifique otro tipo de señales de audio. â¢P ara el tipo de señales de audio que se debe especificar , consulte el manual de instrucciones que acompaña el equipo conectado . ⢠Dependiendo del equipo que se va conectar , también necesita conectar cables de audio analógicos. ⢠HDMI, el logotipo de HDMI, y la interfaz High- Definition Multimedia Interface son marcas comerciales o marcas comerciales registradas de HDMI licensing LLC. PDP5040HD-UC (HDMI) 8/22/03, 10:48 7
PIONEER CORPORA TION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, T okyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS [USA] INC. P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: [03] 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. Blvd. Manuel Avila Camacho 138, 10 piso Col. Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000 TEL: 52-55-9178-4270 FAX: 52-55-5202-3714 Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2003 Pioneer Corporation. All rights reserved. <03H00001> Printed in Japan / Imprimé au Japon < ARE1373-A > PDP5040HD-UC (HDMI) 8/22/03, 10:48 8